Home

Contents - Alcatel-Lucent Documentation Center

Contents

1. The light grey NEs can not be accessed by the external OS Figure C 1 Northbound Interface The number of concurrent northbound interface sessions supported by a single NE will depend on the number of available virtual circuits on the NE The AEM NB will provide the independence of the northbound interface sessions and the AEM NB GUI interface so an operator using the AEM NB GUI will not get to know whether a northbound interface session is running or not Northbound Interface Spe cific TL1 Messages Some TL1 messages feature more parameters when invoked via AEM NB These TL1 messages are described in this section namely m REPT ALM Report Alarm m RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms m RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 p 1 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 3 1 1 Purpose A REPT ALM Report Alarm message is generated autonomously by the NE to report the occurrence of an equipment facility or system alarm condition to the OS AEM NB and CIT An alarm condition reported via the REPT ALM message has a corresponding REPT ALM clearance message that is generated when the alarm condition clears Abortable No Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Relat
2. tion IE TCL NE12 Information a NE Details Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing Source Control Date amp Time NE Data TCL NE12 NE id n Communication Info IP Address nean TID sstem Authentication Login LUCENTO1 Password Connection Connection State Connected Disconnect Close Figure 5 13 NE Name Information Window This window includes of 5 tabs m NE Details cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 17 m NE Synchronization cf Chapter 5 3 3 1 page 5 45 m Inventory Data cf Chapter 5 3 3 2 page 5 49 m Timing Source Control cf Chapter 5 3 3 3 page 5 52 m Date amp Time cf Chapter 5 3 3 4 page 5 56 5 3 3 1 Network Element Synchronization 5 3 3 11 Configuration Information Synchronization Overview The possibility exists for the AEM NB database to become inconsistent with the information stored locally in the NE Non Volatile Data Storage A database re synchronization capability provides a mechanism for the AEM NB database to be made consistent synchronized with the locally stored NE information Two NE configuration data synchronization states can be identified AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 45 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 1 9 3M am m SYNC The AEM NB database is consistent with the locally stored NE in formation and all the autonomous messages concerning configuration changes are e
3. Close Figure 5 25 NVDS Restore Window The Filename list displays all backup file names 3 Select a desired file in the list The corresponding file will be displayed in the Filename field and can be edited 4 Click on OK this command button is available only after having selected the file name A Warning window pops up NE NVDS Restore may be service affecting Do you want to continue 5 Press Yes to confirm this message An n Progress window pops up NVDS restore on NE Name in progress 6 Wait until this process is finished AEM NB R1 3 5 72 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration gt NOTE When a NVDS restore process is started all AEM NB variables are set to their initial values to provoke a FULL synchronization The NE synchroniza tion state goes to ASYNC The asociation between AEM NB and NE is lost and recovered The FULL synchronization is launched for that NE Finally the NE is connected and perfectly synchronized 5 3 6 Network Element Reset This menu is used to reset the NE s NVDS to the factory default except for the IP address and the target identifier so that the AEM NB can still communicate with the NE after command execution is complete Procedure Complete the following procedure to get the inventory data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt N
4. 7 Contents AEM NB R1 3 5 IV Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 1 Overview This chapter describes the Configuration Manager application of the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB Release 1 3 It addresses the following topics m Overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access System m Explanation of menu bar and Network Browser m Screen navigation Equipment configuration and Service provisioning 5 1 1 Overview of AnyMedia Access System R13 363 211 412 This section provides a short overview of the controlled AnyMedia Access Sys tem For more information please refer to the network element documentation for R1 3 The architecture of the AnyMedia AccessSystem R 1 3 is a single shelf with the following main components as shown in Figure 5 1 page 5 3 m XAnyMedia shelf m Power filter unit PFU m Common plug ins for narrowband services Two common data and control COMDAC One communication Interface Unit CIU Up to four E1 interface unit IO E1 Two high level data link control plug in IO HDLC AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 5 1 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview mm m Upto 16 application packs AP for narrowband services LPZ100 32 Z ports LPP100 24 Z ports LPU112 12 U ports m Test application pack 100 TAP100 m Plug ins for broadband services
5. Selecting Filter 6 20 Version 1 00 Proceed as follows to select the desired filter option Alarm Monitoring Step Procedure 1 Select the desired filter option If you want to view then select Filters gt Result Notes all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours all critical raised alarms all raised alarms all alarms from a host Alarms for the last 24 hours Critical Raised Alarms Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter NE selection window will open see details below all not cleared critical alarms Critical Alarms not cleared The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all owned acknowl edge alarms Owned Acknowledge Alarms The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter all cleared alarms all acknowledge alarms all alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms The same filter option can be selected The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter The alarms are dis played according to the selected filter via the option menu Filters the general information section cf Chapter
6. ROC over PLL E1 line Recommended DCN Configurations Router E1 Line lt _ DACS joe LL service m node nes 10BaseT Ethernet card E1 channelized card TCP IP nx E1 LL amp ROC NE ROC amp LL Figure A 5 Configuration of 30 channel Permanent Leased Line Access to ROC 6 2 Communication with Remote NEs Us ing Inband ATM PVC A 10 Version 1 00 The assumptions for this configuration are 08 99 There are broadband and narrowband access technologies collocated in the same NE Narrowband access is oriented to telephony applications and is based on V5 interfaces broadband access is oriented to data appli cations and is based on Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM over Asym metrical Digital Subscriber Line ADSL access The broadband access consists of ADSL application packs and Access Feeder Multiplexer AFM control cards which make the switching between ADSL access traffic and ATM networks using E3 interfaces 30 channel market There is an ATM network between Central Office and remote AnyMedia NEs In this scenario ATM Permanent Virtual Circuits PVCs are used to com municate narrowband TL1 FTP over TCP based and broadband SNMP over UDP and FTP over TCP based management traffic between AEM NB BB Element Managers and AnyMedia NEs One ATM PVC will be used for every NE to be managed this ATM PVC carr
7. Figure A 4 AEM NB Protocol Profiles A 6 Recommended DCN Configu rations If a data network is not yet available between the central site where the AEM NB is located and the remote site where the NEs are located the following two config urations are recommended m ROC over permanent leased lines DCN cf Chapter A 6 1 page 5 m Communication with remote NEs using inband ATM PVC Chapter A 6 2 page A 10 A 6 1 ROC Over Permanent Leased Lines DCN The assumptions for this configuration are m The LAN based V5DLC AEM NB is located in the central office m The V5DLCs NEs are located in remote locations AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations A 3 A5 AX m The OAM amp P information mapped in the 64 kbit s ROCs is transported from the AEM NB in the central office to the remote locations using Perma nent Leased Lines PLLs which are carried via m SDH equipment in ring or point to point structure Then a digital cross connect system e g DACS II is available in the central office it extracts the ROCs from each 2 Mbit s link and put up to 30 ROCs to one 2 Mbit s link m equipment in point to point structure Then a digital cross con nect system e g DACS II is available in the central office it ex tracts the ROCs from each 2 Mbit s link and put up to 30 ROCs to one 2 Mbit s link m Using exis
8. 7 Contents 6 3 4 3 Filters 6 19 6 3 4 4 Help 6 21 6 3 5 Alarm Viewer Functions 6 21 6 4 Test Management 6 23 6 4 1 User Line Test 6 25 6 4 2 User Port Test 6 29 6 4 3 Standby Card Test Scheduling 6 31 6 4 4 Built in Self Test 6 32 6 4 5 TAP Test 6 33 6 4 6 CRC Test 6 34 6 4 7 Loopback Test at the Feeder Side 6 37 6 4 8 Loopback Test at the ISDN User Port Side 6 38 65 Information Management and Maintenance 6 40 6 5 1 NE AEM NB Connection States 6 40 6 5 2 Changing Connection States 6 40 6 5 3 Configuration Data Synchronization after Association 6 41 6 5 4 Alarm Data Synchronization after Association 6 42 6 5 5 Association Maintenance 6 43 6 6 Alarms 6 44 6 6 1 Overview 6 44 6 6 2 Alarm Types 6 44 6 6 3 Network Element Alarms 6 46 6 6 4 Element Manager Platform Alarms 6 46 6 6 4 1 LOG DEL FULL 6 46 6 6 4 2 LOG DEL PART 6 47 6 6 4 3 NEASSOC FAILED 6 47 6 6 4 4 NEASSOC LOST 6 48 6 6 4 5 SWVR ILLEGAL 6 49 6 6 4 6 TCP IP CON REFUSED 6 49 6 6 4 7 TL1 COMM DENIED 6 50 AEM NB R1 3 6 II Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance 6 1 Overview This chapter provides you with informations about m Basics on the alarm management m Basics on alarms m Maintenance actions if certain alarms are pending m Using the Alarm Viewer m Performing test actions with the test management m Basics on information management e g connection states 6 2 Alarm Management
9. Feeder Multiplexer AFM or AFMDS3 ADSL application pack ADSL4 AP m Backplane 1 Even when the AEM NB directly manages only the narrowband plug ins of the AnyMedia Access System the broadband plug ins will also be displayed to provide the required inte gration level between both managers AEM NB R1 3 5 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview E1 DOWN sc ALARM OUT RTU ALARM IN Roko rogo Sogo AFM_E3 or AFMDS3 Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack Application pack COMDAC COMDAC A 1 2 CIU z 5 14 15 16 IO_HDLC plug ins for narrowband services 1 plug ins for narrowband services COMDAGCs for narrowband services CIU for narrowband services AFM plug in for broadband services AFM_E3 or AFMDS3 15 APs may be mixed narrowband APs POTS ISDN and broadband APs ADSL4 APs Figure 51 AnyMedia Shelf Layout Mixed Configuration for Narrowband and Broadband Services 5 52 Synchronization Interfaces For network synchronization of the narrowband part the AEM NB recovers timing from two types of sources
10. N d e m pem m e e 9 4 m 9 AR m o Version 1 00 08 99 2 I 7 Contents AEM NB R1 3 2 II Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning 2 1 General 363 211 412 The AEM NB H1 3 AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrow band Services Release 1 3 runs on SUN SPARC Solaris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus security and Y2000 patches and patch 106255 01 recom mended by SUN In order to successfully install the AEM NB R1 3 for the SUN Solaris installation the following has to be taken into account Disk partitioning HDD partitioning should include in addition to the standard UNIX entries e g usr var etc two entries for the AEM NB software and the trans action log cf Chapter 2 1 1 page 2 2 for size requirements Swap space In addition to the SUN recommendation at least double the size of the RAM memory should be used for swap 100MB per platform should be configured for OODBMS requirements NIS If more than one AEM NB platform is to be used NIS should be configured in the server so all the AEM NB clients will share the logins and password which are configured in the server tables All the users require a NOT null password in order to manage AEM NB NFS Network File Sharing is not required even when using
11. classix_dart_022 bin OK Close I Figure 5 21 NE SW Download Window 08 99 This window is subdivided into two fields Target and Download Informa tion If coming from All level All the Target pull down list displays all NEs It Allows to select the set of NEs on which the software download is to be made by clicking on NEs in the pull down list The selected NEs in the list will be highlighted If coming from NE level All gt NE this field is a non editable text field al ready filled with the name of the NE selected at the NE level Select one or more NEs in the Target list if coming from All Set the check box Standby Comdac Automatic Copy if you want to copy automatically the software from the working comdac to the standby COMDAC after the software download is completed successfully Select a desired file in the Download Information list The corresponding file will be displayed in the Filename field Click on OK A Warning window pops up the Software Download window remains on the screen after the download is finished SW Download is service affecting Do you want to continue AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration If you decide to continue the AEM NB starts the download procedure An In Progress window pops up showing the following message SW Download to lt NE Name gt in progress gt NOTE Progress window is a dialogue
12. 5 4 6 3 Edit Communication Channel Procedure 363 211 412 This modal window is used to modify a CC id It can be reached only via Edit CC from the V5 Signalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 Edit Communication Channel NE Name TELS NES V5 Interface Id 111 Comm Channel ld 1 Close x Figure 5 50 Edit Communication Channel Window Parameters Buttons Description Comm Chan This field is used to enter the new value for the CC This nel id value is only taken into account for V5 2 Possible values 0 65503 Ok This button is used to modify a CC to the given id It is only enabled when a CC id is modified Complete the following procedure to modify a communication channel Step Procedure 1 Enter a new CC id 2 Click on Ok to confirm 3 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB 1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 5 139 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning p See 5 4 6 4 Add Communication Path This modal window is used to create a CP while creating a CP it can be cross connected to a CC optional It can be reached only via Add CP from the V5 Sig nalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 Add Communication Path NE Name TCL NE13 V5 Interface Id Comm Path type ISDN p Comm Path 4 Comm Channelld None Apply Close Figure 5 51 Add Communication Path Window Parameters Buttons Descript
13. Figure 3 9 System Administration Stopped Running The System Administration window displays two lists Stopped and Running Lists The Stopped list contains all applications which are not running The Running list contains all running applications You can stop running or start stopped applica tions The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the System Administration window Table 3 8 System Administration Actions If you want to then start one or more applications select the applications which shall be started under Stopped and press Add shut down one or more applications select the applications to be shut down under Running and press Remove close the window press Close or select File gt Exit Start Shut down You may start or shut down more than one application at the same time To do so more applications click on all desired applications once while the Ct r1 key is pressed If more appli cations are selected you can deselect a certain application by clicking on it again while the Ct r1 key is pressed A range of consecutive lines can be selected si multaneously by clicking on the first line of the range and then clicking on the last line while the Shift key is pressed AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 19 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown a 3 4 4 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applica tions via Command Line The system can be
14. Acknowledged The alarm is still active and being investigated Cleared Alarm condition has been cleared or the user has requested the clearing of this alarm m Date amp Time First Raise Date and Time of the first Raised status in the life cycle of one alarm m Date amp Time Last Change Date and Time of the last status change in the life cycle of one alarm AEM NB R1 3 6 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring p 0 m Occurrences Number of times the alarm has been raised between the first raised time and the current time m User Ack The login of the last user which has acknowledged an alarm 6 3 3 4 2 Sorting Alarms Summary The user can sort alarms by the different fields by clicking on the respective header The sort can be ascending or descending order The sort order is re versed by clicking on the respective header All alarm fields are sorted by alphanumeric order except dates severity and status fields m Inthe severity field alarms are sorted in the logical order Critical Major Minor and Information m Inthe status field alarms are sorted in the logical order Raised Acknowl edge and Clear Effects The alarms are re arranged according to the selected criteria Sorting Alarms Proceed as follows to sort the alarm display Step Procedure 1 Click on the header according to which the alarms are to be sorted Response The al
15. Registering Servers in the Orbix Implementation Repository 20948 New Connection hostname domain name IT daemon root pid lt pid gt optimised AEM NB R1 3 2 26 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 20949 New Connection host name domain name IT daemon root pid lt pid gt optimised 1 20950 New Connection lt pid gt Killed orbixd daemon pid lt pid gt have been killed Was mine 20846 Killed ns daemon pid 20846 have been killed Was mine Nkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Execute AnyMediaNBEM sh to set the envi ronment VW e e ee e ee e ee e ee e ee ce ee e eee eee ee e ke e kv kv e ke kv x x You have the installation logfile in Server path tmp EM Install log Installation of LuANY15S was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 5 was successful Server side installation 50 Reboot the machine in order to activate the cron and configuration files 2 2 1 2 Client Side Installation Complete the following procedure to install the AnyMedia client side Step Procedure 51 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed cdrom or disk 52 Type install AMEMR15 and press Return AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the
16. We must join AFM LAN port with COMDAC LAN port located on top front panel of the FAST shelf by means of a Ethernet cross over cable 6 2 3 Element Manager Server Configura tion The element manager server configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 3 page A 8 A 6 2 4 Element Manager Client Configuration The element manager client configuration is the same as described in Chapter A 6 1 4 page A 8 A 6 25 Transport Elements Configuration The switches which will transport the ATM PVCs carrying the IP manage ment traffic need to be provisioned i e a table must be provisioned in these switches saying that the cells from a specific VPI VCI are related to a VPI VCI pair in another interface The ATM router and AnyMedia NEs must be attached to the network by using links for the router other links may also be used e g E1 STM 1 etc If the switch supports directly r c1483 a direct LAN connec tion between the switch and the CO LAN environment must be provisioned in this case there is no need of ATM router at the CO side AEM NB R1 3 A 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations eee If SDH ADMs are used the paths which carry the ATM information need to be pro visioned A 6 2 6 Connection Diagram Configuration of the ATM PVC in the ATM P Switch e g VPIVCI a ATM switching Switch or other interface E3
17. tween AEM NB and NE Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the TCP IP communication addresses Are the TCP IP communication addresses correct Yes Continue with step 2 No Correct the addresses Continue with step 4 2 Check the gateway NE identification AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 49 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms p 1 M O Is the gateway NE identification correct Yes Continue with step 3 No Correct the identification Continue with step 4 3 Check the Data Communication Network DCN Is the DON in service Yes Continue with step 4 No Bring the DCN into service 4 Is the alarm now cleared Yes Lucent Technologies Technical Support 6 6 4 7 TL1 COMM DENIED Meaning User login for a TL1 communication session was denied by the NE for all TCP IP connections opened Abbreviation TL1 COMM DENIED Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when a TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and the NE has been successfully opened Effects It is not possible to manage the NE because there is no TL1 communication ses sion available Possible Cause s A user login error is stopping the TL1 communication session establishment proc ess between the AEM NB and the NE Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check for
18. 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt EM NE Synchronization via the menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab Synchronization this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt EM NE Synchronization Figure 5 14 NE Name Information Window Tab Synchronization AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 47 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p h A 3 1 The following table shows the view edit options of the NE Name Information win dow tab Synchronization Parameters Buttons Configuration Description The Sync State represents the configuration synchroniza tion state between the AEM NB and NE This information is obtained from the NE and it will be automatically updated Possible values are SYNC and ASYNC Alarms The Proc State represents the alarm processing state be tween the AEM NB and NE This information is obtained from the NE and it will be automatically updated Possible values are PROC and BLOCK Autonomous The check boxes can be used to show and edit autonomous Outputs States output states They are enabled only after clicking on the Get button The Get button can be used to show the current autono mous output states of the NE
19. AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 About this Document 7 2 CD ROM The User Service Manual and the Functional Description are available in PDF for mat on CD ROM and an Adobe Acrobat Reader is provided to view them Table 2 Customer Documentation on CD ROM Component CD ROM Ordering Number AEM NB 1 3 Customer Documentation on CD ROM includes 363 211 415 User Service Manual USM Functional Description 8 How to Order This Document Ordering number The ordering number for the AEM NB User Service Manual is 363 211 412 Order procedure To order additional hard copies of this document and or to request placement on the standing order list send or call in an order as follows Telephone Order Monday through Friday Within USA 1 888 LUCENT8 7 30 a m to 6 30 p m EST FAX from USA 1 800 566 9568 FAX Worldwide 1 317 322 6699 Mail Order Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center Attention Priscilla Stanley email pfstanley lucent com 2855 N Franklin Road P O Box 19901 USA Indianapolis IN 46219 a For ordering a purchase order number or charge card number is required with all orders Make checks payable to Lucent Technologies One time orders One time orders include the contents for the current document issue in effect at the time of order Standing orders You may request an update on the standing order list for all later reissues of any document The
20. Procedure via Cur b Via the Network Browser and the cursor menu Menu Select the port you intend the test to run for the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt TAP100 Start the test by selecting TAP Test from the cursor menu Procedure via TL1 c Viathe TL1 Command Line Interface Command This option does not open the Test Result window cf step 2 Enter the following TL1 command to start the TAP test Staging parameter lock Command code block 2 Wait until the Test Result window cf Figure 6 11 page 6 34 pears and view the test result gt NOTE After confirming the TAP test execution a Progress window pops up showing the following message TAP Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Clicking on the Cancel button will stop the test and the result window see below will not appear AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 33 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management p J A 1 3 Test Result The TAP Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit E TAP Test Result Name 14 Slot 1 12 Provisioned Apparatus Code TAP100 Result Passed Close Figure 6 11 The TAP Test Result Window The text fields are display only they have the following meaning Table 6 14 Meaning of the Text Fields in the TAP Test Result Window
21. p 5 4 8 Move a V5 Link in Service Procedure Complete the following procedure to move a V5 Link in service Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt E1 Feeders List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar E1 Feeder List window pops up gt NOTE Do the following for all V5 links which should be moved in service 2 Select a V5 link in the E1 Feeders List und click on Edit V5 Link The E1Feeder V5 Link window tab V5 Link pops up 3 Use the option menu Administrative State to change this parameter from Locked to Unlocked 4 Click on Apply to confirm 5 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 9 Move a V5 User Port in Service Procedure Complete the following procedure to move a V5 User Port in service Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 User Port List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar The V5 User Port List window pops up gt NOTE Do the following for all V5 User Ports which should be moved in service 2 Select V5 User Port in the V5 User Port List und click on Edit V5 User Port The V5 PSTN User Port window or V5 ISDN BRA User Port win dow pops up 3 Use the option menu Administrative State to change this parameter from Locked to Unlocked AEM NB R1 3 5
22. 2 2 Installation Procedure General The AEM NB R1 3 distribution includes an installation script called install_AMEMR15 which shall be used in a full installation it includes all pack ages stored on the distribution media Also you can make individual package in stallations using the pkgadd command or using the admintool system adminis tration with a graphical interface In this case you must be very careful with the packages dependencies showed in Packages Dependences on page 40 This guide shows the flow of the installation according to the interaction with the administrator using the installation script provided in the distribution and using the pkgadd command for individual installations Common Tasks Common actions must be make in both cases as follows m You need to be logged on as root m Get ready your distribution medium Insert and Mount Insert and mount the CD If the machine is running the vold it will recog the CDROM nize that the CD is in place and mount iton cdrom AnyMediaNBEMR15 depending on your system configuration cdrom AnyMediaNBEMR15 might have to be replaced with a different device name Depending on the configuration of vold you may have to append a trailing dot to refer ences to file names on the CD This is due to hs s imposing a suffix on the file names If the machine is not running the vold type mount F hsfs o ro notraildot dev dsk c0t6d0s2 cdrom The device iden
23. 3 7 Log Management 3 31 3 7 1 Different Log Types s 3 7 2 Configuration of Logs 3 31 3 7 3 Log Viewer Window 3 32 3 8 Disaster Recovery 3 37 AEM NB R1 3 3 II Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management 3 1 Overview This chapter provides you with information about m Accessing the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrow band Services R1 3 AEM NB General handling of the workspace and AEM NB windows m Starting up and shutting down applications m Printing out reports from AEM NB windows m Backup restore tasks m Basics on log management and how to use the Log Viewer AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 1 System Management 3 2 System Access System Access To access the AnyMedia Element Manager AEM NB application you need to have an account in the underlying operating system and this account has to be accepted as a user account of AEM NB The user account has to be NIS Net work Information Name Service based and the NIS can be provided by the Any Media Server or by another machine AEM NB user accounts are managed by the administrator cf Chapter 4 3 2 1 Login to Operation System System Login Login Correct Login Incorrect Start Core Applica tions Start AEM NB Ac cess Bar 3 2 Version 1 00 This chapter describes how to log into the system Complete the following procedure to log in Step Procedure 1 The system asks for your user
24. 4 Select one user group of the User Group Name field and click Open The User Group Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user group User Group Profile 7 74 User Group Name Maintenance Description Maintenance Group Descriptiori Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Users Not Assigned Users Assigned Users Users veradmin veri PARTY Ok Apply Close Figure 4 27 Window User Group Profile Users Change To change the user group name enter the new name in the User Group Name User Group Name field 3 to 30 characters Any characters are allowed Change User Group change the user group description enter the new information in the Descrip Description tion field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed Adding To assign further users to the selected user group click Users select one or more Users users in the Users Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To a create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 2 Removing To remove assigned users from the selected user group click Users select one Users or more users in the Users Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE The last user of user group administrator is protected against deletions AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 23 User Management User Groups Adding to To give the selected user group access to further domains click
25. AEM NB R1 3 B 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Variables and Configuration Parameters ee Configuration Man agement Settings OAM Settings 363 211 412 Table 2 2 Name Configuration Parameters AnyMediaNBEM cfg File Description CM directoryNVDS gt NOTE NVDS files location This files store informa tion in such a way as to survive indefinite peri ods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are store in the NVDS directory and hence are the param eter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Default value CM nefiles NVDS All paths showed as default value are relative to the AnyMedia installation path CM directoryNVPS OAM backup archiveDirectory NVPS files location It keeps software program data It resides in the NE lt COMDAC gt Default value CM nefiles NVPS default path or device like a Tape unit where the AnyMedia archives will be placed Default value archives OAM backup backupDirectory default path or device like a Tape unit where the AnyMedia backups will be placed Default value backups OAM backup backupLogDirec tory default path where the backup s logs will be placed Default value tmp OAM backup numberOfLog Files OAM log directoryCurrentLogs OAM log directoryRestored Logs OAM log maximumTotal LogSize maximum number of backup s log files Range of values 1
26. Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration See 5 3 1 Add a Network Element The following steps are necessary to add an NE m Create NE m Assign Domain m Connect NE Assumptions To add an NE the following assumptions must be fulfilled m The PC based GSI is used to set the NE in a state where NVDS Non Vol atile Data Storage is populated with the minimum values i e target id IP address user id m All those parameters are assumed to be known by the user m Ihe DCN Data Communication Network link with the NEs is available cf Appendix m Domains are already created cf Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 gt NOTE The windows shown in this chapter are merely meant as an example The contents text within a window as well as the window itself may slightly dif fer from the window as shown on your system AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 17 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p lg Add NE Procedure 5 18 Version 1 00 Complete the following procedure to add an NE Step Procedure Select ALL in the Network Browser and Create NE via the cursor menu or select File gt New gt NE or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Create gt NE via the menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up zj New NE E NE Details Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing Source Control Date amp Time NE
27. Functional Description Introduction 1 2 4 System Working Modes The AEM NB can work in the following two modes m Stand alone mode m Integrated management mode These modes are not mutually exclusive i e the AEM NB is always able to per form the element management tasks even while it is connected to any other man agement system OS Stand Alone Mode In the stand alone mode the AEM NB performs the whole management of the NEs on its own The user is able to perform all management tasks via the GUI Figure 1 1 shows the system architecture in the stand alone mode AEM NB iss Ns FTP NE Figure 11 Stand Alone Mode Integrated In the integrated management mode the AEM NB works as an integral part of the Management Mode customer s management network providing higher management systems OSs with services to manage NEs in their domains The AEM NB allows other OSs to pass provisioning testing or fault information to and from the NEs e g a fault management surveillance system can collect fault data using the northbound interface AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 5 Functional Description Introduction Figure 1 2 shows the system architecture of the integrated management mode i TL1 NE Figure 1 2 Integrated Management Mode The complete system and software architecture of the AEM NB is described in Chapter 1 3 page 1 7 AEM NB R1 3 1 6 Version 1 00 08
28. The option menu HDLC Flag Monitoring can be used to de fine the HDLC Flag Monitoring condition Possible values Yes or No The option menu Administrative State can be used to se lect the administrative state for the V5 1 Interface Possible values Locked Unlocked After creation the interface is always Locked Operational State Shows the current operational state of this V5 Interface Get This button can be used to get the current operational state from the NE The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the V5 1 Interface Data field Command but The V5 User Ports button provides access to the V5 User tons Port List window limited to the user ports that are linked to this V5 Interface The Add PSTN button provides access to the V5 PSTN User Port window where the V5 1 Interface is displayed and cannot be modified The Add ISDN button provides access to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port window where the V5 1 Interface is dis played and cannot be modified The Signalling button provides access to the V5 Signal ling window for this V5 1 Interface Link The Physical Feeder field shows the id that is linked to this V5 1 Interface if there is one The Set Feeder button provides access to the V5 1 Set Feeder window This button is enabled only when the Ad ministrative State is Locked The Remove button can be used to delete the selected feeder This button is only available if there
29. V5 Link tab pops up to modify the link in a way that cross connecting is possible cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 2 page 5 104 After that the V5 2 Add Re move Link window is available again and the V5 Link and the related cross connection will be added 3 Repeat step 2 to add another Available Link s or proceed with step 4 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 5 98 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 2 3 Configure E1 Feeder List This window shows all available E1 feeders and provides access to E1 Feeder V5 Link window for link parameter modification and for feeder information Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit the E1 Feeders List Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt E1 Feeders Listin the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar The E1 Feeder List window pops up si E1 Feeders List EIE E1 Feeders List Feeder V5 Interface id V5 Link id 1 1 1 1 111 11 1 1 1 2 21 3 1 1 1 3 111 34 e1 1 1 4 256 299 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 250 81 1 2 4 e1 1 3 1 e1 1 3 2 81 1 3 3 1 1 3 4 1 1 4 1 1 1 4 2 Edit E1 Edit v5 Link Remove Close x Figure 5 36 E1 Feeders List Window The following table shows the view edit options of the E1 Feeders List
30. tinue working after a problem except in the most critical situations i e corrupted files hardware failure In case of a disaster the following steps should be per formed by the system administrator to repair the AEM NB and minimize the data loss 1 Repair replace any hardware and OS components that may be damaged Start the system and check that the workstations and network boot prop erly and the users are able to log into the system 2 Check if the AEM NB including all third party software remains installed on the machine To list all the packages installed type pkginfo grep application Lu 3 Remove all the listed packages using the pkgrm command cf Chapter 2 2 4 page 2 43 4 Re install the AEM NB software The procedure is the same as for install ing the software for the first time cf Chapter 2 2 1 page 2 6 gt NOTE The packages must be re installed in the same paths as the original instal lation otherwise the data cannot be restored 5 If any AEM NB variable was customized remember to reset it the installa tion sets all values to default Start the AEM NB server and at least one client All application windows Users Alarms Configuration should open but will show only the initial information 6 Shut down the AEM NB Restore the latest backup available cf Chapter 3 6 page 3 23 Re start the AEM NB server and at least one cli ent Now the restored data shall be shown and the syst
31. 1 4 3 Network Operation amp Surveillance Actions During network operation amp surveillance the administration control and supervi sion of the network mainly include m Fault Management m Network Modification m Performance Monitoring Required The administrator rights are sufficient to perform all required operations The vis Rights ual check of parameters and displays on the GUI requires monitoring rights only 1 4 3 1 Fault Management Alarm Types There are two alarm types alarms generated by the NEs and alarms generated by itself e g an alarm indicating that log files without archiving is being removed LOG DEL FULL All alarms are displayed in the alarm viewer It al lows the network operator to detect the alarm and to locate its source General Fault Figure 1 8 shows the general fault handling In the following the individual phases Handling are described in more detail AEM NB R1 3 1 22 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Working with AEM NB Fault localisation and diagnosis Identification of the alarm source Identification of the fault source Fault identification Detection of faults Alarm display on the user interface Alarm logs Fault clearance Recovery mechanisms Interactions between operator and AEM NB Initiation of maintenance actions P eP Figure 1 8 General Fault Handling 1 4 3 1 1 Fault Identification Backgrou
32. 6 1 ROC Over Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 5 A 6 2 Communication with Remote NEs Using Inband ATM PVC A 10 System Variables and Configuration Parameters 1 B 1 Overview B 1 2 System Variables B 1 B 3 Configuration Parameters B 2 B 3 1 AnyMedia Server Configuration Parameters B 2 B 3 2 AnyMedia Client GUI Configuration Variables B 4 AEM NB R1 3 VIII Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Contents C Northbound Interface C 1 C 1 Overview C 1 C 2 Northbound Interface Basics C 1 C 2 1 Northbound Interface Description C 1 Northbound Interface Specific TL1 Messages C 3 C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 4 C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 9 C 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment C 15 AB Abbreviations AB 1 GL Glossary GL 1 IN Index IN 1 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 IX Contents AEM NB R1 3 X Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 About this Document 1 Overview Purpose This User Service Manual USM provides the following information for Lucent Technologies AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Ser vices AEM NB Release 1 3 m A product overview and a functional product description m System turn up procedures and system modifications m User Management m Configuration management m Fault Management Maintenance The purpose of the USM is to provide the provisioning personnel with all informa tion necessary to provision
33. 6 2 1 Overview 363 211 412 The main function of the alarm management is to manage the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB and Network Ele ment NE related alarms that are registered in the Element Manager System EMS For the list of the NE alarms refer to Chapter 6 6 3 page 6 46 For the list of the alarms generated by the management system refer to Chapter 6 6 4 page 6 46 Once the communication connection between the AEM NB and an NE is estab lished the AEM NB clears the not connected NE alarm indication if they exist and starts an alarms and environment alarms synchronization process between the AEM NB alarm database and active NE alarms Finally the AEM NB will try to update its view of NE configuration data and will start a synchronization process between the AEM NB data set and the NE configuration information NE NVDS The NE database is always the master AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 6 1 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management p 3 The database does not maintain the alarm history it only stores the current alarms status An alarm can be in one of the following three states Raised Acknowledged Cleared The main responsibilities of the Alarm Management Subsystem AMS are the fol lowing m Maintain up to date alarm information m Notify alarm changes to alarm clients m Provide access to the current alarm data m Manage alarms
34. After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 31 User Management Controlled Objects p Other Fields The following fields are read only fields to display data of the selected controlled read only object Controlled Object Type Displays the controlled object type Possible values are EM and NE Value Displays the characteristics of the selected controlled object If the controlled ob ject is EM it displays if it is NE it displays the NE Id number AEM NB R1 3 4 32 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Contents 51 Overview 5 1 1 Overview of AnyMedia Access System R1 3 5 1 2 Synchronization Interfaces 5 1 3 Interfaces 5 1 4 Alarm Interfaces 5 1 5 Testing Interfaces 5 1 6 Plug amp Play Capabilities 5 1 6 1 NE Equipment Configuration Related Tasks 5 2 Configuration Manager Window 5 2 1 Network Browser 5 2 2 Menu Bar 5 2 3 Status Bar 5 2 4 Cursor Menu 5 2 4 1 Structure and Cursor Menus 53 Equipment Configuration 5 3 1 Add a Network Element 5 3 2 Shelf View 5 3 2 1 Configuration of the Plug ins 5 3 2 1 1 Configure an IO E1 5 3 2 1 2 Edit E1 Feeder 5 3 2 1 3 Configure a COMDAC 5 3 2 1 4 Configure a CIU 5 3 2 1 5 Configure an IO HDLC 5 3 2 1 6 Configure an Application 5 3 3 Edit View of Configuration Data 5 3 3
35. DLL They are not switched services and are not carried to the LE through the V5 interface but on special separate 2 Mbps links Plug in Term that is generally used for circuit pack units for example LPZ100 IO E1 which have pre designated slots with the capability to plug in the circuit pack Channel units are a subset of circuit packs used for supporting spe cific telephony functionality as in the case of line termination plug in Port This is circuitry built on an AP to provide an interface for subscribers Note that more than one port can be housed on an e g the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Port Test Also called circuit test Verifies the ability of an AP port to provide proper transmission and signaling It is the test ing of the port hardware The functions of the port test rather depend on the hardware function of the circuit e g POTS pulse metering ISDN These tests are performed on each AP using part of their self test capabilities Primary link The 2 048 Mbps link in a multi link V5 2 interface whose physical communication channel in timeslot 16 carries a communication path for the protection protocol and on V5 2 initialization also the communication path for the con trol protocol link control protocol and the BCC protocol Other communication paths may also be carried in the timeslot 16 Protection group 1 This is the standard group of physical communication channels consisting of the protected logical commu
36. Date amp Time Last_Change User Ack Occurrences m Views3 Index Summary Host Object ID Severity Status Date amp Time Last_Change m View4 All alarm fields Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected criteria AEM NB R1 3 6 18 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring p Se 4 Selecting Views Proceed as follows to select the desired view option Step Procedure 1 Select Views gt ViewX X 1 to 4 in the menu bar The same view options can be selected via the option menu Views in the general information section cf Chapter 6 3 3 3 page 6 14 Response The alarms are displayed according to the selected view 6 3 4 3 Filters Summary For displaying the alarm lists you can select pre defined filters Only those alarms corresponding to the pre defined criteria are displayed The alarm set is displayed without modifying the current view The filters are m Alarms for the last 24 hours all alarms which have been changed in the last 24 hours m Critical Raised Alarms m Raised Alarms m Alarms from a Host s m Critical Alarms not cleared m Owned Acknowledge Alarms m Clear Alarms m Acknowledge Alarms m None Filter All Alarms Effects The alarms are rearranged according to the selected filter criteria AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 19 Fault Management and Maintenance 2
37. IP Address format xxx xxx xxx xxx where x is a numeric 0 9 the TID has a range from 1 to 20 characters gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is broken ro Press Apply to confirm 8 Enter the Login and Password in the Authentication pane gt NOTE Once the connection is established these fields can not be edited unless the connection is broken 9 Press Apply to confirm gt NOTE Now the connection can be established The Label button in the field Con nection displays Connect 10 Press Connectto establish the connection If all entries were correct the connection will be established and the new NE can be displayed on the Network Browser Wrong entries incorrect login or password will result in an error mes sage gt NOTE The field Connection State reflects the current connection state with the NE Not Connected Not Connected Trying Connected Synchronizing and Connected The label button on the right hand side can be used to change the connec tion state Connect if the connection state is Not Connected Disconnect AEM NB R1 3 5 20 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 71474134 if the connection state is Connected or Connected Synchronizing Can cel if the connection state is Not Connected Trying Edit and provisioning actions are only po
38. Possible values 0 65503 gt NOTE Although 65503 is the maximum value only 47 com munication channels can exist for a V5 2 Interface OK This button is available only if a change was made i e either a CC id was entered or a feeder was selected or both It will use the current data to modify the configuration such that the selected feeder and CC id will identify the primary feeder Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit view a primary link Step Procedure 1 Select an appropriate feeder in the Primary Link Selection list 2 Enter change the CC id 3 Click on OK to confirm or click on Close to exit the window without action gt NOTE When a primary link is created the following entities are automatically cre ated time slot 16 is set to CC type a CC with the defined CC id is created and cross connected to that slot communication paths Control Link Con troland BCC are created and cross connected to that CC 5 4 4 Add Secondary V5 2 Link This windows displays V5 secondary link information The secondary link configu ration of a V5 2 Interface identifies the V5 Link that is selected to carry the protec tion group number 1 protection protocol gt NOTE The configuration of a secondary link is only possible if a primary link is al ready configured The Secondary Link window can only be reached from the V5 2 Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 by clicking on Set Seco
39. Procedure via TL1 b Via the TL1 Command Line Interface Command Staging parameter blocks Command code Common block Wait until the CRC Test window appears cf Figure 6 12 page 6 35 and view the test result gt NOTE After confirming the CRC test execution a n Progress window pops up showing the following message CRC Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Card Type Port id Clicking on the Cancel button will stop the test and the test result fields in the CRC Test window see below will be cleaned Test Result The CRC Test window pane Test Results cf Figure 6 12 page 6 35 shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit 6 4 7 Loopback Test at the Feeder Side It is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders Procedure Proceed as follows to set clear E1 loopbacks Step Procedure You have the following options to set clear a loopback Procedure via Net a Via the Network Browser the menu bar work Browser 1 Select the E1 Feeder you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt FAC500 gt E1 Feeder and Edit via the cursor menu The 1 Feeder V5 Link window pops up tab E1 Feeder The Loop back field displays the current loopback state Clear or Set 2 Click Label to change the loopback state Depending on the loopback state reflected this command button displays the possible opera
40. Select All gt NE gt Shelf in the Network Browser and Protection via the cursor menu or select Equipment gt Protection via the menu bar The Shelf Protection window pops up 2 Click on tab O HDLC Shelf Protection TCL NE13 COMDAC Protection Schema Protection Schema Disabled Not in service Protection State amp Switching IO HDLC1 Not applicable IO HDLC2 Not applicable Figure 5 20 Shelf Protection Window Tab IO HDLC AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 63 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p ll This window provides IO HDLC protection information It also provides the mech anisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection switches The following table shows the view edit options of the Shelf Protection window tab IO HDLC Parameters Buttons Description Protection This field shows s the protection schema for IO HDLCs used Schema in the NE Possible values Enabled if switching between IO HDLOs is enabled Disabled Not Equipped Disabled Not in service i e the card is not pre provisioned or its administrative state is locked or Disabled POTS only mode if switching between IO HDLOCs is not enabled Protection State IO HDLC 1 2 This non editable fields display the current and Switching working state Possible values Worki
41. Table 6 2 LED Meanings Circuit Pack Color Meanings lO E1 red m Lit during plug in failure m Flashes when the plug in executes off line self test green Lit when the plug in is service active yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 1 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 2 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 3 yellow Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 4 AEM NB R1 3 6 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management Table 6 2 LED Circuit Pack LED COMDAC NE FE CIU FLT ACT Lit when a test is in progress Plug in id in opera tion Lit when 48V Power supply A is in operation Lit when 48V Power supply B is in operation TC Lit when test is in progress TAP100 connected MISC ACO Application FLT i m Flashes when the plug in executes off line shelf tests IO HDLC FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the plug in m Flashes when the plug in executes off line shelf test Lit when the plug in is service active Meanings m Lit when a fault is detected on the plug in m Flashes during software download and turnup Indicates that this COMDAC is active Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical fred Lit when the highest severity alarm is major L
42. Text Fields Possible Values NE Name The unique identifier of the Any string consisting of up to selected NE 30 characters Slot The slot number of the Applica ap 1 1 16 tion Pack being used Provisioned Mnemonic used to identify the TAP100 Apparatus type of card provided Code Result The result of the test routines PASS or FAIL 3 Click on Close to exit the Test Hesult window 6 4 6 CRC Test This command starts a CRC test procedure for the specified ISDN drop The CRC test procedure checks the proper functionality of the CRC generator and detector for the specified time period Precondition Before the CRC test can be started an ISDN telephone must be connected to the port which shall be tested AEM NB R1 3 6 34 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management 7 mmm ees eae Procedure Proceed as follows to start a CRC test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Start the CRC test You have the following options to do this Procedure via a Via the Network Browser and the menu bar Menu Bar Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPU112 Start the test by selecting Test Manager gt CRC Test from the cursor menu The CRC Test window pops up Figure 6 12 Test Window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 35 Fault Management and Maintenance
43. The backup procedure uploads the data from the NE s COMDAC to the AEM NB The restore function deals with the downloading of a previous backup NVDS from the AEM NB to the NE Both functions apply to both simplex and duplex NE configurations Backup Restore For database backup and restoration the AEM NB is able to create maintain a Data copy of provisioning data from the active COMDAC NVDS When a loss of data occurs in the NE due to factors such as human error power failure or hardware and software failures the restoration features enable the AEM NB to restore a previous backup to one NE Backup Media The is able to store the backup in diverse storage media that can include Hard Disk Drive HDD tapes removable disk cartridges and any other available mass storage medium FTP For database backup and restoration operations the AEM NB uses a File Transfer Protocol FTP connection within the NE FTP allows the AEM NB to overwrite or copy information residing on the NE The AEM NB can open only one FTP session per NE at a time where the AEM NB will support the client role of the FTP session and the AnyMedia Access Sys tem will play the server part Failing Backup Re The backup and restore processes will fail if the time period during which the con store nection is lost exceeds the time out defined in the AEM NB or the NE time out otherwise the process will continue after the connection is recovered AEM NB
44. The following table shows the view edit options of the Shelf Protection window tab COMDAC Parameters Buttons Description Protection Represents the protection scheme used in the NE If only Schema one COMDAC is present in the shelf the protection scheme is Simplex If both COMDACs are present Duplex is the value shown Only in this case Duplex configuration is the Protection Switch pane available see below COMDAC COMDAC 1 2 This non editable fields display the current Information COMDAC working state The following values are possible Working Standby and Not Equipped if there is no COMDAC inserted in the corresponding slot SW Version Shows the SW Version for the respective COMDAC Protection Radio buttons allow protection switching to be specified Switch Only the working is inhibited With the Forced Switch to Protection request the working COMDAC becomes standby and vice versa All radio buttons are disabled if the current protection scheme is Simplex The NE rejects a switch request if the Protetion Mode is Inhibit Therefore before you can switch from Forced Switch to Protection to Inhibit or vice versa you have to Clear the current protection Protection This field displays the current protection mode which will be Mode updated as a result of a protection switch Possible values Clear Inhibit 2 Use the Radio buttons in field Protection Switch to switch the protection Clear or Forced Sw
45. User Administration 3 Select View gt Domains The Domains Table appears Year2000 Year 2000 test Figure 4 19 Domains Table 4 Select the domain which shall be deleted in the Domain Name field and click Delete 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 15 User Management User Groups 4 4 User Groups 4 4 1 Create User Groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new user group Before creating a new user group please pay attention to the following remarks m By default the AEM NB provides three user groups Administrator Mainte nance and Monitoring m administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and tasks m Before a user group can be created modified or deleted the AEM NB ad ministrator must have a system login m Applications are divided into tasks A user can be assigned a whole appli cation or only a subset of its tasks Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show El w o e Figure 4 20 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up 2 User administration File view Help Figure 4 21 Menu Bar of Window User Administration AEM NB R1 3 4
46. User Status Displays if the system login associated to this user is created enabled or deleted disabled Number of sessions opened Displays the number of sessions opened into the AEM NB by the user 4 2 3 Delete User Introduction 4 6 Version 1 00 This chapter describes the process to remove a user from the AEM NB Before re moving a user please pay attention to the following remarks m To remove a user from the AEM NB the administrator must have a system login m When user is deleted all related information and profiles are removed from the system This does not include the system login and any other sys tem resources such as home directories or system files which are not man aged by the AEM NB Furthermore the user is automatically deleted from the user groups it was included in m Before deleting any user assigned to the administrator user group the AEM NB checks that this is not the last user assigned to the administrator user group If this is the last one assigned the deletion is rejected AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User mm Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user from the AEM NB Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show Figure 4 7 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up showing the Users Table
47. and Archive the installation of AEM NB If this command was not executed the backup archive or restore commands will not work Different Users When different users perform backup archive or restore operations the system will display a message asking whether temporary data which remained from the previous user should be deleted If such a message is displayed you must confirm the deletion of these data AEM NB R1 3 3 26 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Backup and Restore mm 3 6 3 1 Backup Procedure The backup operation needs no user interaction after the backup command was executed 3 6 3 2 Archive Procedure The archive operation needs no user interaction after the archive command was executed 3 6 3 3 Restore Procedure 3 6 3 3 1 General Default Locations When a backup is restored all files are restored to their original location When for Restored Data archives are restored they are copied into the directory restored relative to the main installation directory Restore One of Sev When more than one backup is placed on a tape and a particular one shall be re eral Backups from stored the name of this backup must be known and the tape must be positioned Tape at the beginning of this backup The name can be determined by using the tar command For example tar tvf dev rmt Omn The positioning is done as described below Position Tape If you know the order of the backups on tape you can positi
48. ate the link in a way that cross connecting is possible After that the V5 7 Set Feeder window is available again and the V5 Link and the related cross connection will be added In additional m V5 communication path CP Control m V5 communication channel CC m Cross connection between CP Control and CC m Cross connection between CC and V5 Link s timeslot 16 will be added gt NOTE A V5 1 link can be created by setting a V5 1 Feeder and then cross connect itto a V5 1 Interface AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 95 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee 5 4 2 2 Add a V5 2 Link This window displays the current feeder status of the V5 2 Interface and provides the opportunity of modification Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a link links to the V5 2 Interface Up to 16 V5 2 Links are possible Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Add Hemove Links via the cursor menu or select Service gt Provisioning gt Add Remove Link via the menu bar The V5 2 Add Remove Links window pops up This window can also be reached from the V5 2 Interface window by click ing on V5 Links cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 V5 2 Add Remove Links al NE Name TCL NE13 V5 Interface id 250 Links Selection Available Links Selected Links E1 Feeder Link id E1 Feeder Link id e1 1 2 1 e1 1
49. m From E1 feeders clock derived from two of 16 E1 feeder signals m From an external synchronization equipment delivering a synchronization signal to the station clock interface SCI connected at the shelf connection panel Two clocks per IO E1 plug in and the station clock SC from the SCI are con nected to each COMDAC Two of these clocks are provisioned as reference clocks AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 3 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview gt NOTE If both reference clocks fail the system switches to free running mode 5 1 3 Interfaces Types of OAM amp P The AnyMedia AccessSystem provides the following maintenance interfaces for interfaces operations administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P m Craft interface terminal CIT port m 10BaseT interface Remote operations channel ROC A PC based graphical system interface the AnyMedia AccessSystem graphical system interface software for narrowband services GSI NB operates over all OAM amp P interfaces 5 1 4 Alarm Interfaces The following alarm interfaces exist for the AnyMedia AccessSystem m Localalarm and status indicators The plug ins have light emitting diodes LEDs on the faceplate to indicate status and alarm conditions Any alarms indicated by the LEDs are re ported to the GSI EM and via the ROC if provisioned Office alarm inter m Office alarm interfaces d Three software controlled rela
50. no data are restored and the sys AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 27 System Management Backup and Restore p ee tem will not work unless a correct restore is performed When the original data bases are present the message above is not displayed Additional Incre While the different databases are restored certain information is displayed on the mental Backups screen Then the restoration tool asks whether additional databases should be resotred Do you wish to restore from any additional incremental backups yes no Type no and press Enter After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental Restoration Procedure Before a certain incremental backup can be restored the previous full backups and possibly some previous incremental backups must be restored The procedure to restore an incremental backup is the same as the above de scribed procedure for a full backup exept for the last Additional Incremental Backups step In that step the restore tool asks for a confirmation that all needed full backups which are a prerequisite for the incremental backup are present An swer this question affirmatively After that the execution of the restore tool finishes and the restoration is complete 3 6 4 Examples for Backup Schedules Introduction This section gives you some examples for typical backup schedules and explains the backup level Backup Level Cru
51. otherwise provide the paths required What is the base path of Required Package Name Package verision q When an input is provided the installation checks the path and the version of the application If the path is invalid the following message will appear ERROR Pathname does not exist If the version is invalid one of the following messages could appear Package Required Package Name have been found but INSTALL PATH is not defined Package Required Package Name have been found but with version Package Version not valid for Package gt In both cases the installation will prompt again for the required package m Also the path where the Orbix cfg file is located is requested in the Or bixNames OrbixTalk and AnyMedia Servers packages installation after the request for the installation path of the OrbixMT the file will be modified by both installations AEM NB R1 3 2 42 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p ee 7 Where is Orbix cfg file located Orbix_path cfg q m Finally after the ObjectStore installation the user must execute the oscon fig server command to configure the ObjectStore daemon refer to steps 30 to 41 2 2 3 Cancel Installation There are two ways to cancel the installation as follows m internal cancellation when the install AMEMR15 or pkgadd com mand detect thro
52. the AEM NB will send a delete message to the NE AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 155 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm m delete cross connection between V5 communication channels and V5 protection group V5 2 m delete cross connection between V5 communication channels and V5 timeslot V5 2 m delete cross connection between V5 protection group and V5 Link s timeslots V5 2 m delete cross connection between V5 Link and V5 Interface V5 2 m delete cross connection between V5 communication channels and V5 Link s timeslots V5 1 m delete cross connection between V5 User Port bearer channels and V5 Link s timeslots V5 1 m delete cross connection between V5 communication path control and V5 communication channel basic V5 1 m delete V5 communication path control if provisioned V5 1 m delete V5 communication channel basic if provisioned and not cross connected to any other V5 communication path V5 1 m delete cross connection between V5 Link and V5 Interface V5 1 5 4 12 Remove Communication Channel Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a communication channel Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 nterface List window and cl
53. 00 08 99 5 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 ee CONDTYPE is a code denoting the condition type A message reporting the clear ing of an alarm has the same condition type as the one reporting the alarm Expert English Comment AIS Alarm indication signal BKUPMEMP System data memory mismatch CABLE Cable disconnect CPYMEMF Copy program memory failed DATASYSCR Data system failed critical DATASYSMJ Data system failed major DATASYSMN Data system failed minor DBCRRPT Data memory corrupt DBMEMTRF Data memory update abort EXT External failure IMPROPRMVL Improper removal INT Internal hardware failure LOF Loss of frame LOS Loss of signal ASSOC FAILED Assoc with NE failed PACKM Pack mismatch POLL Not responding to poll PRCDERR Procedural error PSTNF Restart PSTN failed PWR Power fault PWROVLD Power overload RAI Remote alarm indication RINGF Ringing source input failed SERVGRP Server group maintenance limit exceeded SFTCRRPT Software program corrupt SFTERR Software version mismatch SWFTDWNF Software download failed SYNC Synchronization input failed SYNCOOS System free running T BERL BER exceeds threshold T BERLN BER exceeds threshold near end C 6 Version 1 00 AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 p 4 Expert English Comment T FC CABLE Cable suspect e
54. 08 99 363 211 412 System Management 4 Actions Log Management Table 3 25 Menus and Functions Menu Item Function File gt Exit Close all Log Viewer windows Options gt Default Type Set a new default type which will be displayed when the next Log Viewer window is opened Help gt On Window Help gt Index Display help for Log Viewer Display help index The following table lists all actions you can perform in the Log Viewer window Table 3 26 Actions in the Log Viewer Window If you want to then Result display a certain log type of a specific date select the desired log type with the pull down control Type and the date of inter est with the pull down control Date and press Apply The log of the selected type and date is displayed in the Log Viewer table view different log types or dates si multaneously change the log type displayed at start up print displayed log display updated log sort the log start another Log Viewer with File gt New and set the desired Type or Date select Options gt Default Type In the window which opens cf Figure 3 13 click on the new default log type and press Apply or to set no new default type press Cancel select File Print Print Table or File Print Print Window select File gt Reload click on one of the column headers to sort the log accordin
55. 1 17 Functional Description System and Software Architecture Examples of Two examples of an AEM NB system are shown in Figure 1 5 AEM NBs AEM NB System 1 AEM NB System 2 y Client Clien Client AEM NB Server Figure 1 5 Examples of AEM NBs 1 3 2 2 Requirements Server Clients A SUN SOLARIS workstation can be used as AEM NB Server as well as AEM NB Client Peripherals The AEM NB system may use a number of peripherals with the following tasks m CD ROM Used for installing the system software m drive or another removable device optional Used for backup and restore functions m Printer Used for obtaining hard copies e g configuration alarm reports or perform ance monitoring measurement information AEM NB R1 3 1 18 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Working with AEM NB 1 4 Working with AEM NB Goal of this This chapter will outline the management activities and processes in the AEM NB Chapter The main emphasis is on presenting everyday operation processes The chapter is structured with respect to the various network life cycle phases see further be low User Profiles There are 3 default user profiles the administrator maintenance and monitoring profile The rights belonging to these profiles are described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 27 Life Cycle of a The individual life cycle of a telecommunication network has the following phases Network planning installa
56. 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q Type an user group number and press Return User users and Group group have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of LuLUMRT y n Type y and press Return Installing Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 as LuLUMRT Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class none Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install LuLUMRT log Installation of LuLUMRT was successful Processing package instance LuRWRT from lt XXXXXXX gt AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed RogueWave Tools amp Threads Runtimes for AnyMedi aNBEM R1 5 sparc 7 0 7 amp 1 1 2 OK No previous package LuRWRT have been found Enter install directory opt lucent rw q 9 Type a valid path where the package files must be plac
57. 10 31 17 lem END SUCCESS 1 Incremental synchronization process 1888 07 21 10 32 02 EM START IB Activate connection NE Name TCL NE13 1988 07 21 10 32 02 EM END SUCCESS le Activate connection NE Name TCL NE13 1988 07 21 10 33 05 EM START Activate connection NE Name 14 1888 07 21 10 33 05 END_SUCCESS Activate connection NE Name TCL NE14 KI Close New log type Successful Figure 3 12 Log Viewer Meaning of The following table explains the meaning of the columns in the Log Viewer table Columns Table 3 22 Information Displayed in the Log Viewer Table Column Meaning Date amp Time Date and time when the event was registered in the log file Format year month date hour minute second Login The user name of the user performing an action or EM Conditions The condition of a performed action to indicate whether it is the request or the response E g START END SUCCESS END ERROR Object Unique identification of the object NE Id or EM which has sent a TL1 message or has received an action AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 33 System Management Log Management p 3 9 Table3 23 Information Displayed in the Log Viewer Table Column Meaning Method A string explaining the performed action Parameters m For Actions and System Internal Events Shows all parameters involved in the action m For Autonomous Reports Shows
58. 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 109 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 110 Version 1 00 Available Primary Link NE Name 14 V5 Interface id 224 Links Selection 1 1 1 1 e1 1 3 1 Physical Feeder VS Link id 13 Figure 5 39 Primary Link id 23 id OK Close Primary Link Window Service Provisioning The following table shows the view edit options of the Primary Link window Parameters Buttons Description Primary Link This list contains all the links that are cross connected to this Selection V5 Interface E1 Feeder Displays physical address of the E1 feeders Format e1 shelf slot feeder Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 V5 Link id This list contains all the links that are cross con nected to this V5 Interface Possible values 1 255 Primary Link id This value corresponds either to the current primary feeder 08 99 and no selection was made Possible values 1 255 AEM NB R1 3 link id or to the selected item in the available links list or is empty in case there is no valid primary feeder configured 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons CC id Description This field shows either the id of the current communication channel CC used for the primary feeder or empty if no cor rectly configured CC is available or the value the user has entered
59. 3 Use the Label button in the pane Configuration to change the Sync State If the Sync State is SYNC the label says Resync If the Sync State is ASYNC the label says Sync 4 Use the Resync button in the pane Alarms to re synchronize the alarm processing state 5 Click on the Get button to update the display of the autonomous output states 6 Use the check boxes to change the autonomous output states Alarms and or Env alarms disabled check mark enabled clear 7 Click on another tab to change the window or click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 5 48 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 0 5 3 3 2 Network Element Inventory Data This window provides NE inventory data Procedure Complete the following procedure to get the inventory data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt NE Inventory Data via the menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab NE Inventory Data this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt NE Inventory Data TCL NE12 Information i NE Details Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing Source Control Date amp
60. 3 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via GUI 3 18 3 4 4 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via Command Line 3 20 3 4 5 Deinstall from Your System 3 20 3 5 Print out Reports 3 21 3 6 Backup and Restore 3 23 3 6 1 Basics on Backups and AEM NB Databases 3 23 3 6 2 Commands for Backup Archive and Restore 3 24 3 6 3 Backup Archive Restore Procedures 3 26 3 6 4 Examples for Backup Schedules 3 28 3 7 Log Management 3 31 3 7 1 Different Log Types 3 91 3 7 2 Configuration of Logs 3 391 3 7 3 Log Viewer Window 3 32 3 8 Disaster Recovery 3 37 4 User Management 4 1 4 1 Introduction 4 1 4 2 User 42 4 2 1 Create User 42 4 2 2 Modify User 4 4 4 2 3 Delete User 4 6 4 3 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create Domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify Domains 4 11 4 3 3 Delete Domains 4 14 4 4 User Groups 4 16 4 4 1 Create User Groups 4 16 4 4 2 Modify User Groups 4 21 4 4 3 Delete User Groups 4 26 4 5 Controlled Objects 4 29 4 5 1 Modify Controlled Objects 4 29 R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 V Contents 5 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 1 5 1 Overview od 5 1 1 Overview of AnyMedia Access System R1 3 5 1 5 1 2 Synchronization Interfaces 5 3 5 1 3 OAM amp P Interfaces 5 4 5 1 4 Alarm Interfaces 5 4 5 1 5 Testing Interfaces 5 4 5 1 6 Plug amp Play Capabilities 5 5 5 2 Configuration Manager Window Fra 5 2 1 Network Browser 5 8 5 2 2 59 5 2 3 Sta
61. 5 6 IP Address 5 20 3 24 J jre Installation 2 29 K Keyboard 3 6 Keys special Alternate 3 6 Backspace 3 6 Control 3 6 Delete 3 6 Escape 3 6 Return 3 6 AEM NB R1 3 IN 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 1 L LAN interface external system 3 Level 1 application 3 17 Life cycles network 1 19 Listbox 3 15 Log alarm 1 24 Log alarms 3 32 Log management 3 31 Log out workspace menu Log shortening 3 32 Logsize 3 31 Log type Actions 1 13 3 31 Autonomous Reports System Internal Events Log Viewer application 3 32 LOG DEL FULL 6 46 LOG DEL PART 6 47 Login 3 2 5 20 Logout manually from System 3 3 Loopback Clear 6 38 Set 6 38 Test 6 37 LUMOS Installation 2 9 3 13 143 3 4 1 13 3 31 Actions 6 13 6 12 6 18 Filters 6 13 6 19 Help 6 14 Options 6 13 Views 6 13 Menu bar 3 11 Menus often used File gt Exit 3 16 File gt Print 3 16 Help gt Index 3 16 Help gt On Window 3 16 Metallic Shelf Controller 2 2 Minimize Restore Front Panel workspace menu Miscellaneous alarm closure inputs 5 4 Modifying network 1 25 network element Mouse 3 6 1 26 363 211 412 3 13 N NE Date amp Time 5 56 NE Details 5 18 NEid 5 18 NE Memory Administration 5 6 NE Software Administration 5 6 NE ASSOC FAILED 6 47 NE AM Alarms 6 44 NEASSOC LOST 6 48 Netscape
62. 99 363 211 412 Functional Description System and Software Architecture 1 3 System and Software Architecture 1 3 1 Functional Groups The AEM NB software architecture is built with a number of components that can be grouped in the following distinct functional groups 1 Management Equipment Management Service Management Alarm Management Test Management Performance Management 2 General Components Components for Operation Administration and Maintenance OAM Common Servers 3 Software Platform Software bus Repository third party libraries 4 Graphical User Interface GUI 5 Northbound Interface 6 Southbound Interface Figure 1 3 shows the six functional groups The shadowed blocks are part of the AEM NB 4 GUI Northbound General Southbound Interface NE Management Components Interface Equipment Service Alarm Test Performance Common S OAM comp Software Platform Software bus Repository third party libraries Hardware Platform SUN Solaris Ce Figure 1 3 AEM NB Functional Groups AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 7 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p 3 A 1 3 1 1 NE Management The NE management functionality is distributed in 5 areas These are Equipment Management Service Management Alarm Management Performance Manage ment and Test Management Equipment The Equipm
63. AEM NB help informa page 6 21 tion On Window Display the help information of the window where the user is currently working 6 3 3 2 Toolbar The toolbar contains often used functions and consists of four buttons Table 6 10 Toolbar Function Icon Meaning Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms Their status im mediately changes to acknowledged The Aw User_Ack is set to the login of the user who has acknowledged the alarm Clear Clear all selected alarms Their status immedi ately changes to cleared X Clear Reload Reload the actual alarms states into the table Only alarms which match the filter criteria are in Reload cluded Print Opens a submenu Print Table Print Window Print Preview than one of these items can be se lected 6 3 3 3 General Information Section The first section is a frame titled General Information this frame includes controls showing information about the number of alarms of each alarm severity in the do main where the user is working m Critical Displays the number of critical CR alarms m Major Displays the number of major MJ alarms m Minor Displays the number of minor MN alarms AEM NB R1 3 6 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring m Information Displays the number of information IN alarms m Total Displays the total number of alarms all severities Additionally the f
64. ATM card AEM NB Server 1 OBaseT 100BaseT ATM Router optional Transport network optional e g two SDH ADMs in a point to point configuration Ethernet 10BaseT 100BaseT card 10BaseT 100BaseT IP over ATM PVC service TCP IP Configuration of the ATM PVC in the AFM Configuration of routing tables in AFM 10BaseT ports from AFM COMDAC LAN ports joined northbound client sete sie ys ys i GSI NB GSI BB DCN1 NE1 DCN1 NE2 Server GSI connected to CIU port Figure A 6 Communication with Remote NEs using in band ATM PVC AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 13 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations mm AEM NB R1 3 A 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Variables and Configuration Parameters Contents 1 Overview 2 System Variables Configuration Parameters B 3 1 AnyMedia Server Configuration Parameters B 3 2 AnyMedia Client GUI Configuration Variables AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 B 1 UJ UJ N UJ N UJ Version 1 00 08 99 B I 7 Contents AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Variables and Configuration Parameters 1 Overvie
65. An entity that initiates requests to a server For the AnyMedia Access System a client could be a PC with a GUI in terface a telnet session or an OS like the AEM NB Client Application A group of one or more user modules that offer related functionality Client Host A machine where one or more user modules are installed Common Data and Control Pack COMDAC Common Data and Control Plug in which provides the central control and transmission fabric for the AnyMedia Access System The COMDAC supports multiple system applications including V5 x switched services and ana log and digital leased lines ALL and DLL and a variety of application packs Communication channel A group of one or more communication paths all of different types Is associated to a 64 kbps timeslot on a V5 x interface This association may be changed by a protection switch only V5 2 Communication path A communication path carries any one of the following information types m layer 2 data links carrying the control protocol link control protocol PSTN protocol protection protocol and BCC protocol m all the ISDN Ds type data ISDND signaling ISDN p type data ISDNP and ISDN f type data ISDNF from one or more user ports It should be noted that this definition includes the possibility that there is more than one communication path of the same information type each allocated to a different logical communication channel Configuration Management This cons
66. Domains select Domains one or more domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 Removing from To disable the access to one or more domains click Domains The window Domains changes its display as shown below 2 ser Group Profile 1 User Group Name Maintenance Description Maintenance Group Description Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Domains Not Assigned Domains Assigned Domains Domains Year2000 Apply Close Figure 4 28 Window User Group Profile Domains Select one or more domains in the Domains Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all domains and this access permissions cannot be modified AEM NB R1 3 4 24 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User Groups Adding To give the selected user group access to further applications click Applications Applications amp Tasks The window changes its display as shown below WerGrpPrfle 7 7 User Group Name Maintenance Description Maintenance Group Description Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Applications Not Assigned Applications Assigned Applicati
67. GROUP 1 anymedia lucent M AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 2 31 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p See h Enter selection q 63 Type an user group number and press Return User users and Group group have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of LuOXWRT y n 64 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixWeb 3 0 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOXWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class none Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install LuOXWRT 1log Installation of LuOXWRT was successful Netscape 4 51 In Processing package instance LuNETSCP from stallation tmp Netscape Navigator 4 51 Stand Alone for AnyMedia NB EM R1 3 sparc solaris Version 4 51 OK No previous package LuNETSCP have been found Enter install directory opt lucent Netscape q AEM NB R1 3 2 32 Version 1 00 08 99 363
68. Group 2 which can have up to 43 working communication channels protected and up to three standby timeslots Protection Group 2 is automatically created if a protection or protection unit related to Group 2 is created Protection group 1 is handled via the Primary Link window cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 109 and Secondary Link window cf Chapter 5 4 4 page 5 11 1 The following section describes the handling of protection group 2 Window The V5 2 Group 2 Protection window is used to create show remove displays the V5 2 group 2 protection structure of a V5 Interface It shows the communication channel timeslots TSs the communication channels CCs current link and con figured link The main part is a table Each row in the table presents a protection unit with its timeslot This window can be reached only from V5 2 Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 via Protection AEM NB R1 3 5 146 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Figure 5 54 V5 2 Group 2 Protection Window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 147 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Description V5 2 Group 2 This table contains the V5 2 Group 2 Protection structure for Protection Table the selected V5 Interface Each line contains a timeslot cur rent CC and configured CC field Each line can be selected separately The operation
69. Installation 2 32 Network cycle 1 19 modifying 1 25 1524 1 20 normal operation physical installation Network Browser 5 8 Network element modifying 1 26 registration 1 21 Network element management Network planning 1 20 Normal Alarms 6 44 NVDS Data Backup 5 71 Data Restore 5 72 3 18 O ObjectStore Configuration 2 20 ObjectStore Installation 2 19 Office alarm interfaces 5 4 Off line backup database OK button 3 15 On line backup database Option menu 3 15 OrbixMT Installation 2 12 OrbixNames Installation 2 14 OrbixTalk Installation 2 15 OrbixWeb Installation 2 30 Ordering Document XIX 3 24 3 24 P Pass through interface 1 Password 5 20 Path through interface TLI messages 3 Performance monitoring 1 26 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 IN 3 Index Performance Management 1 4 Periodical Alarm Deletion 6 9 Platform Alarm 6 44 Plug in unit adding 1 26 removing 1 26 Porttest 6 29 Port test result 6 27 6 30 Print reports 3 21 Product safety Classification XVII Programs workspace menu 3 13 protection forced switching 5 60 inhibit switching 5 60 manual switching 5 60 side switching 5 60 Protection Switching COMDAC 5 60 5 62 HDLC 5 63 Provisioning network 1 21 Pushbutton 3 14 Q Quitting the Alarm Viewer 6 11 R Radio button 3 15 Reaction to fault identification 1 24 Recovery 1 24 Refresh worksp
70. LPP100 Drop id PSTN in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar The V5 PSTN User Port window pops up This window can also be reached from the AP windows cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 from V5 x Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 and Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 from V5 User Port List window cf Figure 5 41 page 5 115 AEM NB R1 3 5 118 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning VS PSTN User Port TCL NE14 VS PSTN User Port Information Physical Drop drop 1 5 1 x VS User Port Address V5 PSTN User Port Service Configuration 20 45 Tx Gain Rx Gain E 40 edt 120 30 Current Feedig Limit Low Feeding Current Balance Network BN1 Periodic Pulse Metering Yes Administrative State locked V5 PSTN User Port Cross Connection VS Interface id None V5 TimeSlot Id Nere Operational State Service State Figure 5 43 V5 PSTN User Window This window is used to add a new V5 PSTN User Port or modify an existing V5 PSTN User Port It allows to create remove the cross connection between a V5 PSTN User Port and a V5 Interface to create change remove the cross connection between a V5 PSTN User Port bearer channel and a V5 timeslot only for V5 1 protocol as we
71. NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 5 System Management General Information on Keyboard 3 3 General Information on Key board and Windows 3 3 1 Keyboard The keyboard offers special keys which are pressed individually or in combination with others to perform specific actions Special Keys The most important special keys are m Return to confirm an entry or to start a new line when a text consisting of several lines is entered m Esc Escape to initiate an escape sequence i e the keys pressed after pressing Esc are interpreted as an instruction and not as entered text m Ctrl Control to initiate a control sequence Ctr1 is always used in combination with one or several other keys and represents an instruction m Alt Alternate is pressed in combination with one or more other keys thereby assigning these keys another meaning Backspace Or Del Delete to delete all characters to the left of the cursor Conventions The keys on the keyboard are represented the text in the following way Ctr1 Backspace A B Two or more of these keys connected by a hyphen indicate that they must be pressed simultaneously Shift Ctrl A for example means that the A key must be typed while holding down Shift and Ctrl Keys that are separated by blanks only must be pressed one after the other Esc A B for example means that Esc must be pressed first followed by A and then B 3 3 2 Mouse Conventio
72. NOTE During the apply operation the Get and Switch but tons are disabled The whole subpane will be updated as result of the operation AEM NB R1 3 5 54 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 0 7 Parameters Buttons Description Active Timing If the Get button has not been pressed the following fields Reference are empty Active Timing Sync Source Shows the active timing sync source of the NE Possible values Free Running Loop Timed PRI and Loop Timed SEC Primary Source State Shows the primary source opera tional state Possible Values are Operational Not Operational and empty field no value received Secondary Source State Shows the secondary source op erational state Possible Values are Operational Not Operational and empty field no value received The Get button can be used to retrieve the Active Timing Synchronization Source and the operational state of pri mary and secondary sources if applicable from the NE gt NOTE During the get operation the Apply and Switch but tons are disabled The provisioned timing reference subpane will also be updated as result of this opera tion The Switch button is enabled only if the Active Timing Syn chronization Source is not Free Running and the opera tional state of the reference source is Operational It can be used to switch between the working and standby s
73. Name version Package Version have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install Package Version But it is partially installed Better to use pkgrm Package Version and installed it again AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 41 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p See 3 CA 9Am m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was partially or completed installed and has different version Current administration requires that a unique instance of the Package Name package be cre ated However the maximun number of instances of the package which may be supported at one time on the same system has already been met No changes were made to the system After this step the installation looks for its packages dependencies If a needed package is found the following message will appear Package Package Name Application Name Application Version have been found in Application Path gt NOTE Refer to Type y and press Return on page 13 to see this response If the package is not found the installation will prompt about its installa tion path in order to check this path and the correct application version lt Name needs Application Name Application Version to be installed previ ously If it isn t Answer q to next question and install the package Package Name
74. Program Storage O OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance OCU Office Channel Unit OMG Object Management Group OODB Object Oriented Database OOS Out Of Service OPS Operations System ORB Object Request Broker OS Operation System mE 9S 7 7 P PBX Private Branch Exchange PC Personal Computer AEM NB R1 3 AB 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Abbreviations J a NENNEN PCM Pulse Code Modulation PDN Public Data Network PFU Power Filter Unit PID Password Identifier PLL Permanent Leased Line PLN Physical Line Number PLR Pulse Link Repeater POTS Plain Old Telephone Service PPP Point to Point Protocol PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PT Power Test PVC Permanent Virtual Circuits R RAM Random Access Memory RCV Receive RDLD Red Lined REPT Report ROC Remote Operations Channel ROM Read Only Memory RTU Remote Test Unit AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 7 Abbreviations ee Er 5 5 Station Clock 5 Serial Communication Channel SCEC Secondary Channel Error Correction SCI Station Clock Interface SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SGE Supported Entity Outage SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Line SVC Switched Virtual Circuits SW Software T TA Terminal Adapter Test Area TAP Test Access Path Test Application Pack TCA
75. R1 3 5 70 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 3 5 1 Data Backup Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data backup Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NVDS Backup via menu bar The NVDS Backup window pops up NVDS Backup a NE Name TCL NE12 Backup Information Filename test 1 test 2 ne12 bck 414 Close Figure 5 24 NVDS Backup Window The Filename list displays all file names available for a backup 3 Select the file in the list of which you wish to make a backup The corre sponding file will be displayed in the Filename field and can be edited 4 Click on OK this command button is available only after having selected the file name The status bar shows the progress of the operation Depending on the configuration the backup process can take up to seven minutes AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 71 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p SeSe 5 3 5 2 Data Restore Procedure Complete the following procedure to initiate data Restoration Step Procedure 1 Select gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NE NVDS Restore via menu bar The NVDS Re store window pops up NE NVDS Restore e NE Name 2 Restore Information Filename ne12 bck test 1 test 2
76. Raised 25 1 1999 11 56 PM 38 LOG DEL PART AnyMedia Ao TASK Raised 26 1 1999 3 41 AM 39 LOG DEL PART AnyMedia Act TASK Raised 26 1 1889 4 26 Close Figure 66 Alarm List Section 6 3 3 4 1 Alarm Parameters For each alarm the following alarm fields depending on the selected view can be displayed m Index Sequence number for each different alarm reported to the AEM NB the maximum sequence number is 100 000 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 15 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring ee m Alarm Type Unique identification of each alarm type m Summary Contains text briefly describing the alarm The summary text is unique in the Element Manager m Severity Contains the default severity of the alarm Critical CR Major MJ Minor MN Information N m Service Affecting Specifies whether the alarm is subscriber service affecting or not Possible values Yes No m Description Contains a full description of the alarm m Host Unique text label in the AEM NB scope For NE alarms it is the NE Name that identifies the NE through all the AEM NB applications the alarm be longs to For platform alarms it is the string EM m Object Id Object identifier referring to the alarm Examples of objects are network el ements ap 1 1 etc m Status Working status of the alarms Raised Alarm with alarm condition raised and has not been yet processed
77. Result window shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit Figure 6 10 Port Test Result Window AEM NB R1 3 6 30 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management a The text fields are display only they have the following meaning Table 6 12 Meaning of the Text Fields in the Port Test Result Window Text Fields Meaning Possible Values NE Name The unique identifier of the selected NE as specified at NE creation time Slot The slot number of the AP be ing used Any string consisting of up to 30 characters ap 1 1 16 LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 TAP100 cf Chapter 5 3 3 2 Provisioned Mnemonic used to identify the Apparatus general type of function pro Code vided AP card type Port id The port within the AP drop 1 1 16 1 32 Result The result of the test routines PASS or FAIL Click on Close to exit the Port Test Result window 6 4 3 Standby Card Test Scheduling Side Switch and During the execution of a standby card test scheduling a COMDAC side switch Off Line and off line diagnostics for the standby COMDAC is performed Diagnostics Possible User The AEM NB provides the opportunity to the user to set up the periodicity and the Settings time of the day cf Table 6 13 page 6 32 to perform a standby card test over m the standby COMDAC Procedure Proceed as follows to start th
78. Summary and the date and time when the alarm was raised Via this tool the user can perform ac tions e g acknowledge clear for some of these alarms In this chapter you will find the following information Instructions for starting and terminating the alarm viewer Chapter 6 3 2 page 6 10 Instructions for handling the alarm viewer Chapter 6 3 3 page 6 11 Structure of the alarm viewer window Chapter 6 3 3 3 page 6 14 and Chapter 6 3 3 4 page 6 15 System management Chapter 6 3 4 page 6 18 Alarm viewer functions Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 Starting and Terminating the Alarm Starting the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be started in different ways Clicking on the icon Alarm Viewer in the Access Bar cf Chapter 3 2 3 page 3 4 Clicking on Alarms in the menu bar of the other Element Manager applica tions cf Chapter 3 3 6 page 3 11 In this case only alarms of the NE which is selected in the Network Browser are shown Selecting File gt New in the Alarm Viewer The displayed window has the title Alarm Viewer and maintains similarities with the other AEM NB s windows The Alarm Viewer window consists of the sections Menu bar File Views Filters Actions Help Toolbar buttons for Acknowledge Clear Reload and Print General Information section Alarm table AEM NB R1 3 6 3 Alarm Monitoring 6 3 1 General Overview What you will find i i i 6 3 2 Viewer 6 3
79. The User Administration window pops up ser administration O File view Help Figure 4 31 Menu Bar of Window User Administration 3 Select View gt User Groups The User Groups Table appears AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 27 User Management User Groups Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group Description Figure 4 32 User Groups Table 4 Select the user group which shall be deleted in the User Group Name field and click Delete gt NOTE The administrator user group is protected against deletion 5 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM NB R1 3 4 28 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Controlled Objects 4 5 Controlled Objects 4 5 1 Modify Controlled Objects Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information about existing con trolled objects The controlled object creation and deletion are not covered by this document For NE creation and deletion refer to Chapter 5 3 1 and Chapter 5 3 8 Before modifying the information about any controlled object the AEM NB admin istrator must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information about existing con trolled objects Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access ba
80. Time NE Inventory Shelf Slot Circuit pac Apparatus Serial Nu sh 1 ioe1 IOE1 FACSOO 990C021 1 2 sh T ioel IOE1 500 980 011 1 2 sh 1 ioe1 IOE1 500 330 021 1 2 sh 1 ciu 1 CIU DTP500 980C061 1 2 sh 1 com COMDAC COM100 380 042 228853 SLC1CGO 1 1 sh 1 AnyMedia sh 1 com sh 1 ioe1 sh 1 ioe1 ish 1 ap ish 1 ap sh 1 ap Summary COM100 1 DTP500 1 Unknown 21 500 3 Figure 5 15 NE Name Information Window Tab NE Inventory Data Two non editable tables display NE inventory information The first table contains per slot data while the second one provides summarized information per card type AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 49 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p Se Parameters Buttons Description NE Inventory Depending on the card some of the following fields are not data available Shelf Slot Numeric field that identifies the position of each plug in Circuit Pack Type Mnemonic that identifies the plug in type Possible values COMDAC CIU IO E1 IO HDLC PROG2W COIN ZEUS ISDN12 U TAP AFM E3 and ADSLA Apparatus Code Identifies the specific function provided by the plug in unit Possible values COM500 DTP500 FAC500 IDC500 LPZ100 LPP100 LPZ120 LPU112 TAP100 LPA910 LPA900 LPA400 Serial
81. Transfer Protocol Foreign Exchange Office AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 Abbreviations aa G GSI Graphical System Interface GUI Graphical User Interface H HDLC High Level Data Link Control HP Hewlett Packard HW Hardware I ICC InterChangeability Code ICMS Integrated Configuration Management System ID Identifier TEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Internet Interoperability Protocol IN Information alarm severity IP Internet Protocol 15 In Service ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ITU International Telecommunication Union AEM NB R1 3 AB 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Abbreviations L LAN Local Area Network LCN Local Communication Network LED Light Emitting Diode LIC License LLN Logical Line Number LPBK Loop Back LS Loop Start M MHz Megahertz MJ Major alarm severity MLT Mechanized Loop Testing MM Module Manager MN Minor alarm severity MON Degraded Signal MR Modification Request N NB Narrowband NE Network Element AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 Abbreviations ee NEM Network Element Management AnyMedia EM subsystem NFS Network File Sharing NM Network Management NMA Network Monitoring and Analysis NMS Network Management System NVDS Nonvolatile Data Storage NVPS Nonvolatile
82. V51 V5 2 non switched services via cut through Subscriber services analogue telephone POST based on V5 ISDN 2B D based on V5 analogue leased line digital leased line via cut through Alarm The Alarm Management provides the following functionality features Management m Integrated display of all the alarms The AEM NB provides a common window alarm viewer to show all alarms reported by the managed NEs or generated by the management System itself The display shows all the information pertaining to the alarm including alarm type severity service affecting indication date time of oc currence and clearing m Alarm Display Filters It is possible to filter the items shown in the alarm viewer for instance to see only the critical alarms m Alarm Notification to User The user is informed by visual and audible alerts when a new alarm has been reported to the AEM NB AEM NB R1 3 1 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description System and Software Architecture m Clearing of Alarms Alarms in the management system will automatically be cleared when the faults are removed at the source such as in the NEs or in the platform The alarm information will contain the date and time of alarm clearance m Acknowledged Alarms The operator can acknowledge a raised alarm alarm still active but being investigated The AEM NB registers the time at which an alarm changes its status from ra
83. a ioe1 1 1 ip 500 Facsoo t 00 ioelp 1 1 ap i 2 ap 1 3 Q 00 LPP100 gr 8 gr is Bla o amp E E amp 8 q LPZ100 ap 1 9 ap 1 10 ap i 11 TAP100 ap 1 13 Figure 5 2 Configuration Manager The initial window consists of two frames m Atthe top a menu bar provides access to all possible operations on the network elements cf Chapter 5 2 2 page 5 9 m On the left hand side the screen displays a tree like structure known as the Network Browser with the list of NEs created and manageable by the AEM NB see below Depending on previous actions the following frames are additionally available m On the right hand side a common area is used for the display of the infor mation requested through the menu bar cursor menu or tool bar if present AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 7 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window p See m status bar is incorporated at the bottom of every single screen except of Network Browser and menu bar cf Chapter 5 2 3 page 5 11 m The cursor menu will pop up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed cf Chapter 5 2 4 page 5 12 5 2 1 Network Browser The Network Browser displays the list of all NEs available to the user in a tree like structure You can select the object you want to configure view
84. a previous Backup backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incre mental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level On line backups performed on user demand Backup Off line backups performed automatically via any scheduling mecha Backup nisms e g cron file Backup Types There are three different backup types The following list shows their differences and advantages m Full backup A full backup copies a complete file system or directory e g all AEM NB data This method requires large numbers of backup tapes that take a long time to write and takes also some time to retrieve individual files because the backup drive has to move sequentially to the point on the tape where the file is located On the other hand using full backup makes it easier to retrieve small changes in file systems m incremental backup An incremental backup only includes copies of new files and files that have changed since a previous backup It is available for database files only Re quires less resources but searching for a certain file on the incremental tapes can take time 3 6 2 Commands for Backup Archive and Restore Default Locations If a backup is done the four AEM NB databases the NVDS and the log files are of Data for Backups copied to the backup medium If an archive is made the log files are moved to the or Arc
85. and ISDN BRA is not possible within the same AP m V5 Interface id Displays the V5 Interface id Possible values 0 16777215 AEM NB R1 3 5 116 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Command But tons Description The Edit V5 User Port button is enabled only when a row is selected It provides access to the V5 PSTN or ISDN User Port window to edit the V5 User Port parameters whenever this is possible or even create change or remove cross con nections with other V5 entities V5 Interface Vs Communica tion Paths ISDN and V5 Timeslots V5 1 protocol The Add PSTN button is enabled when no row is selected It provides access to the V5 PSTN User Port window cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 to provision a new V5 PSTN User Port The Add ISDN button is enabled when no row is selected It provides access to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port window cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 to provision a new V5 ISDN BRA User Port The Remove V5 User Port button is enabled only when a row is selected It can be used to delete all the existing cross connections between V5 User Port and other V5 enti ties and the V5 User Port entity If you want to then add a V5 User Port click on Add PSTN or Add ISDN The corresponding window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 for PSTN cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 for ISDN BRA edit an already e
86. appear AEM NB R1 3 6 26 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Result Figure 6 9 363 211 412 Test Management The Line Test Result window shows the test results of a series of self diagnostic routines on a specific port circuit The Line Test Result Window Line Test Result Em The text fields are display only they have the following meaning Table 6 11 Meaning of the Text Fields in the Line Test Result Window Text Fields Meaning Possible Values NE Name The unique identifier of the Any string consisting of up to selected NE as specified at NE 30 characters creation time Slot The slot number of the AP be 1 1 16 ing used Provisioned Mnemonic used to identify the LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 cf Apparatus general type of function pro Chapter 5 3 3 2 Code vided AP card type Port id The drop within the AP drop 1 1 16 1 32 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 6 27 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management p Se 4 gt Table 6 11 Meaning of the Text Fields in the Line Test Result Window Text Fields Meaning Possible Values AC Voltage Results of the AC measure 0 to 200 Vrms Vrm ments DC Voltage Results of the DC measure 150 to 150 Vac Vdc ments Resistance Results of the isolation resist 0 to 16000 kOhm Ohm ance measurements 0 to 8000 kOhm for against Ground Capacit
87. applica tion please read the readme txt file AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 27 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 0 4 2 AnyMedia NB R1 5 runs SUN SPARC So laris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus se curity and Y2000 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it OrbixTalk uses two ports for communications These ports have as default values 5000 and the next one The first can be modified at installation time to a value between 1024 and 65534 It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 IP multicast adresses Using OrbixTalk all communications takes place using multicast addresses The range of IP mul ticast addresses used by OrbixTalk is 31 with 255 0 0 0 as the first IP address it is config urable at installation time in the range 255 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 5 The install AMEMRI5 script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client GUI LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is ne
88. aspects 3 7 Cursor 3 11 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 IN 1 Index cursormenu 5 8 D Data Communications Network definition 2 Database Archive 3 23 Backup 3 23 Full backup 3 23 Incremental backup 3 24 Off line backup 3 24 On line backup 3 24 Restore 3 23 DCN configurations A 5 DCN introduction A 1 Deinstall AEM 3 20 Deinstallation commands 3 20 Delete domain 4 14 4 6 group 4 26 Delete key 3 6 disk space 2 2 Documentation XVIII Comment procedure XX Packaging and format XVIII Domain Create 4 8 Delete 4 14 Modify 4 11 Double click mouse 3 6 Drag mouse 3 6 Drop down list box 3 15 EE Environment Alarms 6 44 Escape key 3 6 External LAN AEM system interface 5 External LAN interface profiles 3 External system LAN interface 3 F Fault clearance 1 24 identification 1 23 source 1 24 Fault Management 1 3 1 1 File Close 6 12 6 18 Exit 6 12 6 18 6 12 6 18 Print 6 12 6 18 Reload 6 13 6 18 Full backup database 3 23 Functional diagram Cross connections 5 78 Help icon 3 5 Help Installation 2 34 I Icon 3 8 Icons greyed 3 4 Incremental backup database Input focus 3 7 Installation third party software 1 20 integrated management mode 1 5 Interfaces Synchronization interfaces 5 3 Inventory Management
89. configured at installation time to start up the server applica tions automatically on every reboot An administrator can start up or shut down server applications via a command line interface Commands for The following table shows which commands have to be entered in a terminal win Start Up and Shut dow to start up or shut down server applications Down Table 3 9 Commands for Start up and Shut down If you want to type in a terminal window start up all AEM NB applications SystemAdmin ALL start up the core AEM NB applications SystemAdmin CORE shut down all AEM NB applications SystemAdmin CLEAN 3 4 5 Deinstall AEM NB from Your System De Installation The AEM NB software can be deinstalled from your system The de installation removes all AEM NB related items databases 3rd party software etc which have been installed at the time when AEM NB was installed from your system Commands for De The following table shows which commands have to be entered in a terminal win Installation dow to de install AEM NB from your system Log in as root to execute these com mands Table 3 10 Commands for De Installation Ifyouwantto typeina terminal window remove the server package pkgrm LuANY10S remove the client package pkgrm LuANY10C remove third party software pkgrm LuRWRT For details about the above commands please refer to Chapter 2 2 4 1 Remove AnyMedia Servers package Chapter 2 2 4 2 Remove AnyM
90. configured the communication paths Control Link and BBC are automatically created cf Add Communication Path Chapter 5 4 6 4 page 5 140 AEM NB R1 3 5 86 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 1 1 Edit V5 1 Interface Each V5 1 Interface supports one E1 port 2 Mbit s and up to 30 subscriber lines 64 kbit s Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit a V5 1 Interface Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 Interface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 1 Interface window pops up This window can also be reached from the V5 Interface Create window by clicking on Create cf Figure 5 31 page 5 85 Figure 5 32 V5 1 Interface Window gt NOTE The parameters in this window can only be modified if the administrative state is Locked AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 87 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm The following table shows the view edit options of the V5 7 Interface window Parameters Buttons Description V5 1 Interface V5 Interface Id Provisioning Variant and Service De Data grade Threshold shows the values as described in Chapter 5 4 1 page 5 83
91. data link communications protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is on which port of the bridge Data packets are only trans ferred over the bridge if the participant is on another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN A 4 Network Element Communi cation Capabilities A 2 Version 1 00 In this section the management communication capabilities of an AnyMedia NE R1 3 are described The AnyMedia Access System provides the following man agement interfaces for operation administration maintenance and provisioning OAM amp P m Craft interface terminal CIT The CIT port is a local EIA 232D former RS 232C interface It is located on the faceplate of the CIU card in the AnyMedia Access System for 30 channel market A PC based Graphical System Interface GSI NB can be connected to the CIT port locally This interface is typically used during ini tial installation and other maintenance related activities This interface can also be used to remotely manage the NE using the GSI NB e g POTS dial up via modem PPP is implemented on top of the CIT port as to allow this remote management The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 1 AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configura
92. data transmissions and the port number 21 for FTP control communication m Association configuration related to NEs For every NE with which the AEM NB has to communicate the NEs Target Identifier TID must be known by the AEM NB provisionable via AEM NB GUI For every NE with which the AEM NB wants to communicate the LOGIN information related to that NE must be introduced in the AEM NB provisionable via AEM NB GUI For every NE the AEM NB wants to communicate with the PASS WORD information related to that NE must be known by the AEM NB provisionable via AEM NB GUI A 6 1 4 Element Manager Client Configuration Client IP Parame The workstation with the AEM NB client has the following IP parameters config ters ured Note that if the client is located at the same machine as the server these pa rameters are already configured m P address e g 135 88 20 230 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 AEM NB R1 3 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations mm default router e g 135 88 17 1 AEM NB Prefer In the preferences file of the AEM NB client the following information must be ences File stored to be able to access the AEM NB server this file has to be created before starting the AEM NB client GUI The AEM NB server IP address e g 135 88 20 234 m The LOGIN for accessing the AEM NB server encrypted The PAS
93. displayed in the AEM NB access bar This icon consists of a flag and a counter The flag is raised only the first time a new alarm of the defined severity is reported to the AEM NB Addi tionally the counter is increased Every time the user clicks on the icon the flag is lowered and the counter is reset before the AEM NB requires confirmation AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 3 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management p 3 9 9 The alarm severity affecting the notification icon is configurable via the sys tem variables in the file ANYMEDIAPATH GUI cfg SystemPreferences ini Table6 1 Configure Notification Icon System Variable VISUAL CRITICAL ALARM SEV VISUAL MAJOR ALARM SEV VISUAL MINOR ALARM SEV VISUAL INFO ALARM SEV Severity Possible States Critical On Off default ON Major On Off default OFF Minor On Off default OFF Information On Off default OFF For alarm notification see also Chapter 3 2 3 1 m Shelf View Window This window cf Figure 6 2 page 6 6 provides general inventory provi sioning and alarm information through the plug in LEDs Each slot shows the card type inserted and its alarms via a red FLT LED if available If the slot is empty no card will be shown See table below for the list of LEDs provided in each plug in The table de scribes the colors used when the LED is ON or blinking If the LED is OFF the color black is used
94. for software download and NE data backup restore m Southbound TCP IP Telnet Client Applications Cut Through Support for the Telnet application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces Telnet is used to provide a direct command line into the NE i e an equiva lent ASCII terminal interface AEM NB R1 3 1 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p 0 4 7 7 2 1 3 2 Hardware Platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture Components A number of AEM NB Clients UNIX Workstations can be added to the AEM NB Server to support concurrent users or remote access to the server s applications These clients can be connected through a TCP IP infrastructure or a Local Area Network LAN Examples are shown in Figure 1 9 page 1 28 to Figure 1 12 page 1 31 Tasks of the The tasks of the components are m Server Manages all the AEM NB applications and provides access to the NEs the database and the external OS m Client Formats the display of the application screens and manages the users ses sions with the application e g database access Conceptional Figure 1 4 is a conceptual representation of the various generic components Representation GUI AEM NB Client E E e Server User i Database AEM NB Client AEM NB System Figure 14 Hardware Components AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99
95. granted for each controlled object within that do main gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 For carrying out the next three steps 10 11 and 12 please pay attention to Table 4 1 It provides an overview about the access permissions the user groups shall have Table 4 1 Assignment of User Groups to Applications Tasks Application Task User Group System Start up Shutdown Administrator Administration Monitoring Administrator User Administration Access Policy Administrator and Profiling Management Domain Management Administrator Log Viewer Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarm Viewer Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Clear Administrator Maintenance Configuration NE Creation Administrator Maintenance Manager Equipment and Service Provisioning Administrator Maintenance Monitoring View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Test Administrator Maintenance Cut through Administrator BroadBand EM BroadBand EM Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Ifthe VIEW task is unassigned but other tasks are still assigned these tasks are left as assigned to this user group But the user is not able to perform any kind of operation over these tasks u
96. have no CC linked yet Possible values None 15 16 31 AEM NB R1 3 5 152 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Description Switch This button is enabled only when data have been selected in the above fields The V5 2 group 2 protection switch of the selected CC to the selected timeslot is executed Procedure Complete the following procedure to execute a protection switch Step Procedure 1 Select a row in the Protection timeslots list 2 Use the option menu Protected Comm Channel id to select an appropri ate CC id 3 Click on Apply The protection switch is executed 4 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 7 Move a V5 Interface in Service Procedure Complete the following procedure to move a V5 Interface in service Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 Interface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 Interface window pops up 2 Use the option menu Administrative State to change this parameter from Locked to Unlocked 3 Click on Apply to confirm 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 153 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning
97. in Backup for Two Weeks Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 1st week ab abc abcd abcde abcdef 2nd week g gh ghi ghij abcdefghijk 3 6 4 2 Daily Cumulative Weekly Incremen tal Backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table3 17 Backup Levels of Each Backup variable Mon Tue Thu Fri 1st of month 0 1st week 9 9 9 3 2nd week 9 9 9 4 3rd week 9 9 9 5 4th week 9 9 9 6 The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table3 18 Example for Files in Backup for Two Weeks 1st week 2nd week g gh ghi ghij ghijk AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 29 System Management Backup and Restore p L ww 3 6 4 3 Daily Incremental Weekly Cumula tive Backups Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be done Table3 19 Backup Levels of Each Backup variable 1st of month 1st week 2nd week 3rd week 4th week The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table3 20 Examples for Files in Backup for Two Weeks Fri 1st week abcdefghi 2nd week jk Imn jKlmnopqr AEM NB R1 3 3 30 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Log Management 3 7 Log Management The log management
98. in the list and click on Edit V5 Interface or double click on the entry The V5 x In terface window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 for V5 1 cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 for V5 2 remove a V5 Interface select an appropriate entry in the list and click on Remove cf Chapter 5 4 17 page 5 159 create a V5 Interface click on Create V5 Interface The V5 Interface Create window pops up see below AEM NB R1 3 5 84 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning V5 Interface Create EE NE Name ID V5 Interface V5 Interface id I Protocol Version 5 2 Provisioning Variant Service Degrade Threshold 50 HDLC Flag Monitoring Yes Create Close Figure 5 31 V5 Interface Create Window This window can also be reached from the menu bar via Service Provisioning Create V5 Interface The following table shows the view edit options of the V5 Interface Create window Parameters Buttons V5 Interface id Description This text field is used to enter the interface id Possible values 0 16777215 or None Default None This option menu is used to select the protocol version for this V5 Interface Possible values V5 1 and V5 2 Default V5 2 This text filed is used to enter a short integer for the provi sioning variant Possible values 0 127 Default 0 This text filed is used to enter a short integ
99. is a feeder al ready set and the V5 Interface state is Locked AEM NB R1 3 5 88 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm If you want to then edit the V5 Interface parameters change the parameters in the field V5 Interface an click on Apply to confirm If the administrative state has been changed from Unlocked to Locked a Warning window pops up Changing the administrative state of V5 Interface id may be service affecting Do you want to continue edit a V5 1 User Port click on V5 User Ports The V5 User Port List window pops up cf Figure 5 41 page 5 115 add a V5 1 User Port PSTN click on Add PSTN The V5 PSTN User Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 add a V5 1 User Port ISDN BRA click on Add ISDN V5 ISDN BRA User Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 modify the Signalling parameters click on Signalling The V5 Signal ling window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 6 set a feeder click Set Feeder The V5 1 Set Feeder window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 1 page 5 94 remove the physical feeder click on Remove exit the window click an Close AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 89 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 1 2 Edit V5 2 Interface Each V5 2 Interface supports up to 16 E1 ports 2 Mbit s and up t
100. is add to the AEM NB m Maintaining the local copy on equipment changes m Synchronizing the local copy with the equipment data maintained by the NE and reporting differences m Inventory Management system activity of collecting updating and re porting data on AnyMedia Access System equipage and system status in cluding providing users with access to the entire equipment information whether locally maintained or not m Memory Administration this means the management of the nonvola tile data storage NVDS of the AnyMedia Access System Backup amp Re store m NE Software Administration this involves tasks to manage the nonvola tile program storage NVPS of the AnyMedia Access System software download copying the NVPS between controller CARS etc For more information please refer to the network element documentation for R1 3 AEM NB R1 3 5 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window 5 2 Configuration Manager Win dow This major application provides the user with the facilities needed to fully config ure AnyMedia network elements both equipment and services Configuration Manager File Edit View Equipment Service Alarms TestManager TL1 Window Help Network Browser BQ ALL e EH simulatorias EC rec uen p TCL NE13 sh 1 vs Interfaces List A E1 feeders List EL V5 User Port List
101. lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed Lumos Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris Build 6 run time OK No previous package LuLUMRT have been found Enter install directory opt lucent LUMOS q 5 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default If the DNS domain is found The DNS domain name found was What is your DNS domain name default xxxxxxx If the DNS domain name is not found The DNS domain name has NOT been found Maybe this machine does not have DNS or is not configurated If you do not have DNS then press RETURN to the next question In other case write your DNS domain name selection or accept the default What is your DNS domain name default 6 Type your DNS domain name and press Return press Return to se lect default available only if DNS domain was found AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 9 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure RogueWave 1 0 7 amp 1 1 2 Installation 2 10 Version 1 00 gt NOTE 7 8 08 99 A list of DNS user group items of the target system is displayed for in stance anymedia lucent This provides information to select an user owner and a group owner for packages files Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP
102. mary feeder if there is one Possible values 0 255 The CC id shows the id of the communication channel that is cross connected to timeslot 16 of the primary feeder if there is one Possible values 0 65503 The field Configuration State indicates whether the primary link is correctly configured or not Possible values Not Configured Partially Configured Con figured The Set Primary button provides access to the Primary Link window It is enabled only when the Administrative State is Locked and the Configuration State for the primary link and the secondary link is Not Configured The Remove Primary button can be used to delete the pri mary link It is enabled only when the Administrative State is Locked and the Configuration State for the primary link is Partially Configured or Configured and the Configura tion State for the secondary link is Not Configured Secondary Link If a secondary feeder is not yet configured all fields remain empty except the field Configuration State The Physical Feeder shows the id that is configured as sec ondary feeder if there is one The V5 Link id shows the id that is configured as secondary feeder if there is one The field Configuration State indicates whether the primary link is correctly configured or not Possible values Not Configured Partially Configured Con figured The Set Secondary button provides access to the Second ary Link window It is en
103. monitoring The flag monitoring function requires that flags sent on V5 communication channels towards the NE by the LE must be monitored in the NE Flag monitoring is mandatory for V5 2 interfaces and optional for V5 1 interfaces flag sending is mandatory in any case for both directions i e NE to LE and LE to NE Forced Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the protection unit COMDAC and IO HDLC circuit packs only are Full Backup This copies a complete file system or directory G General settings These are parameters which are valid for all customer specific configurations for example loop start function for all Z ports which are assigned for POTS service or suppression of out band signalings for Z ports which are assigned for ALL transmission only service GSI Graphical System Interface A user friendly front end for communicating with a system In the AnyMedia Access System the GSI is installed a Windows 95 personal computer and used for entering and receiving TL1 Transac tion Language 1 messages The GSI provides support for managing the AnyMedia Access System in the following functional areas m Configuration management m Fault management m Performance management m Security management m Inventory management GSI NB The Graphical System Interface for narrowband services This is a Windows 95 based PC whic
104. name Enter your user name and press Return click 2 The system asks for your password Enter your password and press Return click OK If the login was correct the workspace is displayed If the login was incorrect a warning message appears Login incorrect please try again Confirm the message by pressing Return or clicking OK and repeat the login procedure If the core applications were not yet started an administrator has to do this cf Chapter 3 4 4 page 3 20 before the AEM NB access bar can be started Before the AEM NB access bar cf Figure 3 1 page 3 3 can be started the setup of the environment must be done with the command lt GUI base path gt GUI AnyMediaNBEM_GUI sh The GUI base path is the path to the location where the GUI directory is in stalled on your machine i e opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM_R1 3 If this command was included in the profile file it needs not to be executed manually To start the AEM NB access bar cf Figure 3 1 page 3 3 after a correct login type in a terminal window which you can open via the workspace manager cf Chapter 3 3 8 page 3 12 cd GUI base path gt GUI GUI Main amp A splash screen is displayed and then the AEM NB access bar is shown 08 99 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 System Management System Access ajej aj aj t e Figure 3 1 Workspace with AEM NB Access Bar 3 2 2 Logout from Operation System This chapter de
105. of COMDAC which carry NB management information are forwarded to AFM LAN port which is joined to COMDAC LAN port located on the top front panel of the AnyMe dia shelf these IP packets will be terminated in the COMDAC A 6 2 1 Configuration of the router The router at Central Office need to be configured The minimal requirements for the router for supporting this scenario are m Minimal WAN interface requirements The router must one or more 36 interfaces with the net work or any other physical interface e g E1 depending on the edge ATM switch to interface with It is in charge of mediating from 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP to PVC AAL5 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP IP The logical WAN interface should be compatible with that of the connected switch e g Support of UNI 3 1 amp 4 0 cell switching This router must support RFC 1483 multiprotocol over ATM encapsulation since AFM supports it m Minimal LAN interface requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purpose Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10BaseT 100BaseT ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing should be supported The configuration tasks to be performed on router are m Configure Interface m Configure LAN interface m Configure ATM PVCs inside that physical interface and assign to them IP addresses m Create routing tables for both AFM and COMDAC e g those IP packets to be sent to AFM or IP address
106. of components For example e1 1 2 4 is an object representing E1 4 on IO E1 plug in 2 in AnyMedia Access System shelf 1 Active plug in Identifies the plug in which is currently responsible for handling the service in a protected configuration An active plug in may also be in a state where no service is possible for example faulty or moved to OOS by the operator ADSL Full rate ADSL Classic Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line A method of data transmission over unloaded copper loops The data rate transmitted toward the end user is typically much higher up to about 6 Mbps than the data rate transmitted by the end user up to 640 kbps Alarm Any condition that needs operator attention since it may impact the normal operations of any system under opera tor responsibility for example Element Manager Network Element AMS Alarm Management Subsystem AnyMedia Access System The AnyMedia Access System is an access network element NE which supports various narrowband and broad band services digital as well as analog AO Autonomous output reports generated by the NEs Apparatus code The apparatus code is an 8 byte item of ASCII information stored in the nonvolatile data storage NVDS of a plug in for example LPZ100 DTP500 Itis a unique identifier which specifies the function of the plug in Application Group of one or more modules that offer related functionality AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 9
107. package LuOXNS have been found Package LuOX23RT OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in lt OrbixMT path gt Where should OrbixNames be installed opt lu cent OrbixNamesl 1c q 16 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Multi threaded Orbix installation detected is this correct y y n 17 Type y and press Return Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q AEM NB R1 3 2 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p See 6 18 user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of LuOXNS y n 19 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixNames 1 1c Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM 1 5 as lt LuOXNS gt Installing part 1 of 1 verifyin
108. path gt Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent E Enter selection q 72 Type an user group number User users and Group group have been se lected What is the AnyMediaNBEM Server Host de fault gt q 73 Type the host name where the AnyMedia AEM NB servers were installed and press Return press Return to select default Wait What is the URL for Broad Band Manager http www lucent com q 74 Type a valid URL where the broad band manager is placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Login for CutThrough functionallity q 75 Type a valid login and press Return Password for CutThrough functionallity q 76 Type a valid password and press Return The name of the location where the is work ing is needed for printing facility AEM NB R1 3 2 36 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation Commissioning Installation Procedure What is the name of the location The location name will appear in the document header of the printing fa cility 77 Type your AEM NB location name and press Return Code for the representation of names of lan guages Refer to ISO 639 1988 E F for more informa tion 1 da Danish 2 de German 3 fr French 4 it Italian 5 zh Chinese 6 es Spanish 7 en English Enter selection q 78 Type your l
109. records information on events in the AEM NB The logged events can be viewed with the Log Viewer 3 7 1 Different Log Types There are three log types within the Log Viewer Actions It contains all the information on actions performed by users or the AEM NB and which imply changes in the AEM NB configuration equipment NE configuration service and subscriber configuration access to the AEM NB print reports and backup amp restore That means all operations triggered by the user or the AEM NB and all subsequent actions Also the results of operations are logged in the actions log m System Internal Events It contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the AEM NB or indicate errors which oc curred in the AEM NB m Autonomous Reports It contains all information valuable for the equipment supplier about alarms NE and platform the performance and all TL1 messages sent from the NE which imply changes in the AEM NB database 3 7 2 Configuration of Logs Log size The following values can be configured conf Appendix B for the log system by the administrator m Minimum number of days incl current day in the log default 7 days m Maximum size of all logged data default 15 Mbyte Log Grows Too Big The logs are stored as separate files one file holds one day of one log type If the size of the logged data has reached the size limit and a new event to be logged occ
110. s and E1 cross connections provide the linkage between the used protocol and the corre sponding physical interfaces Each V5 1 Interface supports one E1 port 2 Mbit s and 30 subscriber lines 64 kbit s Each V5 2 Interface supports up to 16 E1 ports 2 Mbit s and up to 512 sub scriber lines 64 kbit s Each leased line interface supports one E1 port 2 Mbit s and up to 31 analog or digital leased lines 64 kbit s AEM NB R1 3 5 78 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning V5 Protocol Supported Sub scribers Cross Connections Interfaces Links 363 211 412 gt NOTE A mix of services V5 x and leased lines on one E1 feeder is not possible V5 protocol is an ETSI European Telecommunication Standards Institute defined interface protocol between a Local Exchange LE and an NE for the support of the following access types m Analogue telephone access POTS Plain Old Telephone Service m ISDN Basic Rate Access ISDN BRA m Other analogue or digital accesses for permanent connections with provisionable information channel allocation or flexible concentration capabil ity within the NE gt NOTE ISDN Primary Rate Access will be possible in future releases The general V5 protocol purpose is to connect PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network and ISDN subscribers via V5 Interface and leased subscribers to the LE ETSI distinguishes between V5 1 In
111. table shows the view edit options of the physical feeder parameters Parameters Buttons E1 Feeder Data Description Physical Feeder This option menu is used to select the specific E1 feeder the user wants to display the information for The selection is also valid for the V5 Link tab The list shows all E1 feeders present in the shelf Format e1 shelf slot feeder Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 V5 Link id This field is only empty when the E1 feeder is not associated to a V5 link or a leased line service Possible values 0 255 If the E1 feeder is associated to a V5 link the V5 link id is shown in this field If the feeder is related to a leased line link the value Leased is shown Impedance Displays the impedance of the E1 feeder termi nation Possible values 120 Ohm 75 Ohm Get This button can be used to get the E1 impedance from the NE Loopback This field displays the current loopback state Clear or Set This state can be modified via the Label but ton on the right hand side Label This button can be used to set or to clear the E1 loop back Depending on the current state this button displays the possible operation Clear if the loopback state is Set and Set if the loopback is Clear gt NOTE This button is disabled if the E1 feeder is used as tim ing source reference sew below Timing Source Reference Indicates whether the selected E1 is the timing source reference or
112. test application pack TAP 100 5 1 6 Plug amp Play Capabilities The plug ins associated with the AnyMedia Access System have the capability to self identify themselves with inventory data This capability is very useful during the execution of provisioning and maintenance procedures For example upon insertion of the new plug in in the AnyMedia Access System shelf the inventory data of the new plug in as well as its serial number slot and plug in entity will be reported to the AEM NB and or GSI interface The removal of any plug in unit will be announced also 5 1 6 1 NE Equipment Configuration Related Tasks The network element NE equipment configuration facilities provided by the AEM NB cover the operations that control and provision the NE R1 3 including the fol lowing m Configuration specific equipment data which involves tasks for m NE creation amp deletion m Plug in management COMDAC management O E1s management Physical feeder management lO HDLOCs management CIU management AP management Z ports management m Protection management m Slot alarming configuration m Date amp time management m security configuration m Timing synchronization provisioning AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 5 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview mm m Maintaining a local copy of the NE inventory which includes tasks for m Initializing the local copy when NE
113. the association alarms for the NE alarms When an alarm is cleared its state is up dated and the time is registered too Clearing an alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm was logged before in the autonomous report log if the user clears an alarm this will be logged in the action log if an alarm is cleared by the NE it will be logged in the autonomous report log If the raise is newer then it is a repetitive raise the alarm state is set to the raised state If the raise is older then this message is ignored the alarm state stays in the cleared state and the relevant data is updated 6 2 8 Alarm Data Synchronization The AMS is responsible for the performance of NE alarm synchronization To ac complish this the AMS requests all the current alarms normal and environment of the NE that is being synchronized Once the AMS has received these alarms it compares them with the alarms stored in the AEM NB alarm database At the end of the synchronization the alarms stored in the alarm database must be the same as the alarms retrieved from the NE AMS Only one synchronization per NE can be performed at the same time The AMS rejects any synchronization request for the same NE if the first one has still not finished AEM NB R1 3 6 86 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management p Se 6 2 9 AEM NB Alarm Log Handling If the user wants to know the different states throughou
114. the appro priate AP AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 43 Configuration Management Provisioning ee Equipment Configuration 3 Press Apply to confirm the window remains on screen for further use then If you want to add a V5 User Port edit a V5 User Port delete a cross connection press Add V5 User Port The V5 PSTN User Port or V5 ISDN BRA User Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 for PSTN and Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 for ISDN BRA select a row in the Drop Information list and press Edit V5 User Port The V5 PSTN User Port or V5 ISDN BRA User Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 for PSTN and Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 for ISDN BRA select the desired User Port Address in the Drop Information List and press Remove V5 User Port Warning window pops up displaying the following message Removing V5 User Port may be service affecting Do you want to continue 4 If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the remove operation is finished to show the current list 5 44 Version 1 00 08 99 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 0 5 3 3 Edit View of Configuration Data All edit view actions of configuration data can be started via NE Name Information window NE Name Informa
115. the preview window click on the monitor icon 3 6 Backup and Restore The backup functions of the AEM NB allow you to copy AEM NB related file sys tems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption The AEM NB system files and database backup allows to back up and restore system files and databases belonging to the installed applications e g configuration files Archiving is possible for AEM NB log files The restore functions allow you to restore file systems by copying reasonably cur rent backup files from removable media to a working directory 3 6 1 Basics on Backups and AEM NB Data bases Definitions The following table gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Table3 13 Definitions Term Meaning Backup process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corruption Archive process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up Restore process of copying backup files from removable media to a work ing directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged Full Backup copies a complete file system or directory AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 23 System Management Backup and Restore mm Table 3 13 Definitions Term Meaning Incremental copies new files and files that have changed since
116. the reference inputs if one or both of the physical inputs is are switched to the protection IO plug in For more information refer to the NE documentation for R1 3 Upon initialization the NE selects the primary input as the active reference and the secondary input as its alternate source If the primary reference fails the NE hardware switches to the alternate source providing synchronization reference source protection is available cf Chapter 5 3 3 7 page 5 59 Procedure Complete the following procedure to configure the timing source Step Procedure 1 Select the All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt Provisioning gt Timing Source Control via the menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab Timing Source Control this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt Provisioning gt Timing Source Control 1 The AnyMedia Access System hardware also supports external timing via a composite of fice clock however this mode is not supported in the release software AEM NB R1 3 5 52 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Figure 5 16 Name Information Window Tab Timing Source Control AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 53 Configurati
117. time M ctag COMPLD AID AIDTYPE NTFCNCDE CONDTYPE SRVEFF OCRDAT OCRTM CONDDESCR C3 2 5 Output Format Parameters AID Access Identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Required Default Type Default C 10 Version 1 00 08 99 Access ID Yes Fixed It all AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 This is the address of the equipment and or facility for which an alarm condition is being reported Note If the Modifier COM the Access ID is null Expert English 1 1 16 Application ciu 1 Communication interface unit comdac 1 1 2 drop 1 1 16 1 32 COMDAC drop 1 1 1 4 1 4 1 physical port feeder side ioe1 1 1 4 E1 circuit pack iohdlc 1 1 2 IOHDLC Circuit Pack pwrsrc 1 a b Power Source sclk 1 Station Clock sh 1 Shelf v5i 1 16 v5 interface 51 1 16 v5 Link v5ts 1 16 1 31 v5 Time Slot string NE TID Target Identifier a only available via AEM NB AIDTYPE Access Identifier Type This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type List Required Yes Expert English Comment ALL All COM Common El E1 EQPT Equipment NTFCNCDE Notification Code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 C 11 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 ee This is notification code associated
118. to the E1 Feeder V5 Link window m The E1 feeder has no V5 Link associated In this case the button is labelled Add V5 Link and provides ac cess to the E1 Feeder V5 Link window Remove This button can be used to remove a selected V5 Link It is available only if there is a V5 Link associated to the E1 feeder AEM NB R1 3 5 100 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm If you want to then edit an E1 feeder select an appropriate entry in the list and click on Edit E1 or double click on the feeder The E1 Feeder V5 Link window E1 Feeder tab pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 1 page 5 101 edit an already associated V5 Link select an appropriate entry in the list and click on Edit V5 Link The E1 Feeder V5 Link window V5 Link tab pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 2 page 5 104 add a V5 Link select an appropriate entry in the list and click on Add V5 Link The E1 Feeder V5 Link window Cross Con nection tab pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 2 page 5 104 remove a V5 Link select the desired entry and click on Remove cf Chapter 5 4 11 page 5 155 exit the window click on Close 5 4 2 4 Configure E1 Feeder V5 Link This window provides physical and logical information of individual feeders and V5 Links It is subdivided in three tabs Cross Connection Physical Feeder and V5 Link Tab V5 Link is available only if there is a V5 Lin
119. user to change the aspect of the window on the screen and the process repre sented by the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 7 System Management General Information on Keyboard eee Window menu button Title bar Minimize button Maximize button Text Editor unnamed File Edit Search Format Menu bar Slider Window frame with Slider Horizontal scroll bar Vertical scroll bar resize corners Figure 3 3 Specimen Window and Window Controls The individual window controls shown in Figure 3 3 are Figure 3 4 Controls a Window Window Part Function Window frame The frame delimits the window on the screen and its colour indicates whether this with resize cor window contains the input focus Drag the frame to shift and resize the window By ners dragging the window corners the window size may be modified to both limiting sides at the same time Title bar The title bar informs you about the function of the window Drag the title bar to shift the window on the screen Minimize button If you click on the minimize button the window will be displayed in its minimum size i e it will appear as an icon on the screen though the process represented by the window will continue running AEM NB 1 3 3 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management General Information on Keyboard mm Figure 3 4 Controls in a Window Window Part Function Horizontal scroll bar
120. via TL1 b Via the TL1 Command Line Interface To set a loopback enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface CRE Ree Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block This command operates a loopback on an ISDN drop If the drop serves an ISDN basic rate access subscriber the subscriber is blocked in cooperation with the connected exchange by this command In case of serving a digital leased line subscriber the loopback is switched transparently through the system towards the service node if the cross connection is provisioned and all involved entities are operational If the drop is not accessible by the system the requested loopback is al ready active or the drop is currently under test the loopback is denied The loopback will be automatically released when a user is entered on the drop the administrative service state of the user is changed a integrated test on the drop is started the connected exchange unblocks the ISDN ba sic rate access subscriber or in case of any hardware faults of the related AP Clear Procedure Proceed as follows to clear a loopback test at the ISDN User Port side Step Procedure You have the following options to do this Procedure via a Via the Network Browser and the menu bar Menno 1 Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPU112 gt Drop id ISDN and Edit via the c
121. view or the apparatus code provisioned in that slot provisioned view or no apparatus code otherwise If the slot is empty no card will be shown otherwise the slot will display the faceplate of the inserted card with its LEDs if applicable AEM NB R1 3 5 22 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning mm Plug in lO E1 363 211 412 Equipment Configuration Single clicking on any slot will launch the card specific window even when the card is not inserted Apparatus Code Card Type Plug ins 500 COMDAC cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 3 page 5 32 DTP500 CIU cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 4 page 5 34 IDC500 IO cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 5 page 5 36 FAC500 lO E1 cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 26 Applications packs LPZ100B ZAP 100 S2 cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 LPP100B PPM 12 16 cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 LPU112 ISDN12 U cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 TAP100 cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 Broadband applica LPA900 AFM_DS3 tions LPA910 AFM_E3 LPA400 ADSL4 The Shelf View window displays different colors for different types of LEDs The following table describes the colors that are used for each LED type inside every card type The table describes the colors used when the LED is ON or blinking If the LED is OFF the color black is used LED Meanings FLT m Lit during plug in failure m Flashes when the plug in executes off line self te
122. window pops up showing the Users Table AEM NB R1 3 4 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User i Default EM Administrator veri Verificacion 1 Administrator Figure 4 5 Users Table 3 Select one user of the Login Name field and click Open The User Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected user Default EM Administrator m SS Administrator Monitorir Figure 46 Window User Profile AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 5 User Management Change User Name Description Adding to User Groups Removing from User Groups Other Fields read only User To change the user name description like last name first name email etc enter the new information in the User Name Description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed To assign the selected user to further user groups select one or more user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 16 To remove the selected user from user groups select one or more user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and click Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply The following fields are read only fields to display user data Login Name Displays the label which identifies the user
123. with a single alarm condition Expert English Comment CR Critical Alarm MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm CONDTYPE Condition Type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes Expert English Comment AIS Alarm indication signal BKUPMEMP System data memory mismatch CABLE Cable disconnect CPYMEMF Copy program memory failed DATASYSCR Data system failed critical DATASYSMJ Data system failed major DATASYSMN Data system failed minor DBCRRPT Data memory corrupt DBMEMTRF Data memory update abort EXT External failure IMPROPRMVL Improper removal INT Internal hardware failure LOF Loss of frame LOS Loss of signal NE_ASSOC_FAILED Assoc with NE failed PACKM Pack mismatch POLL Not responding to poll PRCDERR Procedural error PSTNF Restart PSTN failed PWR Power fault PWROVLD Power overload RAI Remote alarm indication RINGF Ringing source input failed AEM NB R1 3 C 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 Expert English Comment SERVGRP Server group maintenance limit exceeded SFTCRRPT Software program corrupt SFTERR Software version mismatch SWFTDWNF Software download failed SYNC Synchronization input failed SYNCOOS System free running T BERL BER exceeds threshold T BERLN BER exceeds threshold near end T FC CABLE Cable suspect exceeds failure count threshold T FC INT Internal pack
124. 02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris Version 2 3c02MT Run Time OK No previous package LuOX23RT have been found gt NOTE A list of partitions and free space is displayed Here is a list of your partitions and the free Space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on lt information about your partitions and free space gt Where should Orbix be installed opt lu cent OrbixMT_2 3c2 q 12 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default If the DNS domain is found The DNS domain name found was xxxxxxx What is your DNS domain name default xxxxxxx AEM NB R1 3 2 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 0 2 If the DNS domain name is not found The DNS domain name has NOT been found Maybe this machine does not have DNS or is not configurated If you do not have DNS then press RETURN to the next question In other case write your DNS domain name selection or accept the default What is your DNS domain name default 13 Type your DNS domain name and press Return press Return to se lect default available only if DNS domain was found Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q 14 user gr
125. 1 Network Element Synchronization 5 3 3 1 1 Configuration Information Synchronization AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 pare Co C1 on N C1 N D on N ih N m m hb m m 55 Es co pl em m A m Version 1 00 08 99 5 Contents 5 3 3 1 2 Alarm Information Synchronization 5 46 5 3 3 2 Network Element Inventory Data 5 49 5 3 3 3 Configuration of Timing Source 5 52 5 3 3 4 Set Date and Time 5 56 5 3 3 5 Network Element Working Mode 5 57 5 3 3 6 Configure Simplex COMDAC Protection Scheme 5 58 5 3 3 7 Equipment Protection Switching 5 59 5 3 3 7 1 COMDAC Protection Switching 5 60 5 3 3 7 2 IO HDLC Protection Switching 5 63 5 3 3 8 Alarm Configuration 5 65 5 3 4 Network Element Software Upgrade 5 65 5 3 4 1 Network Element Software Download 5 65 5 3 4 2 Program Copy 5 69 5 3 5 Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS 5 70 5 3 5 1 Data Backup of 1 5 3 5 2 Data Restore 5 72 5 3 6 Network Element Reset 5 73 5 3 7 TL1 Cut Through 5 74 5 3 8 Delete Network Element 5 75 5 4 Service Provisioning 5 77 5 4 1 Create a V5 Network Interface 5 83 5 4 1 1 Edit V5 1 Interface 5 87 5 4 1 2 Edit V5 2 Interface 5 90 5 4 2 Add V5 Links to V5 Inte
126. 1 connection with the set of NEs in the OS s network Using this link any external OS with access rights to open a northbound interface session can configure test or monitor a set of NEs using a TL1 interface and can receive the responses to the TL1 com mands and the autonomous outputs which are generated by the NE depending on the northbound interface application type selected The AEM NB provides two different types of northbound interface applications m General northbound interface all types of autonomous messages received from the NE are send to the OS None NE autonomous messages will be inhibited m Alarm only northbound interface only alarm and environment alarm autonomous message received from the NE sent to the OS the AEM NB will inhibit the rest of NE autonomous messages database changes events etc AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 1 Northbound Interface Configure Termi nal for Session Restrictions with Multiple Sessions Avoid Interference with other EM Start Northbound Interface Session Close Northbound Interface Session Maintaining Au thentication Infor mation Close Virtual Cir cuits with NEs Routing of TL1 Messages Messages from NEs C 2 Version 1 00 08 99 Northbound Interface Basics p 0 Before the telnet session for the northbound interface is opened the TERM variable must be set correctly Set the TERM variable either
127. 11 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p The following table shows the view edit options of the HDLC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the IO HDLC is plugged in Slot format io hdlcf 1 2 Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no plug in is provisioned mation Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value IO HDLC Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value IDC500 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among plug ins to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Not applicable ECI Not applicable Provisioning The option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code can be Info used to see and change the slot provisioning info If nothing is provisioned this field displays None Otherwise it dis plays the provisioned card type Possible values None and IDC500 Operation amp Administration State This option menu is used to see and Protection select the administrative state for the HDLC P
128. 154 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mmm ne 4 Click on Apply to confirm 5 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 10 Delete V5 User Port Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete a V5 User Port Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 User Port List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt V5 User Port List via the menu bar The V5 User Port List window pops up 2 Select an entry in the V5 User Port list and click on Remove V5 User Port A Warning message pops up Removing V5 User Port may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the AEM NB will send a delete message to the NE m delete cross connection between bearer channel an a V5 timeslot for V5 1 protocol m delete cross connection between V5 User Port and V5 Interface 5 4 11 Delete V5 Link Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete a V5 Link Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt 1 Feeder List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar Feeder List window pops up 2 Select an entry in the E1 Feeder List and click on Remove A Warning message pops up Removing V5 Link id may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue
129. 15en gt from stallation lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Help sparc LuANY15en US X X kkkkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkk kkkk kkkk xkk AnyMedia Element Manager 1999 Lucent Technologies previous package LuANY15en have been found Where should AnyMediaNBEM Help be installed opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 Help q 68 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent a Enter selection q 69 Type an user group number User users and Group group have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs AEM NB R1 3 2 34 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 0 14 4 44 This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation o
130. 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User Groups mm 3 Select View gt User Groups The User Groups Table appears Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group Description Figure 4 22 User Groups Table AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 17 User Management User Groups mm ee 4 Click New The User Group Profile window pops up ser Group Profile 11 User Group Name Description Users Domains Applications amp Tasks Users Not Assigned Users Assigned Users Users veradmin Figure 4 23 Window User Group Profile 5 Enter a new user group name in the User Group Name field this is man datory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Click Users 7 Select one or more users that shall belong to the new user group in the Users Not Assigned field and click Aad gt NOTE To create user see Chapter 4 2 1 page 4 2 8 Click Domains 9 Select one or more domains the user group shall has access to in the Do mains Not Assigned field and click Add AEM NB R1 3 4 18 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management 363 211 412 gt NOTE User Groups If access permission to a domain is granted to a user group that permis sion will be automatically
131. 2 1 i i i i 6 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Inde test ues Change EEEE IP CON SRE ASSOC 22 7 1999 244 PM 146 NE_ASS 7 1999 2 4 Sw VR ILLEGAL ASSOC 2 43 PM Figure 6 3 Alarm Viewer Window 6 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer The Alarm Viewer can be terminated as follows m selecting File gt Exitin the Alarm Viewer menu to close all Alarm Viewers launched by the user m Byclicking on Close button or File gt Closeto close only the Alarm Viewer being in use Before quitting the Alarm Viewer the user is prompted for confirmation 6 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer Functions The Alarm Viewer provides different possibilities to perform internal functions and alarm management functions These functions can be initiated via m Menu m Toolbar In most cases the choice depends on the user s personal preference AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 11 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring 6 3 3 1 Menu Bar The menu is used to activate alarm viewer functions gt NOTE The executable functions depend on your user privileges Alarm Viewer Tale File View Filter Actions Options Help Figure 6 4 Menu Bar of the Alarm Viewer Selection is achieved m By opening the menu by pressing the left mouse button and dragging t
132. 2 2 6 e1 1 2 4 e1 1 2 3 4 Figure 5 35 V5 2 Add Remove Link Window The following table shows the view edit options of the V5 2 Add Remove Links window AEM NB R1 3 5 96 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Description Links Selection This filed is subdivided in two parts Available Links and Selected Links The Available Links list contains all the feeders that are nei ther associated to a V5 link which is cross connected to a V5 Interface nor used in a leased line group Selecting a row in this list activates the Add gt gt button see below The Selected Links list contains all the links that are cross connected to this V5 Interface Selecting a row in this list ac tivates the Remove lt lt button see below Feeder Identifies the physical feeder Double clicking on any row of either table available or selected links opens the E1 Feeder V5 Link window V5 Link tab Link id Shows the link id of the corresponding feeder If a V5 Link is not yet available this field is empty Add gt gt This button is used to add a link to the V5 2 Interface cross connection It is active only if a feeder in the Available Links list has been selected If the feeder already carries a V5 Link and the Link id is not present in the V5 2 Interface yet the feeder will be cross c
133. 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p See 65 valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn Or press Return to accept the default path Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q 66 Type an user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of LuNETSCP y n 67 Type y and press Return Installing Netscape Navigator 4 51 Stand Alone for AnyMedia NB EM R1 3 as LuNETSCP Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class common Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuNETSCP 1log Installation of LuNETSCP was successful AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 33 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure AnyMedia Help In Processing package instance lt LUANY
134. 330 ObjectStore Release 5 0 Service Pack 3 Database Server ObjectStore includes a server daemon which must be running for any application to access an Ob jectStore database It is recommended that you auto start the dae mon via commands in your operating system star tup scripts If you do not configure automatic startup you will have to start the server dae mon by hand or re run this utility to configure auto start Would you like to configure automatic server startup and shutdown yes 34 Type No and press Return This script will now verify the installation The ObjectStore Server daemon process is acces sible Schema databases are accessible The cache manager launcher for release 4 Ob jectStore path sunpro lib oscminit has correct modes and ownership ObjectStore configuration completed AnyMedia Servers Package to be installed LuANY15S Installation Processing package instance LuANY15S from lt XXXXXXX gt AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 21 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 server sparc LuANY15S X Xc VV ke e e e eee ee eee eee ecce ecce ecce ec ce cv e e kv e x kx x X AnyMedia Element Manager c 1999 Lucent Technologies VV ke e e e e ee eee eee ee eee ce e v v e x e x kx kx x kx x OK No pr
135. 4 5 application may have already been installed on the target sys tem only needed to display Help and to start AEM BB In this case it can be skipped during the installation process see step 71 page 2 35 The following TCP ports must be available in order to successfully run the AEM NB 1 3 m 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol m 1591 to 1641 As COBRA servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned to a port that clients can communicate with m OrbixTalk uses two ports for communications These ports have as default values 5000 and the next available value The first value can be modified at installation time to a value between 1024 and 65534 It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN IP multicast addresses Using OrbixTalk all communication take place using multicast addresses OrbixTalk can use up to 31 IP multicast addresses with 255 0 0 0 as the first IP address it is configurable at installation time in the range 255 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia client GUI LUMOS Net work Element and OS This parameter is needed for installing the AnyMedia cli ent The install AMEMR15 script runs the korn shell lt ksh gt environment AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 2 5 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p ee
136. 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Figure 5 38 E1 Feeder V5 Link Window Tab V5 Link gt NOTE The parameters in this window can only be modified if the administrative state is Locked AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 105 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm The following table shows the options of the V5 Link parameters Parameters Buttons Description V5 Link Data Physical Feeder Displays the physical feeder selected in the previous window Format e1 shelf slot feeder Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 V5 Link id This field is only editable when not cross con nected to a V5 Interface or when cross connected to a V5 In terface that is Locked see below Possible values 0 255 Remove This button can be used to remove the current V5 Link Adminisrative State This option menu offers four possible values Locked Shutdown Non Deferred Shutdown De ferred Unlocked The values Shutdown are only available when the current state is Unlocked and the link is cross connected to a V5 Interface When the value is Unlocked or Shutdown none of the V5 Link parameters can be modified i e the components of the window are disabled V5 Interface id This option menu indicates the V5 Interface id the link is cross connected to Possible values The existing V5 Interface id ex
137. 5 TS This column contains the time slot number that corre sponds to the concerned time slot Possible values 15 16 31 CCid The entry in this column identifies the communication chan nel via its CC id CP columns CP Type This column specifies the type of communication path that is concerned Possible values Control Link control only for V5 2 BCC only for V5 2 PSTN ISDN p ISDN f ISDN Ds CP This column specifies an identifier that determines the communication path in a unique way inside the V5 Interface Itis constructed by taking the CP aid and stripping all except the last number Possible values 1 145 Number of ISDNs This column specifies for ISDN commu nication paths the number of ISDN BRA User Ports that are cross connected to it It is used only as reference so the user can estimate the importance and traffic on that CP AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 133 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning p Se Parameters Buttons Description Command But The command buttons are only available when the adminis tons trative state of the selected V5 Interface is Locked Add TS This button provides access to the Add Time Slot window cf Chapter 5 4 6 1 page 5 136 The chosen time slot is not created impossible but changed to C channel Add CC This button provides access to the Add Communi cation Channel window cf Chapter 5 4 6 2 pag
138. 5 Configuration Management Provisioning Describes the database and software management the default system configuration parameters and the provisioning and service activation the inventory management clock synchronization management and protection switching Chapter 6 Fault Management Maintenance Describes alarms and events how to use the Alarm Viewer how to perform tests and trouble clearing procedures Appendix A Describes the Data Communications Network DCN configurations Appendix B Provides information about the system variables and the configuration pa rameters Appendix C Describes the TL1 Northbound Interface Abbreviations and Acronyms Lists all abbreviations and acronyms used in this manual AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 XIII About this Document m Glossary Defines special terms used in this manual m Index Alphabetical index to quickly search for paragraphs in the manual which provide more information on a certain keyword 4 Conventions Used Numbering Cross References Keyword Blocks Abbreviations Commands Trademarks Lucent Technolo gies trademarks Trademarks of other companies XIV Version 1 00 08 99 The following are terms used in this USM that may have a different meaning than the general or common use of the term m Inthe AEM NB the term access means that the system provides the pri mary service interface for the customer to enter the network m The ter
139. 5 Timeslot id B2 channel 5 Timeslot id Operational State Service State Figure 5 45 V5 ISDN BRA User Port Window This window is used to add a new V5 ISDN BRA User Port remove or modify an existing V5 ISDN BRA User Port It allows to create remove the cross connection between a V5 ISDN BRA User Port and a V5 Interface to create change remove the cross connection between a V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel s and a V5 timeslot only for V5 1 proto col to create change remove the cross connection s between a V5 ISDN BRA User Port and V5 communication path s frame packet or signalling as well as V5 ISDN BRA User Port service parameters configuration and modification The following table lists all possible entries parameters Whether or not it is possi ble to edit change individual parameters depends on the previous actions If a totally new V5 ISDN BRA User Port is created all parameters can be speci fied by the user If however this window is invoked from windows in which individual parameters have already been specified such as Physical Drop V5 User Port Address and AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 125 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 126 Version 1 00 Service Provisioning V5 Interface id it is not possible to change these parameters here at all or only insignificantly gt NOTE The parameters in this window can only be modified if the administrative s
140. 6 3 3 3 page 6 14 If you selected Alarms from a Host s the NE selection window is dis played cf Figure 6 7 page 6 21 and you have to select one or more NEs and or the AEM NB for which the alarms should be displayed Press OK in the NE selection window to display the alarms from the selected objects in the alarm viewer or press Cancel to cancel the operation AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring 6 3 4 4 Help NESelection Hosts ot user domain AnyMedia Simulator183 TCL NE13 TCL NE14 Ok Cancel Figure 67 Selection Window Help is provided for every window The help text describes the purpose of the win dow how to use it and a description of each field of the window is given In the Menu Bar of each AEM NB application there are two help options m index Displays the help index allowing the user to navigate through the AEM NB help information m Onwindow Displays the help information of the window where the user is currently working 6 3 5 Alarm Viewer Functions Summary The Alarm Viewer provides the user with different functions for managing alarm information m Manual or automatic reload of alarms m Acknowledge alarms The user can acknowledge one more or all reported alarms The AEM NB allows different users to acknowledge the same alarm The name of the last user who has acknowledged the alarm is stored m Clearalarms The u
141. 8 Alarm Data Synchronization 6 8 6 2 9 Alarm Log Handling 6 9 6 2 10 Periodical Deletion of Cleared Alarms 6 9 6 3 Alarm Monitoring 6 10 6 3 1 General 6 10 6 3 2 Starting and Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 10 6 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer Functions 6 11 6 3 4 System Management Functions 6 18 6 3 5 Alarm Viewer Functions 6 21 6 4 Test Management 6 23 6 4 1 User Line Test 6 25 6 4 2 User Port Test 6 29 6 4 3 Standby Card Test Scheduling 6 21 6 4 4 Built in Self Test 6 32 6 4 5 TAP Test 6 33 6 4 6 CRC Test 6 34 6 4 7 Loopback Test at the Feeder Side ES 6 4 8 Loopback Test at the ISDN User Port Side 6 38 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 VII Contents 6 5 Information Management and Maintenance 6 40 6 5 1 NE AEM NB Connection States 6 40 6 5 2 Changing Connection States 6 40 6 5 3 Configuration Data Synchronization after Association 6 41 6 5 4 Alarm Data Synchronization after Association 6 42 6 5 5 Association Maintenance 6 43 6 6 Alarms 6 44 6 6 1 Overview 6 44 6 6 2 Alarm Types 6 44 6 6 3 Network Element Alarms 6 46 6 6 4 Element Manager Platform Alarms 6 46 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration 1 Overview A 1 2 DCN Introduction 1 Terms Used this Chapter A 2 4 Network Element Communication Capabilities A 2 A 5 AEM NB Communication Capabilities A 5 A 6 Recommended DCN Configurations 5
142. 9 GL 1 Glossary EE oo m D Applications Pack AP This is a circuit pack which provides the line side interface functionality for POTS SPOTS ISDN or special service circuits Each AP handles 24 or 32 lines POTS SPOTS COIN and special services or 16 lines ISDN There can be up to 16 APs in an AnyMedia Access System shelf APs are for example LPZ100 LPU112 TAP100 as well as ADSL and AFM packs for broadband applications Archive Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape and deleting the original files once they have been backed up mE 77 B b wire One of the two wires of a twisted a b copper pair The a b copper pairs are used for subscriber lines connected for example with Z interfaces U interfaces or ADSL interfaces The b wire is sometimes called ring wire Backup Process of copying file systems to removable media such as tape to safeguard against loss damage or corrup tion BB Broadband BCC protocol Bearer Channel Connection protocol This is a V5 2 protocol which allocates bearer channels on demand Bearer channel A 64 kbps timeslot within the V5 x interface allocated for a B channel of an ISDN user port or a channel from a POTS user port Blinking Alarm An alarm which is continuously changing its status raised clear raised clear Bridge A network layer device that passes packets between two or more network segments that use the same data link communications
143. A N N D A AR AR on N N k m c Version 1 00 08 99 1 I Contents 1 4 2 Configuration Management 1 21 1 4 8 Network Operation amp Surveillance 1 22 1 4 3 1 Fault Management 1 22 1 4 3 1 1 Fault Identification 1 23 1 4 3 1 2 Fault Localisation and Diagnosis 1 24 1 4 3 1 3 Fault Clearance 1 24 1 4 3 2 Network Modification 1 25 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and Removal of an NE 1 25 1 4 3 2 2 Modification of NEs 1 26 1 4 3 3 Performance Monitoring 1 26 1 4 4 System Security and User Groups 1 27 15 Network Configuration 1 28 1 5 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN 1 28 1 5 2 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN 1 29 1 5 8 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN 1 30 1 5 4 AEM NB Server with Clients and external OS WAN 1 341 AEM NB R1 3 1 II Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description 1 1 About this Subject Scope This chapter describes the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Nar rowband Services AEM NB R1 3 This release is compatible with the network el ement NE R1 3 Purpose This chapter provides an overview of the AEM NB and tries to give an insight into the functioning of the AEM NB by providing de
144. Add gt gt button and the lt lt Remove button are available only after having selected a domain name from the corresponding list 5 Press OK to confirm In the NE Name Information window the fields Communications Info Authentication and Connection are displayed now The Connection State is set to Not Connected see step 7 gt NOTE If you decide to close this window via Cancel or window controls a Warn ing window pops up informing you of the possible rejection of the NE crea tion At least 1 domain must be selected Otherwise the NE creation operation will be rejected Do you want to go back to Domain Selection AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 19 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration If you select No the creation of the NE is rejected Otherwise the Domain Selection window is activated The window remains on the screen until you make a decision gt NOTE Connect NE To establish the connection to the created NE first you have to enter the ap propriate data in the fields Communications Info and Authentication in the NE Name Information window After that it is possible to establish the connection by pressing Connect Depending on the Connection State this Label button provides different functions Connect Disconnect Cancel 6 Enter the IP Address and TID Target ID the name of the NE to which the connection is addressed of the new NE in the field Communications Info
145. Apply This button is used to accept the different changes tons and keeps the window in view for further use Remove This button can be used to remove a V5 User Port If you want to then add a new V5 ISDN BRA User Port enter the values for Physical Drop and V5 User Port Address define the parameters in the Service Configuration field use the option menus V5 Interface id and V5 Timeslot id only for V5 1 and the check boxes B1 Channel and B2 Channel to define the desired V5 ISDN cross connection for the bearer chan nels and click on Apply to confirm edit an already existing V5 ISDN BRA define the parameters in the Service User Port and the related options Configuration field use the option menus V5 Interface id and V5 Timeslot id only for V5 1 and the check boxes B1 Channel and B2 Channel to change the V5 ISDN cross connection for the bearer channels and click on Apply to confirm remove a cross connection between use the check box B1 Channel or B2 bearer channel and timeslot Channel to select a bearer channel use the option menu V5 Timeslot id to choose the cross connected timeslot id null value and click on Apply AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 129 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm If you want to then configure the signalling parameters click on V5 Signalling gt gt remove a V5 User Port select the corresponding V5 User
146. Copies print to a printer enter the name of the printer in Printer print to a file enter the name of the file in File AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 21 System Management Print out Reports mm Table 3 11 Print Dialog Actions If you want to then have a title over the printed pages enter the title in Banner Page Title apply UNIX print options enter the options in Print Command Options select the paper size click one of the radio buttons below Paper Size select the orientation of the print out click one of the radio buttons below Orientation start printing and close the window click on Print close the print window without printing click on Cancel amp EB 7 Close 212721929 1 16 7M ET ccocm Lier FCL NETS v5imeraaid YE L nb I a e 8 Figure3 11 Print Preview Window AEM NB R1 3 3 22 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Backup and Restore Actions in Print The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Print Pre Preview view Table3 12 Print Dialog Actions If you want to then print out click on the printer icon cancel the print out click on Close view a single page preview click on the single page icon view a multi page preview click on the multi page icon change the magnification of the preview select another magnification with the 6 option menu maximize restore
147. Cre ate Edit V5 Interfaces List All gt NE gt V5 Interfaces List gt V5 Inter Edit V5 1 V5 2 Interface face id Add Remove Links V5 1 Set Feeder V5 2 Add Remove Links All gt NE gt 1 Feeder List Edit E1 Feeder List All gt NE gt V5 User Port List Edit V5 User Port List a lf there is card inserted the slot will be displayed instead of the apparatus code b If the slot has not been provisioned the slot id will be displayed instead of the apparatus code AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 13 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 3 Equipment Configuration Overview Screen Navigation 5 14 Version 1 00 Configuration of specific equipment data is the process of preparing the AEM NB for control of the AnyMedia Access System by configuring and setting any re quired option Prior to network interface configuration and service configuration the AEM NB must know some data of the equipment this is done during the NE creation proc ess which is usually followed by plug in configuration Then during NE management some other tasks regarding equipment configura tion can be performed by the AEM NB e g Date amp Time Management Timing Synchronization Management Protection Management etc Finally if the NE is not managed by the AEM NB any longer it shall be deleted from the AEM NB database Even when autonomous notifications ar
148. DNs Several lines can share a TS and CC as several CPs can be linked to the same CC e g see below Timeslot columns CP Columns TS CCid CP Type CP 15 5 ISDN D 8 15 ISDN f 10 15 5 ISDN p 12 AEM NB R1 3 5 132 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Absence of an entry TS CC or CP indicates that the link between this entry and the non absent item does not exist yet In this cases the Add buttons can be used to establish the desired links Each line can be selected separately Selecting any CP line also selects the re lated CC and TS fields if available Operations allowed on a selection are the de lete operations according to the criteria listed below Protected Items The protected items are also displayed group 2 protection A row that is subject to protection is marked visibly as not all edition can be performed on it e g differ ent background colour or different text colour The operations that are not availa ble on these rows are Remove CC TS and Add CC TS Protections are set and removed from the protection window cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 page 5 146 Parameters Buttons Description Timeslot col E1 Feeder This column contains the physical feeder that umns carries the concerned time slot Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 V5 Link id This column contains the V5 Link id of the link that is concerned Possible values 0 25
149. Data NE Name NE id Communication Info IP Address TID Authentication Login Password Connection Connection State Not Connected Close Figure 5 4 NE Name Information Window While creating a new NE the tab NE Details is active by default 2 08 99 Enter an appropriate NE name in the corresponding field All characters are allowed the maximum length is 30 characters At this stage the fields Communications Info Authentication and Connection are not availa ble The field NE id shows a unique identifier used internally used by the AEM NB Press Apply to confirm The Domain Selection window pops up AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Domain Selection NE Name 11 Domain Selection Available domains Selected domains Year2000 Figure 5 5 Domain Selection Window Assign Domain At creation time the NE must be included in one or several domains for domain creation see chapter 4 The Domain Section window consists of two lists Availa ble Domains and Selected Domains This window provides the user with the fa cilities needed to select the domains from which the NE will be accessible 4 Use the Add gt gt button to move the selected NE from the Available Do mains list box to the Selected Domains one Use lt lt Remove to remove domains from the Selected Domains list The
150. E Reset INIT SYS via the menu bar A Warning window pops up NE Reset is service affecting The data stored in the NE Name will be destroyed and set to the default manufacturing values Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the AEM NB will send an INIT SYS to the NE to reset the NVDS to its default values and launch the following message in the n Progress window Reset lt NE Name gt in progress gt NOTE A progress indicator for the reset is shown in the n Progress window This indicator will reach the 9096 mark 5 minutes this time can be configured in a preferences file after the NE Reset operation was started and will then show this value until the connection between the AEM NB and the NE is es tablished again gt NOTE After the reset process has finished correctly the connection to the NE is automatically re established AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 73 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 5 3 7 Cut Through Overview The AEM NB provides the user with a command line to a TL1 transaction lan guage 1 session with any NE Using this command line the user can type any TL1 command send these commands to a selected NE and get the responses to the requests as well as all the autonomous outputs sent by the NE TL1 used for the provisioning maintenance and administration of the AnyMedia Access System is an ASCII based command langu
151. LNET SNMP but this de pends on the router bridge being used A 6 1 2 Network Element Configu ration The ROC is the management interface used to access the NE The initial provi sioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI NB LAN or RS 232C because the LL interface carrying the remote operations chan nel must be in service to get remote access to the NE via remote operations channel ROC To enable the use of 64 kbit s bearer channels for remote opera tions the following provisioning needs for the V5DLC 30 channel market are required m Create a ROC line virtual port which can be addressed as remote LAN interface same IP address as the local LAN interface on the V5DLC ent roc TL1 command m Routing of physical LL bearer channel assigned to the virtual port to the serial communication channel SCC of the microcontroller m Create a leased line link entity TL1 commana m create a cross connection between the ROC line entity and a 64 kbit s timeslot of leased line link ent crs lts TL1 commana m Bring ROC channel into service On the 30 channel AnyMedia NE we must configure the ROC over the NON V 5 PLL service and the IP characteristics of the NE We use TL1 commands to con figure the NE by means of the GSI NB craft terminal the TL1 commands related to this scenario are listed below Note that the default router address of the NE must be set
152. LuOX23RT OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in lt OrbixMT path gt gt NOTE A list of partitions and free space is displayed Here is a list of your partitions and the free Space in each of them Filesystem kbytes used avail capacity Mounted on lt information about your partitions and free space gt Where should the main OrbixTalk software dis tribution be installed opt lu cent OrbixTalk1 2c02 AEM NB R1 3 2 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p SSe 6 21 22 23 24 25 363 211 412 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Which UDP IP port should the OrbixTalk Direc tory Enquiries daemon use OrbixTalk requires that you reserve a range of AT LEAST 2 ports starting at this port 5xxx Type a valid UDP IP port and press Return press Return to select de fault The OrbixTalk Directory Enquiries daemon as signs individual Topics an IP Multicast address starting with the next address above the base IP address What base IP Multicast address within the range 225 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 should the OrbixTalk Directory Enquiries daemon use 225 0 0 0 Type a valid IP multicast address and press Return press Return to select default What directory should the OrbixTalk data files be stored opt lucent OrbixTalk
153. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services Release 1 3 User Service Manual 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 Copyright 1999 Lucent Technologies rights reserved Printed in U S A This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries It may not be reproduced distributed or altered in any fashion by any entity either internal or external to Lucent Technologies except in accordance with applicable agreements contracts or licensing without the express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business management owner of the material Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Ordering Information The order number for this document is 363 211 412 For more ordering information refer to How to Order Documents in the section About This Document How to Comment on This Document A feedback form is located immediately after the legal page of this document Please send or fax your comments and suggestions to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Trademarks Acrobat Reader is registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AnyMedia is a trademark of Lucent Technologies Internet Explorer
154. M ENV AID NTFCNCDE ALMTYPE OCRDAT OCRTM ALMMSG C 3 3 5 Output Format Parameters AID Access Identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes AID is the access identifier of the contact closure Expert English mc 1 1 8 Miscellaneous Contact Closure NTFCNCDE Notification Code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes NTFONCDE is the alarm level Expert English Comment MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm CR Critical Alarm AEM NB R1 3 C 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 ALMTYPE Alarm Type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes Alarm Type Use alarm type instead of condition type for RTRV ALM ENV Expert English Comment ACF AC Loss AC Input Power Failure BD Battery on Discharge FAN Fan Unit Failed MISC1 Miscellaneous 1 MISC2 Miscellaneous 2 MISC3 Miscellaneous 3 MISC4 Miscellaneous 4 MISC5 Miscellaneous 5 MISC6 Miscellaneous 6 MISC7 Miscellaneous 7 MISC8 Miscellaneous 8 MJF Fuse Major MNF Fuse Minor NONE None PMJ Power Major TAMPER Intrusion Door Open OCRDAT Occurrence Date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes This indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt lt 99 maps to 1970 throug
155. M NB R1 3 XII Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 About this Document 3 How to use this document 363 211 412 The guide is divided into a number of sections Subjects clearly separated by numbered tabs The front pages of the guide also describe this division and list the titles of the subjects together with the corresponding tab numbers Through this readers can quickly select the subject of their interests and needs How are we doing comment form so readers can give feedback to improve the next revision of the document Table of contents list of figures list of tables Overview Defines the purpose of the document and the intended audience Also in cluded are topics about the conventions used in the document related doc umentation how to order documents and how to comment on this docu ment Chapter 1 Functional Description Contains a short overview over the system its features and capabilities Chapter 2 Software Installation Describes the standard procedure to install the AEM NB R1 3 server pack age server applications and client package client applications Chapter 3 System Management Provides the system administrator with all information necessary to admin ister the AEM NB so that it can be used as a centralized management sys tem Chapter 4 User Management Describes all actions necessary to create modify delete users user groups and domains and the handling of controlled objects Chapter
156. NE configuration data are out of synchroni zation and or configuration reports are inhibited and or the AEM NB config uration messages buffer is overflown 6 5 4 Alarm Data Synchronization after As sociation Alarm Data The AEM NB maintains alarm data for each NE These data are updated with all NE alarms and environment alarms from the NEs database To change synchroni zation settings see Chapter 5 3 3 1 page 5 45 Synchronization The following figure illustrates the NE state model depending on the synchroniza States Diagram tion state between the alarm data kept in the NE and the AEM NB alarm data base AEM NB R1 3 6 42 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Management and Maintenance PROC BLOCK Configuration Data Alarm Buffer Overflow Detection Alarm Sync Process Figure 6 14 Alarm Data Synchronization States There are two NE alarm synchronization states m PROC The AEM NB alarm database is consistent with the current NE alarms If alarm and or environment alarm reports are inhibited the AEM NB data base is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain moment in time m BLOCK The AEM NB alarm database and the current NE alarms are out of syn chronization due to an alarm buffer overflow The AEM NB alarm database is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain moment in time The AEM NB configuration data which are maintained for each NE ar
157. NE domains m Online Help m Multi User access m Northbound interfaces TL 1 AEM NB R1 3 1 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Introduction p 1 2 2 ISO Functional Areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration Management The Configuration Management supports the complete range of graphical func tions to provision and maintain the R1 3 NEs Network topologies shelf views and self explaining menus are navigating the operator to configure POTS ISDN BRA and Leased Line Services no provisioning can be done for leased lines The fol lowing main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m Inventory management m Equipment provisioning and maintenance m Service provisioning m Clock synchronization m System Equipment Service status m Software download m NEdatabase backup and restore m System date time synchronization 1 2 2 2 Fault Management The Fault Management supports the operator in detecting displaying localizing and logging any faults occurring in the managed network The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m Handling of alarm severities critical major minor m Receiving of autonomous alarm messages m Retrieving of alarms per NE plug in application pack m Retrieving of alarm and event logs from NE m Initialization of tests for fault analysis purposes AEM NB
158. NG The communication session between the AEM NB and NE is available but the AEM NB is trying to close connection TCP IP connection and commu nication session with NE The user is unavailable to execute any action CONNECTED SYNCHRONIZING The communication session between the AEM NB and NE is available but the AEM NB is trying to synchronize AEM NB and NE information The user is unavailable to execute any action until the synchronizing process is finished After that the state changes to CONNECTED CONNECTED TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and NE is available TCP IP connection is alive and the software version currently stored in the NE is supported by the AEM NB When the association process be tween the AEM NB and NE is completed the NE state changes to CON NECTED and remains like this until the TL1 communication session is closed on user request or the TCP IP connection is lost closed 6 5 2 Changing Connection States 6 40 Version 1 00 The connection state changes can be initiated by the user via the GUI cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 17 section Connect or they are initiated by the AEM NB 08 99 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Management and Maintenance p 0 1 6 Not Connected The user can initiate the connection establishment process with an NE in connec tion state NOT CONNECTED After initiating this process the NE state changes
159. Number A 12 character alphanumeric code that identi fies each plug in It includes the date and place of manufacture ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the face plate of the plug in There is a one to one correspond ence between CLEI and ECI codes gt NOTE This field is empty for IO E1 and IO HDLC CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in gt NOTE This field is empty for IO E1 and IO HDLC ICC Indicates the interchangeability among plug ins to specify forward backward compatibility Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number SW Version Obtained from the NE at connection time In ternally the AEM NB will have to verify whether the men tioned SW Version is manageable by the system Only appli cable to the COMDACs or the shelves where the shelf back plane version will be displayed Program Equipment Code Code of the SW currently stored in the plug in Only applicable to the COMDAC AEM NB R1 3 5 50 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Parameters Buttons Description Summary Circuit Pack Type Displays a mnemonic that identifies the plug in type Possible values are COMDAC CIU IO E1 IO HDLC PROG2W COIN ZEUS ISDN12 U TAP ADSL4 and AFM_DS3 Number of Units Displays two numbers the number of in serted plug ins and
160. P IP LAN Figure 1 9 Server without Clients and external OS LAN AEM NB R1 3 1 28 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Network Configuration 1 5 2 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN AEM NB server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a LAN AEM NB Server TCP IP LAN Figure 1 10 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 29 Functional Description Network Configuration p ll 1 5 3 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN AEM NB server connected to the NEs using a LAN and connected to one or more external OSs using a WAN link Bridge Router WAN LINK ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM TCP IP PPP NE M N gt 2 N p S l odem Spe ISDN Network Adapter 7 ra Bridge Router TCP IP Hub AEM NB Server TCP IP LAN i NE H NE Figure 1 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN AEM NB R1 3 1 30 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Network Configuration 147 7 1 5 4 AEM NB Server with Clients and t
161. Plug in nises automatically which plug in unit has been plugged and where As only de fault settings are set on the new plug in unit the system administrator must adapt the configuration Removing a When deleting a plug in it must be ensured that there are no connections running Plug in via this unit Then the plug in may be removed 1 4 3 3 Performance Monitoring Tasks of Performance management guarantees that the transmission quality does not fall Performance below a minimum performance threshold Monitoring Another task is the recording of data for analysis at a later date e g storing alarms in logs and print them AEM NB R1 3 1 26 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description 1 4 4 Protection from Unauthorised Access User Groups Access Rights 363 211 412 System Security and User Groups Working with AEM NB The AEM NB provides mechanisms which protect the system from unauthorised access The user groups play a very important role in this context as they define different levels of access rights for the individual users By default there are 3 user groups the administrator maintenance and monitoring user group Further groups can be added Table 1 1 provides an overview of the access permissions the user groups should have Table 1 1 Assignment of User Groups to Applications Tasks Application Task User Group System Start up Shutdown Administrator Administration Monitoring Ad
162. Port Address and click on Remove A Warning window pops up Removing V5 User Port may be service affecting Do you want to continue exit the window click on the Close button AEM NB R1 3 5 130 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 5 4 5 21 V5ISDN User Port Signalling Configuration This window is used to configure the V5 ISDN BRA User Port signalling data It al lows the creating changing or removing of cross connection s between V5 ISDN BRA User Port and V5 ISDN communication path s packet frame and data signalling El V5 ISDN User Port Signalling Config 71 CP id cc id Frame Data Type F Zt 81 33 m Signalling Data Type Ds 31 36 Apply Close xi Figure 5 46 V5 ISDN User Port Signalling Configuration Window Packet Data Type P This window displays the V5 communication path ids frame packet and signal ling associated to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port The option menus id are available only when the selected V5 Interface id V5 ISDN BRA User Port window cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 identifies a V5 In terface which contains V5 communication path s already configured They dis play the CPs present in the V5 Interface to which the user port is cross connected If no CP is cross connected null value is displayed in this field If the selected V5 communication path is already cross connected to a V5 com munication chann
163. R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 3 Functional Description Introduction 1 2 2 3 Performance Management The Performance Management provides facilities for retrieving storing as logs and printing the logs of the NE performance data to ensure the quality of service 1 2 2 4 Security Management The Security Management functions which are based on UNIX control the ac cess to the AEM NB and to the managed NEs The following main functionalities are offered for more detail see Chapter 1 3 1 1 page 1 8 m user administration m AEM NB user security profile m No additional NE login for current AEM NB user m access via login name and password m Inactivity user session time out 1 2 3 Applications The AEM NB provides 6 applications which give access to the management func tionality as described in Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 The following applications are available m System Administration m User Administration and Profiling m Log Viewer m Alarm Viewer m Configuration Manager m BroadBand EM Each application is composed by one or more tasks The default user group as signment to the individual applications tasks is described in Chapter 1 4 4 page 1 27 1 UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclu sively through X Open Company Limited 2 provided by the SUN Solaris operation system AEM NB R1 3 1 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412
164. RA or Leased PSTN and ISDN BRA are not possible in the same ap plication pack If the drop is used for leased lines Leased is dis played AEM NB R1 3 5 42 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Parameters Buttons Description The Add V5 User Port button is not available for leased lines Otherwise it provides access to the V5 PSTN User Port or V5 ISDN BRA User Port window depending on the type of Apparatus Code In this case the drop will be trans ferred This option is only available if the selected drop is not yet cross connected Access to the V5 PSTN User Port window for the following apparatus codes LPZ100 LPP100 LPZ120 Access to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port window for the appa ratus code LPU112 The Edit V5 User Port button provides access to the V5 PSTN User Port or V5 ISDN BRA User Port window de pending on the service being provided by the selected drop There you will be able to edit the user port parameters This option is only available if the selected drop is already cross connected The Remove V5 User Port button removes the cross con nection selected in the list see above This option is only available if the drop is already cross con nected and providing non leased service Apply This button is available only if the Provisioned Apparatus Code has been modified 2 Use the option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code to select
165. RT Netscape Navigator 4 51 OrbixNames 1 1c RT A browser based on line user manual A server providing distrib uted access for TL1and SNMP managed NEs Pro vides CORBA TL1 transla tions Stand alone A full implementation of the name service as defined by the OMG Object Manage ment Groups LuOX23RT OrbixMT 2 3c pacth02 RT A full implementation of the OMG CORBA for C It provides an efficient para digm of client server pro gramming allowing easy de ployment of distributed sys tems LuOSRT ObjectStore 5 0 RT An object oriented database management system OOD BMS providing persistent storage for AEM NB data LuOXTKRT 2 4 Version 1 00 08 99 OrbixTalk 1 2c patch 02 RT AEM NB R1 3 A full implementation of the event service as defined by the OMG 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning General mm Pre requisites TCP Ports IP Multicast Ad dresses Time Zone 363 211 412 Table 2 1 R13 Distribution Description Package Application Name Description LuOXWRT OrbixWeb 3 0 RT A full implementation of the OMG CORBA for Java LuRWRT RogueWave 1 0 7 amp 1 1 2 RT A set of standard program ming libraries used by the AEM NB servers LuJRERT jre 1 1 7 symantec Java platform environment ReportPro for the graphical user inter face gt NOTE RT describes a Run Time application version The Netscape
166. SWORD for accessing the AEM NB server encrypted A 6 1 5 X Transport Elements Configuration If transport is achieved by means of SDH equipment in ring or point to point struc ture then m The paths VC 12 paths used for transporting the E1 links need to be provisioned m digital cross connect system which extracts the ROCs from each 2 Mbit s link and put up to 30 ROCs to one 2 Mbit s link need to be configured For up to seven remote V5DLC the TMN 252 SCX can be used If transport is achieved by means of PDH equipment in point to point structure then m The E1 paths used for transporting the ROCs through the PDH net work need to be provisioned m The digital cross connect system which extracts the ROCs from each 2 Mbit s link and put up to 30 ROCs to one 2 Mbit s link need to be configured For up to 7 remote V5DLCs the TMN 252 SCX be used If transport is achieved by means of leased line networks Then a leased line ser vice needs to be provisioned A 6 1 6 Connection Diagram For testing purposes the E1 interface of the E1 router may be either directly con nected to the E1 feeder of the NE or may be connected to this feeder using an in termediate transport network and or a crossconnect equipment AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 9 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Customer Leased Li Transport Network NE
167. Set V5 1 Feeder Set Secondary Link i Vv V5 2 Group 2 Protection Switch V5 2 Group 2 Add V5 2 Group 2 Protection Protection Windows with several tabs L Window Add CC TS Figure 5 29 Screen Navigation for Service Provisioning The next sections describe the most common way for provisioning a V5 Interface and the related services 363 211 412 Create V5 Interface Add V5 Links Define primary V5 Links V5 2 Interfaces only Define secondary V5 Links V5 2 Interfaces only AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 5 81 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm m Create communication channels m Define communications channels for PSTN protocol m Define communications channels for ISDN signalling protocol m Create communications channels to be protected and timeslots to protect them m Create ISDN communication paths subscriber groups AEM NB R1 3 5 82 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 5 4 1 Create a V5 Network Interface Overview The maximum number of V5 Interfaces that can be supported by the AnyMedia Access System is 16 so the AEM NB can prevent the user at GUI level that a V5 Interface creation operation will be rejected if this number is exceeded or if provi sioning information is not correct V5 2 Interface identifier must be unique within the managed access network Procedure Complete th
168. Slots E1 Feeder VS Link Id Timeslot Apply Close Figure 5 55 Add V5 2 Group 2 Protection Window Parameters Buttons Description Comm Chan nel id This option menu contains the list of all CCs that are linked to a timeslot and not yet in the protection mode When a value is selected the corresponding timeslot is dis played in the timeslot field The value None cannot be se lected but can be obtained when a timeslot is selected that has no CC linked E1 Feeder Displays the physical feeder a timeslot belongs to V5 Link id Displays the V5 Link id associated to the feeder shown in the previous field Available Time Slots Timeslot Displays the CC timeslots that are not in the pro tection mode and have no CC linked yet Possible values None 15 16 31 AEM NB R1 3 5 150 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Apply Description This button is enabled when data have been selected in one of the above fields In the case the selected value concerns a timeslot without CC a protection unit is created for that timeslot that protects the other timeslots If a timeslot is selected that carries a CC a protection unit is defined for that timeslot and the CC is configured to it That CC is then protected Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a group 2 protection Step Pr
169. Test Management p 0 gt 2 text fields are display only they have the following meaning Table 6 15 Meaning of the Text Fields in the CRC Test Window Text Fields Meaning Possible Values NE Name The unique identifier of the Any string consisting of up to selected NE 30 characters Slot The slot number of the AP be ap 1 1 16 ing used Provisioned Mnemonic used to identify the LPU112 Apparatus general type of function pro Code vided Port id Identifies the selected drop drop 1 1 16 1 32 within the AP Test Pro The option menu Up and Down gramming Directionality can be used to define the direction of the test The option menu 1 15 step Test Duration can be used to define the test duration in sec onds Test Results The field Test Results shows CRC FAIL CRC OK the general test result The field CRC Errors Per Sec 0 100 step 1 ond shows the number of de tected CRC errors per second 2 Use the option menus in the pane Test Programming to define test pa rameters 3 Click on Apply to confirm A In Progress window pops up showing the fol lowing message CRC Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Card Type Port id Test Result 4 Wait until the Test Results appears cf Figure 6 12 page 6 35 and view the test result AEM NB R1 3 6 36 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management
170. Threshold Crossing Alert TCP Transmission Control Protocol TID Target Identifier Transaction Language 1 TMN Telecommunication Management Network AEM NB R1 3 AB 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Abbreviations BE TNM Total Network Management TO Transmission Only TS Test Timeslot U UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UAS Unassigned UEQ Unequipped UI User Interface UID User Id UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply UX Unix W WAN Wide Area Network X XO Crystal Oscillator AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 9 Abbreviations ee AEM NB R1 3 AB 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary 10Base T This is a physical interface used for high speed Ethernet connection It uses twisted pair cables A a wire One of the two wires of a twisted a b copper pair The a b copper pairs are used for subscriber lines connected for example with Z interfaces U interfaces or ADSL interfaces The a wire is sometimes called tip wire AEM NB AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services It may be also named simply EM in some parts of the document AID Access Identifier AID is the address within TL1 command that is used to identify the physical or logical entity or entities within a network element to which the command applies It has the format of a unique component identifier followed by hierarchical addresses
171. To be able to start up the GUI it is necessary previously to execute the following script lt AnyMedia_path gt GUI AnyMediaNBEM_GuUI sh This would set all the necessary environment variables It is recommended to in clude this line in the user profile or to create an alias to facilitate the use 2 2 2 Installing Individual Packages Also it is possible to install each package individually using the command pkgadd d lt path_name gt package_name refer to Table 2 1 page 2 4 to ob tain the packages names or using the admintool system administration with a graphical interface In case you have to do an individual server package installa tion then after you have finished reboot the machine gt NOTE If the package is already installed on the target system the following ac tions must be done m the package must be de installed previously refer to Remove Any Media Package Installations on page 43 for more information about packages de installation m inorder not to affect the rest of the installed packages the package must be re installed in the same directory as the previous one For this type of installation it is necessary to comply with the packaged depend ences showed in the following table Table 2 2 Packages Dependences To install the following package must be installed previously OrbixNames OrbixMT OrbixTalk OrbixMT OrbixWeb jre AEM NB R1 3 2 40 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Sof
172. Use the horizontal scroll bar and the slider to shift the visible window section to the left or right Small step to the left or right Click on the left or right scroll bar arrow Page left or right Click on the scroll bar to the left or right of the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider horizontally until the desired window section becomes visible Vertical scroll bar Use the vertical scroll bar to shift the currently visible window section up or down m Small step up or down Click on the top or bottom scroll bar arrow m Page up or down Click on the scroll bar section above or below the slider m Shift window section Use the mouse and drag the slider up or down until the desired window section becomes visible Maximize button Menu bar Window menu button 363 211 412 Activate the maximize button by clicking on it to show the window at its maximum size i e the window will occupy the whole screen If you click again on the maximize button thus activated the window will be restored to its original size The menu bar contains the menu names each of them containing options related to the topic These options may be selected to control the process running in this win dow cf Chapter 3 3 6 Click this button to open the window menu cf Figure 3 5 Double click to exit the ap plication AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 3 9 System Management General Information o
173. User Administration Aa File View Help Login Name User Name Description veradmin Default EM Administrator veri Verificacion 1 Administrator Figure 4 8 Users Table 3 Select the user which shall be deleted in the Login Name field and click Delete 4 Confirm your selection The window will be closed AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 7 User Management Domains 4 3 Domains 4 3 1 Create Domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to create a new domain Before creating a new domain please pay attention to the following remarks The AEM NB administrator must have a system login m The controlled objects are defined as sets of managed NEs m Only EM NE controlled object types are supported NOTE An EM object is generated by default with Type and Value AnyMe dia which cannot be deleted Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show m sj e Figure 4 9 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up 2 ser administration File View Help Figure 4 10 Menu Bar of Window User Administration AEM NB 1 3 4 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Domains mm 3 Select View
174. V5 Signal ling window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 6 modify the group 2 protection click on Protection The V5 2 Group 2 Protection window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 set a primary Link click on Set Primary in the Primary Link field The Primary Link window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 109 remove a primary link click on Remove Primary cf Chapter 5 4 14 page 5 157 set a secondary link click on Set Secondary in the Sec ondary Link field The Secondary Link window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 4 page 5 111 remove a secondary link click on Remove Secondary cf Chapter 5 4 15 page 5 158 exit the window click on Close AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 93 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee 5 4 2 Add V5 Links to V5 Interface This Section is divided in two subsections m V5 1 Set Feeder m V5 2 Add Link Assumptions To add a V5 Link to a V5 Interface the following assumptions must be fulfilled m The NE is connected m The V5 Interface administrative primary service state is OOS Out of Serv ice only for V5 1 m physical feeder is not used by any other V5 Interface or leased line link m V5 Link identifier must be unique within the V5 Interface only for v5 2 5 4 2 1 Add a V5 1 Feeder Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a link to the V5 1 Interface only one link is possible Step Procedure 1 S
175. V5 User Port List Window This window displays the V5 User Port List based on a selection criteria Parameters Buttons Description Radio buttons are used to define the list that will be dis played in the table V5 User Ports List see below m All V5 User Ports The list displays all the V5 User Ports PSTN ISDN BRA currently present in the NE m V5 Interface id If this radio button is selected the list below displays all the V5 User Ports cross connected with the V5 Interface id selected in the option menu Selection Crite ria AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 115 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning p 3 Parameters Buttons Description V5 User Port The information in this field is displayed in a 4 column table List m Physical Drop Displays the physical port id associ ated to the V5 User Port shown in the row Format drop shelf slot port Possible values 1 1 16 1 32 m V5 User Port Address Indicates the V5 User Port ad dress within the V5 Interface Possible values 0 32767 for PSTN User Port Layer 3 Port Address 0 8175 for ISDN BRA User Port Envelope Function Address If the drop is used for leased lines Leased is dis played m V5 User Port Type Displays the type of service pro vided Possible values PSTN ISDN BRA If the drop is used for leased lines Leased is dis played gt NOTE PSTN
176. a LAN but if NIS is used NFS allows operators to log in in any client platform having access to their home directories SUN patches All the Solaris patches described in the shopping list must be installed be fore AEM NB installation AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 2 1 Software Installation and Commissioning General mm ee m LAN amp WAN configuration E g default router to NEs etc must be available How to install SUN Solaris is described in SUN support SUN Solaris Installation Guide Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that m the hardware required to install the R1 3 is prepared m the AEM NB H1 3 consists of a number of server and client applications The software installation may imply the installation of all these applications or only some of them JRE m the AEM NB R1 3 includes as part of its environment the Java Runtime En vironment JRE Release 1 1 7 JRE is included here free of charge for the final user 2 1 1 Introduction System Require This document is intended as a guide for the person s who will be responsible for ments the installation and configuration of the hardware and software required for the AEM NB R1 3 installation The AnyMedia distribution can be divided into two parts server side installation and client side installation Both include specific third party applications needed to run the AnyMedia successfully Disk Space To store the AEM NB R1 3 files your syst
177. a OAM log maximumTotalLogSize 15 Stop OrbixMT 3rd party software when the Gen 3rdParty mgmtOrbixMT true AEM NB goes down Stop OrbixNames 8rd party software when Gen 3rdParty mgmtOrbixNames the AEM NB goes down Stop OrbixTalk 3rd party software when Gen 3rdParty mgmtOrbixTalk true the AEM NB goes down Stop ObjectStore 3rd party software when Gen 3rdParty mgmtObjectStore true the AEM NB goes down B 3 Configuration Parameters This chapter provides information about all the configuration parameters that are used with AEM NB R1 3 as follows m An alphabetical list of all configuration parameters that are used with AEM NB R1 3 m Detailed information about each parameter These configuration parameters are distributed in three configuration files as fol lows m AnyMediaNBEMR1 3 cfg for variables used by the AnyMedia servers m AnyMedia ini and SystemPreferences ini for variables used by the GUI Only the configuration parameters the AnyMedia administrator can modify are ex plained in this chapter modify these configuration variables with caution as they may adversely affect the correct operation of the application To modify the other configuration parameters stored in the configuration files please contact with Lu cent Technologies TCL B 3 1 AnyMedia Server Configuration Pa rameters The following table provide an alphabetical list of the configuration parameters for AnyMedia servers
178. a value between 1024 65534 It is essential that these ports are not used by any process on the SAME SUBNET DOMAIN 4 IP multicast adresses Using OrbixTalk all communications takes place using multicast addresses The range of IP mul ticast addresses used by OrbixTalk is 31 with 255 0 0 0 as the first IP address it is config urable at installation time in the range 255 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 5 The install AMEMRI5 script runs on K shell lt ksh gt environment 6 The time zone MUST be the same for the Any Media Client GUI LUMOS and Network Element This parameter is needed for installing the Any Media Client KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK Do you like to continue y n q 3 Type and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 Client Client side installation gt 2 Server Server side installation gt Enter selection q gt NOTE Type to get help type to repeat the prompt and type q to exit from the installation 4 Type 2 and press Return AEM NB R1 3 2 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation Commissioning Installation Procedure Packages to be installed LuLUMRT LuRWRT LuOX23RT LuOXNS LuOXTKRT LuOSRT LUMOS Build 6 In Processing package instance LuLUMRT from stallation
179. abled only when the Administrative State is Locked and the Configuration State for the pri mary link is Configured and the Configuration State for the secondary link is Not Configured The Remove Secondary button can be used to delete the secondary link It is enabled only when the Administrative State is Locked and the Configuration State for the sec ondary link is Partially Configured or Configured AEM NB R1 3 5 92 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm If you want to then edit the V5 Interface parameters change the parameters in the field V5 Interface an click on Apply to confirm If the administrative state has been changed from Unlocked to Locked a Warning window pops up Changing the administrative state of V5 Interface id may be service affecting Do you want to continue edit a V5 2 User Port click on V5 User Ports The V5 User Port List window pops up cf Figure 5 41 page 5 115 add a V5 2 User Port PSTN click on Add PSTN The V5 PSTN User Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 add a V5 2 User Port ISDN BRA click on Add ISDN The V5 ISDN BRA User Port window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 add a V5 2 Link click on V5 Links The V5 2 Add Re move Link window pop up cf Chapter 5 4 2 2 page 5 96 modify the signalling parameters click on Signalling The
180. access to the domains based on their areas of responsibility and profile m User Inactivity Timer The user terminal will be locked with a screen saver once a configurable in activity timer has expired To unlock the terminal the user has to type his her password The timer has to be configured by the administrator m Lock Screen The user is able to lock the screen whenever he wants To unlock the termi nal the user has to enter his her password Common Servers Common Servers offer general purpose services A common server m manages the AEM NB history and security logs m logsthe history and security data of other processes upon request m provides log information upon request m provides a facility to generate and print client reports in the AEM NB printers m provides event distribution services based on a supplier consumer model 1 3 1 3 Software Platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software Bus CORBA The communication between the AEM NB processes is based on the Common Architecture Object Request Broker Architecture CORBA standard The heart of the CORBA architecture is the Object Request Broker ORB The ORB is a software bus to which different applications can connect to offer their services and or to use other applications services from which they are clients The ORB provides a transport mechanism that makes connected servers loca tion platform and implementation transparent to their clients making applications easier to distri
181. ace menu 3 13 Remote Operations Channel definition 2 Remote Operations Channel protocol profiles A 4 Remote Operations Channel protocol A 4 Repetitive Alarm 6 7 Restart Workspace Manager workspace menu 3 13 Restore database 3 23 Restore command 3 26 Return key 3 6 RogueWave Installation 2 10 Router definition 2 5 Safety Classification XVII ae SCHED EX 6 31 Screen navigation equipment configuration 5 14 Security Management 1 4 Selected Domains 5 19 Server application Definition 3 17 restart 3 18 shut down 3 19 start options 3 17 start up 3 19 Server applications Alarm management 3 18 Configuration management 3 18 Network element management 3 18 System core 3 18 Server applications of AEM 3 18 Server applications start up via a command line 3 20 Shelf Layout 5 3 Shelf protection COMDAC 5 60 Shelf view 5 22 Shuffle Up Down workspace menu 3 13 Software installation 1 20 5 69 download 5 65 upgrade 5 65 Software packages 2 3 Software packages dependences 2 40 Sorting Alarms 6 17 Spin box 3 15 sreen navigation service provisioning 5 80 stand alone mode 1 5 Standby card test scheduling 6 31 Status Bar 5 8 5 11 Status bar Message area 5 11 Progress area 5 11 Stop Cancel button 5 11 Supported Interfaces 5 77 SWVR ILLEGAL 6 49 Synchronization alarm data 6 42 configuration data 6 41 System security 1 27 Sy
182. ad information or as a com munication channel carrying both subscriber and network element signaling information U Upgrade Is a type of migration where the software release is changed from an earlier release to a later release Upload The process of moving information from a client to a server at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Intended applications of this capability are software updates and restoring databases User The operator who will use the EM to provision maintain and monitor the AnyMedia Access System User Identifier UID This is a unique user login identifier This string is required and cannot be null Grouping of UID string values for this command is not allowed The valid UID value is a 3 to 10 case sensitive alohanumeric character string V V5 x interface An ETSI defined interface between a local exchange and an access network element A V5 1 interface consists of one single 2 Mbps E1 link containing communication channels and bearer channels A V5 2 interface consists of up to sixteen 2 Mbps E1 links containing communication channels and bearer channels The term V5 x interface is used for clarification that certain facts a certain description or requirements are relevant for both V5 1 and V5 2 interface W Workload or Load A mix of actions and their frequencies from all possible input points that need processing in some way in the sys tem AEM NB R1 3 GL 12 Versi
183. age Do you want to continue with the removal of this package y n q 4 Type y and press Return Verifying package dependencies Processing package information Executing preremove script Removing data bases TRACE Removing NEM data base TRACE Removing CM data base TRACE Removing ALM data base TRACE Removing SEC data base Removing pathnames in class lt channels_30 gt Removing pathnames in class lt common gt lt files list gt Executing postremove script Updating system information Removal of LuANY15S was successful You have now removed the AnyMedia Servers package 2 2 4 2 Remove AnyMedia Client Package Complete the following procedure to remove the AnyMedia Client package Step Procedure 1 Log in as root 2 Type pkgrm LuANY15S and press Return The following package is currently installed LuANY15C AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Client sparc LuANY15C X Xc AEM NB R1 3 2 44 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 3 4 y Do you want to remove this package and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LuANY15C gt This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of removing this package Do you want to continue with the removal of this package y n q and press Ret
184. age This cut through interface is used by remote AEM NB craft personal when the GUI does not support certain TL1 commands The AEM NB will provide the inde pendence between the cut through interface and the GUI interface To open a cut through interface with an NE the operator must provide the connec tion information Login and Password defined in the NE Name Information win dow cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 17 When the AEM NB receives the request to open a cut through session it opens a telnet connection with the selected NE to avoid conflicts with the current AEM NB GUI session Then the operator will manage the cut through session through the use of TL1 commands Cut through GUI The AEM NB GUI behaviour but not necessarily the performance is not affected independence by any simultaneous cut through connection running on the platform The operator using the AEM NB GUI need not have to know about any cut through session running on the AEM NB platform The performance of the system could be affected by the load of the hardware but the behaviour of the GUI is the same in both cases Procedure Complete the following procedure to start a TL1 session 1 Select All gt NE in Network Browser How to start a TL1 2 Select TL1 gt Cut through via the menu bar to start a TL1 session The session Cut through window pops up AEM NB R1 3 5 74 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configurat
185. ains m create modify delete domains m assign unassign controlled objects to from domains gt NOTE All actions can only be done by the AEM NB administrator AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 1 User Management User 4 2 User 4 2 1 Create User Introduction This chapter describes the process to add a new user to the system Before add ing a new user to the system please pay attention to the following remarks m Ihe AEM NB administrator must have a system login m The user must be created via OS m Ihe AEM NB administrator should know the login ID of the user to be cre ated and the group the user shall belong to Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a new user Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show Figure 4 1 Access 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up showing the Users Table AEM NB R1 3 4 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User 7 ss Ss SSeS ee Default EM Administrator veri 1 Administrator Figure 4 2 Users Table 3 Click New The User Profile window pops up User Profile uM pem Administrator Figure 43 Window User Profile AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 3 User Management User p ll 4 7 4 Enter a new login name
186. aintenance Alarm Management M handle these alarms three fields are defined and maintained for each alarm m First Raised Time m Last Changed Time m Number of Occurrences The alarm viewer can obtain the following information m The Number of Occurrences is the number of times the alarm has been raised between when it was first raised and the current time only the raised alarms are counted In this period the alarm has been raised all the time or it may have been raised cleared several times it is not relevant to distinguish both cases 6 2 6 Manage Alarm Acknowledgment Alarms can only be acknowledged by a user at the user interface It is possible to acknowledge all alarms types If an alarm is acknowledged its state is updated ac cordingly and the user identification and the last changed time are registered Ac knowledging an alarm causes a change to the alarm database Therefore the alarm was logged before in the action log It is possible to acknowledge an alarm that has already been acknowledged The user identification and the new ac knowledge time are registered as well overwriting the previous acknowledge data 6 2 7 Managing the Clearing of Alarms General The NE alarms are cleared by the NE AMS Platform alarms are cleared automat ically e g NE AEM NB association alarms or by a user at the user interface e g log alarms Users can only clear specific platform alarms Users cannot clear
187. all TL1 message parameters in the order they were received for TL1 messages sent from NE and all alarm fields except Description for platform alarms Event Type The event which happened in the AEM NB Log Types and Dis Depending on the chosen log type the table in the Log Viewer displays different in played Information formation more or less columns The following table shows which information is displayed for which log type Table3 24 Log Types Contents Date amp Time Login Conditions Object Method Pa rameters Log Type Actions Date amp Time Object Event Type Parameters Date amp Time Parameters NE ld System Internal Events Autonomous Report Menus and Func The following table provides an overview of the menus of the Log Viewer and their tions functions Table3 25 Menus and Functions Menu Item Function File gt New Start up a new Log Viewer File gt Reload Update the displayed Log Viewer table with newly logged items File gt Print gt Print Table Print out all logged items displayed in the table of the Log Viewer File Print Print Window Print a screenshot of the whole window File gt Print gt Preview Shows how it will be printed if the Print Table option is used Opens directly the Print Preview window File gt Close The selected Log Viewer window is closed Other open Log Viewer windows stay open AEM NB R1 3 3 34 Version 1 00
188. an AnyMedia Access System R1 3 via the AEM NB The USM is a network oriented manual and will be shipped to all sites where an AEM NB is available It provides the provisioning operator s with necessary infor mation to configure or re configure network elements after local installation The philosophy behind the provisioning of network elements within a network is that the network is already installed configured and service has been provided to the network after first installation and that re configuration of the NE is necessary Provisioning takes place from the AEM NB located in one or more central offices AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 About this Document 2 Intended Audience The USM is intended for personnel who take care of deploying NEs by carrying out all provisioning activities of the NEs using the AEM NB Tasks to be performed by the Provisioning personnel are Collect information of provisioning data e g check shelf layout units list m Put ports in service and out service m Assign timeslots Cross Connections m Download and upload the provisioning data to and from the NEs m Testing of assigned ports m Recognize interpret analyze or correct failures caused by provisioning data that is configured incorrectly The personnel should at least have the following education level m Computer knowledge e g windows applications and or SUN applications m Telecommunication Network knowledge AE
189. ance Results of the capacitance 20 to 9000 nF nF measurements Distance to Results of the distance meas 0 5 to 30 km for distance open HERE DIS 20 to 9000 nF for capacitance Click on Close to exit the Line Test Result window To stop the test session via TL1 command proceed as follows Staging parameter Command code blocks AEM NB R1 3 6 28 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management p 0 amp 6 4 2 User Port Test Purpose By means of a port test you are able to run a series of self diagnostic routines for a particular port on a specified AP Procedure Proceed as follows to start a port test and view the test result Step Procedure iF Start the port test You have the following options to do this Procedure via a Via the Network Browser and the menu bar Select the port you intend the test to run for the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 TAP100 gt Drop id Start the test by selecting Test Manager gt User Port Test from the menu bar Procedure via Cur b Via the Network Browser and the cursor menu sor Menu Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 TAP100 gt Drop id Start the test by selecting User Port Test from the cursor menu Procedure via TL1 c Viathe TL1 Command Line Interfac
190. and Set CFG ISDN Possible values for the configurations are POTS or POTS ISDN Mixed The standby system configuration is activated with the switch configuration com mand SW CFG AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 57 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 1 5 3 3 6 Configure Simplex COMDAC Protec tion Scheme Overview The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode or duplex mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Required and the AEM NB is not able to change it until one of the COM DACs is removed When a COMDAC is removed the AEM NB is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled sim plex Procedure Complete the following procedure to set the COMDAC protection to simplex Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt COM500 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar or single click on the plug in COMDAC in Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up COMDAC lee Ne REM TCL NE12 Slot 1 1 Inventory Information Card Type COMDAC Serial Number 980004249845 Apparatus Code COM100 1 1 CLE SLC1CGOCAA ECI 228863 Sw version oroso Program Code Operation amp Protection Slot Requ
191. and The INIT SYS command is used to clear the database and to restore the AnyMedia Access System to default val ues set at factory Inventory The inventory is the summary of data stored on a plug in in the NVDS during manufacturing which is used to iden tify the plug in and its functionality ISDN BRA service Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate Access Service Connects ISDN BRA subscribers to the network via dial up connection mE 7 L Level 1 Applications The minimum set of server applications that have to run together to provide the minimum functionality of the AEM NB These applications must exist before the Level 2 Application can be started If this group is shut down the AEM NB is shut down AEM NB R1 3 GL 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary Level 2 Applications Server applications that can be started up and shut down individually without affecting the functioning of other ap plications Line Test Also called drop test This checks for open circuits short circuits leakages to ground foreign voltages or other faults on the subscriber line that connects an AP port circuit to the CPE The results are used to detect broken or bad quality wires even before the customer realizes a lack of quality LL PLL Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is not responsible for settin
192. and V5 timeslots is dynamically controlled by the V5 2 BCC protocol Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that m ihe NE is connected m the physical drop is provisioned and is not used for any other V5 User Port or leased line subscriber m the V5 Layer 3 Port Address PSTN User Ports is unique within the V5 In terface m the Envelope Function Address ISDN BRA User Ports is unique within the V5 Interface m and the V5 timeslot is configured as bearer channel and is not in use only for V5 1 Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a V5 User Port Step Procedure d Select All gt NE gt V5 User Port List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar The V5 User Port List window pops up This window can also be reached from the V5 x Interface windows cf Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 and Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 by clicking on V5 User Ports AEM NB R1 3 5 114 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning pV User Porttist 00000000 NE Name 14 Selection Criteria C V5 Interface id pE V5 User Ports List Physical Drop V5 User Port V5 User Port Type V5 Interface id drop 1 6 24 3 PSTN 267 drop 1 4 1 55 ISDN BA 111 Add PSTN Add ISDN ue Close x P Figure 5 41
193. anguage code and press Return Code for the representation of names of coun tries Refer to ISO 3166 for more information 1 DK DENMARK 2 DE GERMANY 3 FR FRANCE 4 IT ITALY 5 CN CHINA 6 ES SPAIN 7 GB UNITED KINGDOM 8 US UNITED STATES Enter selection q 79 Type your country code and press Return Code for the representation of names of Time Zones 1 GMT 0 Greenwich Mean Time AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 37 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 2 ECT 1 European Central Time 3 EET 2 Eastern European Time 4 ART 2 Arabic Egypt Standard Time 5 EAT 3 Eastern African Time 6 MET 3 5 Middle East Time 7 NET 4 Near East Time 8 PLT 5 Pakistan Lahore Time 9 IST 5 5 India Standard Time 10 BST 6 Bangladesh Standard Time 21 more menu choices to follow lt RETURN gt for more choices CTRL D to stop display Enter selection q 80 Type the desired time zone and press Return gt NOTE The time zone must be the same for the AnyMedia Client GUI LUMOS Network Element and OS Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs Thi
194. arameters Buttons Description Available Time The scrolling list contains the identification of available time Slots slots for addition to the C channel list The list contains only those time slots that are currently B channel Candidate time slots are limited to timeslots 15 16 and 31 of each linked feeder A single row of this list can be selected E1 Feeder This column indicates the physical feeder a time slot belongs to V5 Link id This column contains the V5 Link id of the physi cal feeder Time Slot This column shows the number of the time slots within this feeder Apply This button is enabled when a time slot is selected AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a time slot Step Procedure 1 Select a row in the Available Time Slots list 2 Click on Apply The time slot will be modified to become a C channel 3 Click on Close to exit the window 5 4 6 2 Add Communication Channel This modal window is used to create a CC while creating a CC it can be cross connected to a time slot optional It can be reached only via Add CC from the V5 Signalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 AddCommunication Chamel NE Name 14 V5 Interface Id 111 Comm Channelld 74 Available Time Slots E1 Feeder V5 Link Id Timeslot e1 1 3 2 8 15 1 1 3 2 8 31 A
195. ard compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in There is a one to one correspond ence between CLEI and ECI codes SW Version Obtained from the NE at connection time In ternally the AEM NB will have to verify whether the men tioned SW Version is manageable by the system Program Code Code of the SW currently stored in the plug in Operation amp This field is described in Chapter 5 3 3 6 page 5 58 Protection Ongoing Tasks These check boxes indicate operations in progress which can take a long time and must be known by the opera tor They will be refreshed when the window is launched or when refreshing the whole window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 33 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 5 3 2 1 4 Configure CIU CIU Communication Interface Unit plug in provides access for circuit and drop testing and craft access functions Procedure Complete the following procedure to view the CIU data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt DTP500 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar or single click on the plu
196. arms are sorted according to the selected alarm field in ascending or descending order 2 Check if the list was sorted as desired Yes O K No Continue with step 3 3 Click again on the header to sort the list in the reverse order The sort can be in ascending or descending order each time the user clicks on the same header again the list is sorted the other way AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 17 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring p 0 6 6 3 4 System Management Functions The general system management functions comprise the functions for file man agement for defining view options and for getting help These functions are con tained in the following menus m File m Views m Filters m Help 6 3 4 1 File In the file menu you can start the following actions m New Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer m Reload Display a fresh copy of the current information shown in the window Print cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 21 m Close Close the active window but without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Same functionality as the Close button m Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user 6 3 4 2 Views Summary For displaying alarm lists you can select from four pre defined views m View1 Index Alarm Type Host Object Id Severity Status Date amp Time Last Change m View2 Index Alarm Type Host Object Id Status Date amp Time First_Raise
197. art the test by selecting Test Manager gt User Line Test from the menu bar b Viathe Network Browser and the cursor menu Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 Drop id Start the test by selecting Line Test from the cursor menu c Viathe TL1 Command Line Interface This option does not open the Line Test Result window cf step 2 Enter the following TL1 command to start the line test Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 25 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management eee eae The single measurements has to be started separately For voltage measurement Staging parameter Command code blocks For resistance measurement Staging parameter Command code blocks For capacitance measurement Staging parameter Command code blocks For distance measurement Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block 2 Wait until the Line Test Result window cf Figure 6 9 page 6 27 appears and view the test result gt NOTE After confirming the user line test execution a Progress window pops up showing the following message User Line Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Card Type Port id Clicking on the Cancel button will stop the test and the result window see below will not
198. arted AEM NB R1 3 5 38 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 5 3 2 1 6 Configure an Application Pack The APs Application Packs provide the line side interface functionality that pro vide service to end users Background AnyMedia Access System R1 3 uses a provisioning model to provide service i e the AP must be pre provisioned by defining its function and setting the re quired options For example a POTS AP has to be pre provisioned first to create a POTS or ALL service for a subscriber Should the physical inventory change i e if an AP is plugged or removed any changes in the inventory database will be no tified automatically to the AnyMedia Access System AP provisioning will be performed to establish a desired POTS plug in type in a desired slot xx To be fully functional operational an AP must both be inserted and provisioned In addition the provisioned AP must match the actual type of the inserted plug in An AP can be provisioned and configured by the AEM NB even if the slot is still empty Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the AP data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 1 00 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning Edit via the menu bar or single click on the AP in Shelf Vi
199. ate after a waiting period of 1 minute Comment When NE state is CONNECTED and the TCP IP connec tion is lost or closed the NE state is moved to TRYING and the loop process to re establish the connection with the NE is started by the AEM NB Is the state CONNECTED Yes O K No Continue with step 2 2 Check for Data Communication Network DCN being in service Is the DCN in service Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Put the DCN into service AEM NB R1 3 6 48 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms mm 6 6 4 5 SWVR_ILLEGAL Meaning The Software Version currently stored in the NE is not supported by the AEM NB Abbreviation SWVR_ILLEGAL Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the NE Possible Cause s The Software Version currently stored in the NE is not supported by the AEM NB Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check that the correct version of software is installed on the NE s System Controller Card COMDAC 6 6 4 6 TCP IP_CON_REFUSED Meaning The TCP IP connection establishment could not be completed successfully for port numbers 11002 11004 11006 and 11008 Abbreviation TCP IP_CON_REFUSED Severity Critical Service affecting No Effects It is not possible to manage the NE Possible Cause s Some TCP IP protocol errors stopped the connection establishment process be
200. ault is detected on the m Flashes when the AP executes off line shelf tests IO HDLC FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the plug in m Flashes when the plug in executes off line shelf test ACT green Lit when the plug in is service active See Chapter 6 2 page 6 1 for more details about alarm handling For cards which need to be provisioned APs and IO HDLOs it is necessary to represent the slot state since the provisioned data may be different to the inserted card There are two possible views of this window m Inserted view apparatus codes of inserted cards are shown m Provisioned view apparatus code of the provisioned cards is shown The user can switch between the two views via a check box located in the toolbar of this window AEM NB R1 3 5 24 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration The following table describes the representation of the different slot states Description and Repre Inserted View Provisioned View Slot State sentation Plug in Plug in Label provisioned in The type of the provisioned grey black serted and match card is the same as the type of the inserted card provisioned in The type of the provisioned gray dark grey serted and mis card is different from the match type of the inserted card provisioned and not The operator has provi black white inserted sioned this slot associating it to a type of card
201. bel relative to digital reference point Possible values 12 3 Step 0 5 Current Feeding Limit This option menu can be used to select a desired Current Feeding Limit Possible Values High Feeding Current Low Feeding Cur rent Balance Network This option menu can be used to select a desired Balance Network BN Possible values BN1 BN2 BN3 BN4 BN5 Periodic Pulse Metering This option menu can be used to request the periodic pulse metering Possible values Yes No Administrative State This option menu can be used to de fine the V5 PSTN User Port administrative state Possible values Locked Unlocked Shutdown default value is Locked at creation time AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 121 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons V5 PSTN User Port Cross Con nection Description V5 Interface id This field displays the V5 Interface id this user port is cross connected Possible values None 0 16777215 When coming from V5 Interface window via Add PSTN this field is non editable If the V5 PSTN User Port is cross connected to a V5 Inter face this field is editable allowing to change it only to None value for deleting the cross connection In all the other cases an option menu with all V5 Interface ids is offered for selection V5 Timeslot id This field displays the V5 timeslot id cross connected to the V5 PSTN User P
202. between configuration changes in the NE and AEM NB database e g LED status reports switch reports For an NE the user can disable the sending of autono mous reports reports can be inhibited enabled separately or collectively But to maintain consistency between the NE configuration data and the AEM NB data base these configuration reports have to be enabled Synchronization The following figure illustrates the NE state model depending on the synchroniza States Diagram tion state between the data kept in the NE and the AEM NB database AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 41 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Management and Maintenance Out of sync Detection Sync Process Success amp Message Buffer Overflow Detection Conf Reports Enabled Conf Reports Inhibition Detection Sync Process Fail Sync Process Fail Sync Process Success amp Conf Reports Disabled Sync Process Success amp Conf Reports Enabled Figure 6 13 NE Configuration Data Synchronization States SYNC ASYNC There are the following two NE configuration data synchronization states m SYNC The AEM NB database is consistent with the locally stored NE information and all the autonomous messages concerning configuration changes are enabled configuration reports database changes LED status reports switch reports and some events of the type protection switching and inhibit messages m ASYNC The AEM NB database and the
203. but no card is inserted in the slot not provisioned and No card type is pre provi dark grey gray inserted sioned in the slot but a card is inserted not provisioned and No card type is provisioned black not inserted and no card is inserted in the slot gt NOTE Plug in refers to the slot faceplate Label refers to the apparatus code gt NOTE The NE does not send the match indication for a provisioned broadband AP The shelf view therefore indicates provisioned inserted and mismatch until a re sync is done AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 25 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 6 5 3 2 1 Configuration of the Plug ins 5 3 2 1 1 Configure an IO_E1 The IO_E1 plug in provides four physical E1 interfaces to accommodate teleph ony via standard V5 network interfaces Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the IO_E1 data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt FAC500 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar or single click on the plug in IO_E1 in Shelf View window The O E1 window pops up Figure 5 7 Window This window be displayed even when the plug in is not inserted AEM NB 1 3 5 26 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipmen
204. bute and scale Protocol The protocol used by the ORB is the Internet Interoperability Protocol IIOP 1 3 1 3 2 Repository Introduction The Repository contains all the AEM NB information that must be persistent It is supported by an Object Oriented Database ObjectStore and the underlying op erating file system All components of the system have direct access to the repos itory to store retrieve their own data Contained Information in the repository includes Information 1 provided by the SUN Solaris operation system AEM NB R1 3 1 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description System and Software Architecture ee m NE inventory for each NE the hardware identifiers and the software versions m Equipment and Service provisioning data m History and security logs m External system communication parameters m configuration data m Alarms cache 1 3 1 4 Graphical User Interface GUI Introduction The Java based GUI is responsible for putting up forms collecting user input commands and data and routing it on to the correct component It also receives data from the relevant process which it uses to update its display The GUI has di rect access to the services provided by the AEM NB through the ORB Functionality The GUI provides the following functionality features Features m Support TL1 messages Supports all TL1 messages for all NE products for dumb terminal access Allow
205. cedure to view edit the COMDAC data Step Procedure T Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt 500 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning Edit via the menu bar or single click on the plug in COMDAC in Shelf View window The COMDAC window pops up Figure 5 9 COMDAC Window This window contains all the information related to the COMDAC It can be dis played even when the plug in is not inserted AEM NB R1 3 5 32 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 3 The following table shows the view edit options of the COMDAC window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the COMDAC is plugged in Slot format comdac 1 1 2 Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no plug in is inserted mation Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value COMDAC Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value COM100 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among plug ins to specify forward backw
206. cept for V5 1 Interfaces that already have a link cross connected None None is used for removing the cross connection between the V5 Link and the interface Service Degra Near End This slider can be used to define the threshold dation value for the near end bit error ratio detection on the related E1 feeder Possible values 7 4 step 1 Far End This slider can be used to define the threshold value for the far end bit error ratio detection on the related E1 feeder Possible values 7 4 step 1 AEM NB R1 3 5 106 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Description Communica The information in this table is only available if there is a V5 tion Channels Interface cross connected The first column contains the timeslot id the second the channel type the third the com munication channel id if a communication channel is cross connected There are three rows one for timeslot 16 one for timeslot 31 and one for timeslot 15 in that order The values in this field cannot be edited here but only via the V5 Signalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 Timeslot Displays a timeslot of 64 kbit s within the 2 048 Mbit s V5 Link Possible values 16 31 15 These are fixed values are ordered at this way because of the assignment order in V5 Channel Type Possible values B C Bearer channels B are used to transp
207. ch the row for that TS contains no longer the CC and the CC is moved to a row without TS gt NOTE This button is disabled if the selected CC belongs to a protection group Remove CP CC This button is only enabled when a row is selected that contains both CP and CC The operation de letes the cross connection after which the row for that CC no longer contains the CP and the CP is moved to a row without CC gt NOTE This window displays all CPs CCs and TSs also those used for the pri mary and secondary link The available operations in the next windows cannot fully reconstruct a full signalling from scratch only the ISDN BRA and PSTN signalling is intended to be managed from this window The pri mary and secondary feeder configuration are managed from the primary and secondary feeder subpanes in the V5 2 Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 135 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 5 4 6 1 5 136 Version 1 00 Add Time Slot This modal window is used to allocate a time slot linked to the V5 Interface to the set of CC time slots It can be reached only via Add TS from the V5 Signalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 Add Time Slot NE Name TCL NE13 V5 Interface Id 111 Available Time Slots E1 Feeder V5 Link Id Timeslot Apply Close Figure 5 48 Add Time Slot Window P
208. cial for the understanding of the backup schedules is understanding the backup level The backup level is a number which is assigned by you to every backup you make Each time you make a new backup only those files are put on the back up media which were altered since the last backup with a lower backup level A backup level 0 means a full backup 3 6 4 1 Daily Cumulative Weekly Cumulative Backups This is the most commonly used backup schedule It is recommended for most sit uations Schedule Charac This schedule has the following characteristics teristics m Each weekday backup accumulates all files changed since the end of the previous week or the initial level 0 backup m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed since the first level 0 backup For the level 9 backups the previous level 0 or level 5 is the closest backup at a lower level m Each Friday s backup contains all files changed during the month to that point AEM NB R1 3 3 28 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Backup and Restore Example The following table shows the backup levels for each days backup Once a month a backup with backup level 0 must be performed Table 3 15 Backup Levels of Each Backup variable Mon Tue Fri istof month O 1st week 9 9 5 2nd week 9 9 5 3rd week 9 9 5 4th week 9 9 5 The following table shows how files accumulate in the backup for each weekday Table3 16 Example for Files
209. ciation be tween CPs and logical communication channels CC have to be provisioned The association of CCs with physical communication timeslots TS is initially provi sioned configured but can be changed within V5 2 Interfaces by the V5 2 protec tion protocol and Timeslots For more information refer to the NE documentation for R1 3 Screen Navigation Figure 5 29 page 5 81 shows an overview of the screen navigation for service provisioning The arrows represent the order in which the windows can be opened Example To edit the V5 7 Interface window m select All gt NE gt V5 Interfaces List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and select Edit via the cursor menu AEM NB R1 3 5 80 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning from AP window Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 V5 User Ports ist V5 User Port List 4 User Port PSTN User Port ISDN from O E1 window Equipment Configuration cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 26 V5 Interface V5 Interface E1 Feeders List List Y V5 Interface List E1 Feeders List Create V5 Interface Edit V5 1 Interface Edit V5 2 Interface Cross Connection E1 Feeder v V5 ISDN UP Signalling Configuration CO Object Network Browser v V5 Signaling V5 Link Add Remove V5 2 Link Set Primary Link
210. ck on Remove The AEM NB will send a de lete message to the NE AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 159 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm AEM NB R1 3 5 160 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Contents 6 1 Overview 6 2 Alarm Management 6 2 1 Overview 6 2 2 Maintain Up To Date Alarm Information 6 2 3 Alarm Notification to the User 6 2 4 Provide Access to the Current Alarm Data 6 2 5 Managing the Raising of Alarms 6 2 6 Manage Alarm Acknowledgment 6 2 7 Managing the Clearing of Alarms 6 2 8 Alarm Data Synchronization 6 2 9 AEM NB Alarm Log Handling 6 2 10 Periodical Deletion of Cleared Alarms 6 3 Alarm Monitoring 6 3 1 General 6 3 2 Starting and Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 3 2 1 Starting the Alarm Viewer 6 3 2 2 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 3 3 Performing Alarm Viewer Functions 6 3 3 1 Menu Bar 6 3 3 2 Toolbar 6 3 3 3 General Information Section 6 3 3 4 Alarm Table 6 3 3 4 1 Alarm Parameters 6 3 3 4 2 Sorting Alarms 6 3 4 System Management Functions 6 3 4 1 File 6 3 4 2 Views AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 um N Co D N N D co Co D D N D D C1 N D Version 1 00 08 99 6
211. cking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 3 2 page 4 11 4 3 2 Modify Domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information of a domain e g which devices it includes etc Before modifying the information of a domain the AEM NB administrator must have a system login Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information of a domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show aj oj j aj e Figure 4 13 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up ser administration O File view Help Figure 4 14 Menu Bar of Window User Administration AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 11 User Management Domains pm ne 3 Select View gt Domains The Domains Table appears Year2000 Year 2000 test Figure 4 15 Domains Table R1 3 4 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Domains 4 Select one domain in the Domain Name field and click Open The Domain Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected domain Domain profile 101 Domain Name vear200d Description Year 2000 test Cont
212. classified as one of the following tion m Platform Alarm Alarm related to the AEM NB application or its hardware software platform Generated raised by any object of the AEM NB when it detects an abnor mal condition to be reported to the user Information provided Object Identifier Alarm Type Identifier Severity Service Affecting Occurrence Time m NE AM Alarms Generated raised by the NE AM Refer to Chapter 6 2 5 page 6 7 to see how the information comes from the NE AM to the AEM NB The NE AM alarms are classified in two groups Normal Alarms Data provided Access Identifier Condition Type Notification Code Service Affect ing Access Identifier Type Occurrence Date Occurrence Time Environment Alarms Data provided Access Identifier Alarm Type Notification Code Occurrence Date Occurrence Time For all alarm types several alarm data fields are conceptually the same although they convey different values For instance both Condition Type and Alarm Type refer to the type of alarm being raised cleared Battery on discharge Loss of frame AEM NB R1 3 6 44 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms The following table maps all the equivalent fields to general names that uniquely identify a concept independently of the alarm type Table 6 16 General Alarm Fields General Name Platform Alarm NE Alarm NE Environment Ala
213. contains a trademark AnyMedia Access System A trademark is not treated as an acronym it is not spelled out or expanded Lucent Technologies trademarks are identified with the registered mark 8 or trademark symbol the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter The trademarks of other companies are identified with a footnote reference the first time the trademarks are used in a chapter AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 About this Document Typographical con The following table gives examples of the typographical conventions used in this ventions chapter Table 0 5 Typographical Conventions Object Example Meaning Keyboard ReturnorA Return or A key on the keyboard Shift Ctrl B Shift Ctrl key pressed simultaneously Esc A and B key pressed one after the other Pushbutton Apply Apply pushbutton in a window Menu File gt Exit Menu option Exitin File menu Objects Date Designates the object Date in a window e g windows text field check box spin box etc 6 General Safety Information This section lists the safety information needed for the AnyMedia Access System for system turn up after installation has been completed operating provisioning and maintaining the system 6 1 General Notes on Safety This system has been developed in line with the present state of the art and fulfils the current national and international safety requirements It is provided with a high deg
214. correct User Identification user login Password and NE target identifier TID 2 Check with the GSI that the four VC in the NE are not busy RTRV STATUS TL1 command AEM NB R1 3 6 50 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Contents Overview A 1 2 DCN Introduction Ad Terms Used in this Chapter 2 A 4 Network Element Communication Capabilities A 2 5 AEM NB Communication Capabilities A 5 A 6 Recommended DCN Configurations 5 6 1 ROC Over Permanent Leased Lines DCN A 6 1 1 Router Configuration A 6 A 6 1 2 AnyMedia Network Element Configuration 7 6 1 3 Element Manager Server Configuration A 8 A 6 1 4 Element Manager Client Configuration A 8 A 6 1 5 Transport Elements Configuration A 9 A 6 1 6 Connection Diagram A 9 A 6 2 Communication with Remote NEs Using Inband ATM PVC A 10 A 6 2 1 Configuration of the router A 11 A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Network Element A 12 A 6 2 2 1 Configuration of COMDAC A 12 A 6 2 2 2 Configuration of AFM A 12 A 6 2 3 Element Manager Server Configuration A 12 A 6 2 4 Element Manager Client Configuration A 12 A 6 2 5 Transport Elements Configuration A 12 A 6 2 6 Connection Diagram A 13 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 7 Contents AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Overview This appe
215. cron y n q 46 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y refer to steps 40 44 Clean up tasks for the AnyMediaNB EM system will be executed every day at 4 00 AM Do you like change it y n q 47 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y refer to steps 40 44 Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure gt NOTE If the transaction log was installed inside the AnyMedia tree default there is an attribute conflict and the following question is displayed The following files are already installed on the system and are being used by another pack age opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM R1 3 attribute change only gt conflict with a file which does not belong to any package Do you want to install these conflicting files y n q 48 Type y and press Return Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue
216. ct All gt NE V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 Interface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 2 Interface window pops up 2 Click on Remove Primary in the Primary Link field to remove the pri mary link After removing the primary link all automatically created entities are auto matically removed m cross connection between V5 protection group 1 and V5 communi cation channel m cross connection between V5 communication channel basic and V5 primary link s timeslot 16 m cross connection between V5 communication path control and V5 communication channel AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 157 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm m V5 communication path control if it is provisioned m cross connection between V5 communication path link control and V5 communication channel m V5 communication path link control if it is provisioned m cross connection between V5 communication path and V5 communication channel m V5communication path BCC if it is provisioned m cross connection between V5 communication path and V5 commu nication channel basic m cross connection between V5 protection group 1 and a V5 Link s timeslot m V5 protection group 1 if it is prov
217. d Acknowledge Alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms Selection of filter criteria for displaying alarm information Alarms for the last 24 hours Chapter 6 3 4 3 Critical Raised Alarms page 6 19 Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s Critical Alarms not cleared Owned Acknowledge Alarms Clear Alarms All Acknowledge Alarms None Filter All Alarms Table 6 7 Actions Menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in Acknowledge Acknowledge all selected alarms their status Chapter 6 3 5 Acknowledge Clear will change to acknowledged page 6 21 Reload A Clear Clear all selected alarms their status will change to cleared Reload Display a fresh copy of the current information shown in the window Only alarms which match the filter criteria will be included Table 6 8 Options Menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in Automatic Reload If this option is checked the Alarm Vieweris Chapter 6 3 5 utomatic Reload E automatically updated every minute If itis not page 6 21 checked the update has to be manually done via File gt Reload AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 13 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Table 6 9 Help Menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in Index Display the index help allowing the user to Chapter 6 3 4 4 On Window navigate through the
218. d service personnel must be carried out and documented m or changes to the system or parts of the system in cluding the software must be carried out by qualified Lucent Tech nologies personnel or by expert personnel authorized by Lucent Technologies All changes carried out by other persons lead to a complete exemption from liability No components spare parts must be used other than those recommended by the manufacturer and those listed in the procurement documents m The unit system must not be operated unless it is in perfect working order Any faults and errors that might affect safety must be reported immediately by the user to a person in responsibility m Theequipment must be supplied with Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV of 48 V and the positive terminal of this source must be cor rectly connected to the protective earth Never connect to 60 V m The unit system must be operated only with the connections and un der the environmental conditions as described in the documentation m The removal or disabling of safety facilities the clearing of faults and errors and the maintenance of the equipment must be carried out by specially qualified personnel only The respective parts of the documentation must be strictly observed The documentation must also be consulted during the selection of measur ing and test equipment m Transport storage and operation of the unit system must be under t
219. ded to communicate to other OSs It allows external OSs access to the NEs managed by the AEM NB directly through TL1 commands via a Northbound Interface This access is controlled by the Northbound Interface until the OS is disconnected TL1 Northbound The TL1 Northbound Interface allows an external OS access to the NEs managed Interface by the AEM NB directly through TL1 commands for provisioning testing and alarm purposes 1 3 1 6 Southbound Interface Tasks The Southbound Interface performs all the tasks needed to communicate to the NEs managed by the AEM NB It provides distributed CORBA access which in cludes implementation and translation of TL1 commands response and autono mous messages into equivalent CORBA requests and events TL1 Southbound The TL1 Southbound Adaptors isolate the main AEM NB functionality from the Adaptors specific protocols used by the NEs They are responsible for translating actions and state changes conveyed through CORBA messages from into the NE specific message formats Functionality The Southbound Interface provides the following functionality features Features m Southbound TCP IP TL1 Client Application Support for the TL1 client application on the southbound TCP IP interfaces TL1 is used for most of the OAM amp P functions see Chapter 1 3 1 2 page 1 12 m Southbound TCP IP FTP Client Applications Support for the FTP client application on the southbound TCP IP inter faces FTP is required
220. e Command This option does not open the Port Test Result window cf step 2 Enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 TST CCT tid ATD ctag Staging parameter Command code blocks This command starts an AP self test for the specified drop For this test no test line and active test session is needed Nevertheless if a test session is active only the drop circuit of the test session can be tested if the test session mode is set to Manual or Integrated If the drop is not accessible by the system the test is denied The served service if any of the drop must allow a disruption of the service during the circuit test If needed and if possible the service will be blocked in cooperation with the connected exchange by this command If the circuit of a test AP is tested by this command the test AP performs a self test and a calibration AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 29 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management 2 Wait until the Port Test Result window cf Figure 6 10 page 6 30 ap pears and view the test result gt NOTE After confirming the user port test execution a n Progress window pops up showing the following message Port Test execution in progress on NE Name Slot Card Type Port id Clicking on the Cancel button will stop the test and the result window see below will not appear Test Result The Port Test
221. e 5 137 Edit CC This button provides access to the Edit Communi cation Channel window modal cf Chapter 5 4 6 3 It is only enabled when a row in the table is selected that con tains only a TS This button is only applicable for V5 2 Add CP This button provides access to the Add Communi cation Path window cf Chapter 5 4 6 4 page 5 140 Add CC TS This button provides access to the Crosscon nect Communication Channel with Time Slot window cf Chapter 5 4 6 5 page 5 142 Add CP CC This button provides access to the Crosscon nect Communication Path with Communication Channel win dow cf Chapter 5 4 6 6 page 5 144 Remove This button is only enabled when a row in the table is selected that contains only a TS only a CC or only a CP The Operation deletes the concerned TS CC or CP gt NOTE This button is disabled if the selected TS belongs to a protection group gt NOTE ISDN CPs can only be deleted if there are no user ports linked to them These must be deleted from the user port windows A TS is never really removed but marked as B channel C channel gt B channel AEM NB R1 3 5 134 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Command But tons Description Remove CC TS This button is only enabled when a row is selected that contains both CC and TS The operation de letes the cross connection after whi
222. e Provisioning mm 5 4 6 5 Cross Connect Communication Chan nel with Time Slot This modal window is used to create a CC to time slot cross connection It can be reached only via Add CC TS from the V5 Signalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 NE Name TCL NE14 V5 Interface Id 111 Comm Channelld 81 Available Time Slots E1 Feeder V5 Link Id Timeslot Apply Close S Xx Figure 5 52 Communication Channel with Time Slot Window Parameters Buttons Description Comm Chan This option menu contains the list of all CCs that are not yet nel id cross connected to a timeslot Available Time E1 Feeder Displays the physical feeder a timeslot belongs Slots to V5 Link id Displays the V5 Link id associated to the feeder shown in the previous field Timeslot Displays the CC timeslots that are not in the pro tection mode and have no CC linked yet Possible values None 15 16 31 Apply This button is used to cross connect the CC to the timeslot if there is no other timeslot of the same type linked to that CC This button is enabled only when both previous data have been specified AEM NB R1 3 5 142 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a cross connection between communi cation channel and time slot Step Procedure 1 Use the
223. e Table 3 1 in the system prefer ences file SANYMEDIAPATH GUI cfg SystemPreferences ini is set to true If the variable is set to false it reports no alarms of this alarm severity Table 3 1 Variables for Customizing Visual Alarm Notifications Alarm Severity Variable Name Critical VISUAL_CRITICAL_ALARM_SEV Major VISUAL_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV Minor VISUAL_MINOR_ALARM_SEV Info VISUAL_INFO_ALARM_SEV Audible Alarm No If an alarm of a certain alarm severity default critical is received an audible sig tification nal is issued The audible signal is generated only for alarms with an alarm sever ity for which the corresponding variable see Table 3 2 in the system preferences file is set to true If itis set to false no audible signal is generated for alarms of this alarm severity Alarms are audible on the server only Table 3 2 Variables for Customizing Audible Alarm Notifications Alarm Severity Variable Name Critical AUDI CRITICAL ALARM SEV Major AUDI MAJOR ALARM SEV Minor AUDI MINOR ALARM SEV Info AUDI INFO ALARM SEV Make Changes Changes in the system preferences file take effect only after the next start up of Take Effect the AEM NB GUI clients 3 2 3 2 Help Icon Description The Help icon provides access to the AEM NB online help If you click on the Help icon the help index is displayed 3 2 4 Capacity The AEM NB allows for a maximum of m 5 simultaneous users m 100 NEs to be managed AEM
224. e Tasks Tasks Assigned field and click Remove For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 19 gt NOTE If the task View is removed also the tasks Acknowledge and Clear are not possible but not removed gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all tasks and this access permissions cannot be modified Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply 4 4 3 Delete User Groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a user group from the AEM NB Be fore removing a user group please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login m The administrator user group is protected against deletions m After a user group deletion all related information is removed from the AEM NB This does not include the contained users or their information but these users will lose the ability to invoke the applications tasks devices and maps for which the user group had permission AEM NB R1 3 4 26 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User Groups mm Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show Figure 4 30 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon
225. e V5 Link Bearer Channel Connection Communication ISDN Ds Path Ds E Communication B ae nme Path f Allocation Allocation nisu Communication Rn B Bearer Channel Ds Data Signalling f Frame Data Packet Data Figure 5 44 Functional Model of ISDN BRA User Port Configuration Procedure Complete the following procedure to configure a V5 ISDN BRA User Port Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPU112 gt Drop id ISDN in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar The V5 ISDN BHRA User Port window pops up This window can also be reached from the AP windows cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 6 page 5 39 from V5 x Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 and Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 from V5 User Port List window cf Figure 5 41 page 5 115 AEM NB R1 3 5 124 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning VS ISDN BA User Port BE NE Name TCL NE14 V5 Isdn User Port Information Physical Drop drop 1 4 1 VS User Port Address V5 ISDN User Port Service Configuration Access Digital Section Grading Enabled Administrative State Locked Loopback State Clear Loopback Selection Set Local Request VS Isdn User Port Cross Connection V5 Interface id None B1 channel V
226. e card test scheduling Step Procedure 1 To schedule standby card test enter the following command by ing the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block The SCHED EX Schedule Exercise command instructs the system to set up an exercise schedule exercise interval and start time of the day of exercise to per form a COMDAC side switch or off line diagnostics for the standby COMDAC AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 31 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management p 0 MwMk Parameters the The parameters in the common block have the following meaning Common Block Table 6 13 Common Block Parameters for SCHED EX Parameter Meaning Format Possible Values INVL Periodicity The number x DAY 1 365 Interval of days between two standby card tests STM The time of the day hh mm hh 0 23 hour of day Start Time when standby card tests mm 0 59 minute of hour shall be performed Please refer to the AMAS R1 3 network elements documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format re strictions error conditions etc Result Depending on the standby card test result the following behaviour can be ob served m If the test is successful the side switch will be performed m If the test fails then no side switch will be perfor
227. e failure causing the protection switch has been repaired Non revertive switching does not return the entities to their original configuration With non revertive switching the repaired unit becomes the new standby unit The AnyMedia Access System R1 3 supports the following protection features m COMDAC plug in 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf following sec tion m packs 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf Chapter 5 3 3 7 2 page 5 63 m Synchronization reference source 1 1 protection non revertive switch cf Chapter 5 3 3 3 page 5 52 Definitions The different kinds of switching COMDACs and IO HDLC circuit packs are de fined as follows m Side Switching refers to the operation of deactivating the active core en tity and activating the standby core entity m Manual normal Switch refers to an AEM NB initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit is in serv ice and there are no known faults m Forced Switch refers to an AEM NB initiated switch command that in structs the NE to perform a switch no matter what the conditions of the pro tection unit m Inhibit Switch refers to an AEM NB initiated switch command that in structs the NE to inhibit a side switch no matter what the conditions of the active unit 5 3 3 71 COMDAC Protection Switching Overview The COMDAC is the core plug in of the AnyMedia Access System The NE sup port
228. e following procedure to create a V5 Interface Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit or Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar The V5 Interfaces List window pops up vs interfaces tist i NET TCL NE13 V5 Interfaces List V5 Interface id 21 111 124 250 256 Create V5 Interface x Figure 5 30 V5 Interface List Window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 83 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Description V5 Interface Id The list displays all available V5 Interface ids Upon selection of any entry the Edit V5 Interface button becomes available Edit V5 Inter This button provides access to the V5 Interface window face V5 1 or V5 2 version dependent on protocol version to edit the data of an already defined V5 Interface Remove This button can be used to remove the selected V5 Inter face s Removing is only possible if the selected V5 Inter face has no V5 Links and V5 User Ports linked and no con tained communication channels nor communication paths Create V5 Inter This button provides access to the V5 Interface Create win face dow If you want to then edit a V5 Interface select an appropriate entry
229. e product or in the product environment is definite or likely IMPORTANT Material damage to the product or in the product environment is possible NOTICE A fault i e considerable impairment to operation will be caused or may be caused AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 XVII About this Document 7 Related Documentation Document list The following is related documentation for the AEM NB and for additional compo nents Table 1 List of Documents CIC Ordering Component Manual Type Comcode Number AnyMedia Access System Applications Planning and 108 298 670 363 211 1102 Ordering Guide APOG AnyMedia Access System Command and Message Manual 108 298 761 363 211 1112 CMM AnyMedia Access System User Service Manual USM 108 298 811 363 211 1122 Vol 1 Narrowband Services AnyMedia Access System User Service Manual USM 108 543 380 363 211 1152 Vol 2 Broadband Services AnyMedia Access System Installation Manual IM 108 298 779 363 211 1134 For Rack Configurations Mass Provisioning Tool for User Manual V5 Services AEM NB R1 3 Functional Description a For the ordering address see Chapter 8 How to Order This Document 363 211 116 363 211 4114 b The MPT User Manual is included in the Mass Provisioning Tool delivery Additionally it is available in PDF format on CD ROM 7 1 Print Copy Hard Copy Document All listed documents are available in print packaging and format XVIII Version 1 00 08 99
230. e provided when changes occur to the NE inventory database as a result of changes in the physical inventory i e an AP is plugged or removed the AnyMedia Access System R1 3 uses a provisioning model to provide service which means that the circuit must be prepared to pro vide service by defining its function and setting any required options For example for creation of a POTS or ALL service for a subscriber line at first a POTS AP has to be provisioned For Integrated Service Digital Network ISDN services an lO HDLC plug in has to be provisioned AP provisioning will be performed to establish a desired POTS plug in type in a desired slot xx e g enter ap lt 2100 gt Even when to be fully functional an AP must be not only inserted but also provisioned and the provisioned card type must fit the actual type of the inserted plug in this process does not require any predefined order that is a card can be provisioned and configured by the AEM NB even when the slot is still empty The description of equipment configuration is divided in three main sections m Add NE cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 17 m Edit view configuration data cf Chapter 5 3 3 page 5 45 m Delete NE cf Chapter 5 3 8 page 5 75 Figure 5 3 shows an overview of the screen navigation for equipment configura tion In this figure is assumed that the NE is already connected cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 17 The boxes with a gray background show the Network Browse
231. e updated with the NEs configuration data The data from the NE non volatile data storage NVDS are used 6 5 5 Association Maintenance Association NE Monitoring Default Values for Monitoring 363 211 412 An association between the AEM NB and an NE is established if the TCP IP con nection and the TL1 communication session are opened The NE state changes into CONNECTED The AEM NB monitors the association state of the NE by periodically sending messages RTRV HDR to the NE If the AEM NB does not receive a response to certain number of messages within a certain time it assumes that the TL1 con nection to the NE is lost and closes the TCP IP connection to the NE By default these messages are sent by the AEM NB every five minutes The re sponse to a message must be received within four minutes and not more than two responses may be lost otherwise the TCP IP connection is closed by the AEM NB These values can be configured by the user via the system variables NEM asso ciation heartBeatNumber and NEM association heartBeatTime in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaNBEM cfg AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 6 43 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms 6 6 Alarms 6 6 1 Overview An alarm is reported for any condition that needs user attention since it may im pact the normal operations of any system under user responsibility e g AEM NB NE 6 6 2 Alarm Types Alarm Classifica Detected alarms are
232. ed Autonomous Message None 3 1 2 Output Format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time AC atag REPT ALM AIDTYPE AID NTFCNCDE CONDTYPE SRVEFF OCRDAT OCRTM CONDDESCR 3 1 3 Output Format Parameters AID Access Identifier This parameter appears in the Access ID Block Type Access ID Required Yes AID is the address of the equipment or facility for which an alarm is being re ported Expert English ap 1 1 16 Application Pack ciu 1 Communication interface unit comdac 1 1 2 drop 1 1 16 1 32 COMDAC drop AEM NB R1 3 C 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 Expert English e1 1 1 4 1 4 E1 physical port feeder side ioe1 1 1 4 E1 circuit pack iohdlc 1 1 2 IOHDLC Circuit Pack pwrsrc 1 a b Power Source sclk 1 Station Clock sh 1 Shelf v5i 1 16 v5 interface 51 1 16 v5 Link v5ts 1 16 1 31 v5 Time Slot string NE TID Target Identifier a only available via AEM NB NTFCNCDE Notification Code This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes NTFCNCDE is the alarm level Expert English Comment CL Cleared Alarm CR Critical Alarm MJ Major Alarm MN Minor Alarm CONDTYPE Condition Type This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1
233. ed and press Re turn press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q 10 Type an user group number and press Return User users and Group group have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuRWRT gt y n 11 Type y and press Return AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 11 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p o S 1 Installing RogueWave Tools amp Threads Runtimes for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 as lt LuRWRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt none gt Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuRWRT 1log Installation of lt LuRWRT gt was successful OrbixMT 2 3c patch Processing package instance lt LuOX23RT gt from 02 Installation lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed Orbix 2 3c
234. eded for installing the Any Media Client kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk Do you like to continue y n q 53 Type y and press Return to continue or type n or q and press Return to exit AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Please choose the installation mode 1 Client Client side installation AEM NB R1 3 2 28 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation Commissioning Installation Procedure p Se 1 7 2 Server lt Server side installation gt Enter selection q 54 Type 1 and press Return Packages to be installed LuJRERT LuOXWRT LuANY15en LuANY15C jre 1 1 7 symantec Processing package instance LuJRERT from classes reportPro lt gt class Installation gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed JRE 1 1 7 for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 sparc solaris 1 1 7 OK No previous package LuJRERT have been P P g found Applications to install 1 gt jre version 1 1 7 2 symantec classes 3 report pro classes 4 gt all 5 exit Selection 55 4 and press Return Enter install directory opt lucent jre1 1 7 q 56 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia
235. edia Client package and Chapter 2 2 4 3 Remove Third Party packages AEM NB R1 3 3 20 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Print out Reports 3 5 Print out Reports General The Print Dialog cf Figure 3 10 is used from any application within AEM NB to generate an output of data It pops up when you press Print Table or Print Win dow in a window or Print in the Print Preview window When you choose Print Preview in a window the Print Preview window cf Figure 3 11 page 3 22 pops up System Details for If the Unix command 1p does not exist or is not configured on your system the Printing AEM NB software will not be able to print This is because the print out is first con verted to PostScript format and then piped to the Unix command lp d printer_name where printer_name is replaced by the value en tered in the Printer field of the Print Dialog Figure 3 10 shows an example of the Print Dialog Print Dialog 2 Print Copies 1 Print to e Printer File Banner Page Title T Print Command Options i Paper Size Orientation Letter JExecutive D Portrait Legal A4 Landscape Print cancel Figure 3 10 Print Dialog Actions in Print The following table provides an overview of the possible actions in the Print Dia Dialog log Table3 11 Print Dialog Actions If you want to then print multiple copies enter the number of copies in
236. el its V5 communication channel id CC id is also displayed as a non editable text V5 communication path id format 10 9 for V5 1 Protocol 10 146 for V5 2 Protocol V5 communication channel id format 0 3 for V5 1 Protocol 0 65503 for V5 2 Protocol The Apply button is used to confirm the changes The Close button can be used to go back to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port window cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 to select another user port AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 131 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Fo 5 4 6 V5 Signalling Overview There are several ways to reach this window m via V5 1 Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 m via V5 2 Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 This window displays the signalling structure of a V5 Interface It shows the com munication channel time slots TSs the communication channels CCs commu nication paths CPs links between TS and CC and links between CP and CC It allows creation edition and deletion of these V5 Signalling 82 TCL NE13 V5 Interface Id tia V5 Signalling Table Add TS TimeSlot columns CP columns nISDNs Contro Link control Add CP Add CC TS Add CP CC Figure 5 47 V5 Signalling Window V5 Signalling Table V5 Signalling Table consists of 4 fields Timeslot columns CC id CP columns and Number of IS
237. elect All gt NE V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Add Remove Links via the cursor menu or select Service gt Provisioning gt Add Remove Link via the menu bar The V5 1 Set Feeder window pops up This window can also be reached from the V5 1 Interface window by click ing on Set Feeder cf Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 vs set Feeder NE Name Tet ners V5 Interface id 124 E1 Feeder None OK Close Figure 5 34 V5 1 Set Feeder Window AEM NB R1 3 5 94 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Description E1 Feeder This option menu can be used to select the desired feeder It shows the list of physical feeders that are not linked to V5 In terfaces i e they are not related to V5 Links which are cross connected with V5 Interfaces or used in leased line groups Format e1 shelf slot feeder Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 OK This button can be used to set the cross connection between the V5 Interface and the selected feeder If the selected feeder has no V5 Link associated the E1 Feeder V5 Link window tab Cross Connection pops up for that physical feeder 2 Use the option menu Physical Feeder to select an appropriate feeder 3 Click OK to confirm the selection The 1 Feeder V5 Link window pops up tab Cross connection cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 1 page 5 101 to cre
238. em overview 5 1 AP provisioning 5 39 Applications start 3 4 Apply button 3 15 Archive database 3 23 Archive command 3 26 Assign controlled objects to domains 4 13 user groups access to applications 4 25 User groups access to domains 4 24 user groups access to tasks 4 26 users to user groups 4 6 Association NE AEM 6 43 Association state 6 43 Authentication 5 20 363 211 412 Autonomous Reports 1 13 3 31 Available Domains 5 19 2 B Backspace key 3 6 Backup command 3 25 level 3 28 schedules 3 28 types 3 24 Backup database 3 23_ Bridge definition 2 Built in self test 6 32 Buttons often used Apply 3 15 Cancel 3 15 Close 3 15 OK 3 15 C Cancel button 3 15 CDC test result 6 37 CD ROM Check box 3 14 CIT port protocol profiles Click mouse 3 6 Client application 3 17 Close button 3 15 COMDAC protection mode simplex 5 58 5 60 COMDAC Protection State 5 59 Comments on document Communications Info 5 20 Configuration data synchronization 6 41 Configuration Management 1 3 Configuration management 3 18 Connection State 5 20 Connection states NE AEM 6 40 Control key 3 6 Controlled Objects 4 29 Core application 3 17 Craft interface terminal 2 Create domain 4 8 user 4 2 user group 4 16 Cross connection General 5 78 cross connections 5 79 Cursor
239. em must have the following amount of free disk space m AEM NB client 60 MB m server The space will depend upon the number of NEs managed by the system because of the data size The recommended size for n NEs is obtained from adding the following numbers in kbyte software 450000 logs 15000 databases 1400 600 n transactions 2 800 350 n n 25 The size calculated is based on maximum configurations and includes the overhead necessary for the temporary data used in operation It is recommended to create a separate partition to locate the transaction log file needed by ObjectStore This partition would be used for this purpose only It must not be deleted or managed because this file is only created and managed by Ob jectStore Note that without this file ObjectStore is not able to work and also if a new partition or location is chosen it needs write permissions for the AnyMedia user login If you choose a directory under AnyMedia location the correct owner and permits will be automatically provided in the installation process of AnyMedia AEM NB R1 3 2 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning General The following table shows the recommended size of the partitions for a maximum of 10 40 and 100 NEs NEs part 2 10 11 MB 40 500 MB 37 MB 100 530 MB 100 MB where part1 contains all the AEM NB server software and data bases and the part2 is dedicated to the transaction l
240. em will be back at the status prior to the latest backup The process between step 2 and step 6 should not take more than 4 hours If the recovery is not successful call Lucent Technologies Technical Support A good backup policy is imperative in order to minimize the data loss some exam ples can be found in cf Chapter 3 6 4 page 3 28 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 3 37 System Management Disaster Recovery p SeSe e AEM NB R1 3 3 38 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Contents 41 Introduction 4 1 4 2 User 4 2 4 2 1 Create User 42 4 2 2 Modify User 4 4 4 2 3 Delete User 4 6 43 Domains 4 8 4 3 1 Create Domains 4 8 4 3 2 Modify Domains 4 11 4 3 3 Delete Domains 4 14 4 4 User Groups 4 16 4 4 1 Create User Groups 4 16 4 4 2 Modify User Groups 4 21 4 4 3 Delete User Groups 4 26 45 Controlled Objects 4 29 4 5 1 Modify Controlled Objects 4 29 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 7 Contents AEM NB R1 3 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management 4 1 Introduction This chapter describes the User Administration and Profiling application of the AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services R1 3 AEM NB It allows to m create modify delete users m assign unassign users to from user groups m create modify delete user groups m assign unassign user groups access to from applications tasks and do m
241. ent Management provides the following functionality features Management m Scrolling List of NEs The NEs are displayed in a list covered in a single window called Network Browser where the NEs and their components can be handled like files in a file browser m NE Provisioning The operator can create a new NE manageable for the AEM NB view The operator must enter the specific configuration data for the new NE such as IP address NE Name NE user id and password m Software Download to a single NE Provides a storage medium for maintaining a copy of the software and a mechanism for downloading that software to a NE m Software Download to multiple NEs Download of new software to multiple NEs on an individual connection ba sis m Non Volatile Data Storage Restoration Restores NE non volatile data storage upon user request Provides a stor age medium for maintaining a copy of the NVDS for backup and restore purposes on a periodic basis m Maintain a local Copy of NE Inventory The AEM NB maintains a local copy of specific hardware identifiers and software version identifiers This local copy accepts automatic inventory notifications This information can be used for display and report functions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE The hardware identifiers include all plug ins m Maintain a local Copy of NE Provisioning Configuration Data The AEM NB maintains a local copy of all cross connection and parame
242. er A network layer device that forwards packets from one network to another based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is connected to another port of the router With a router data traffic can be kept from certain parts of a LAN A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than a bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control S Station Clock An external 2048 kHz synchronization signal according to ITU T G 703 Security Management This restricts access based upon the establishment of log in procedures and an associated set of passwords Screen locks are used as well User access is based upon domain partitioning Controls the access to the data and capabilities inherent within a fixed partition of the network including unbundling Server A network element that waits for requests from clients to perform specific tasks This is the function performed by the AnyMedia Access System Server Application This is a set of server processes that perform a certain function Server Host This is the machine where the system server modules are installed AEM NB R1 3 GL 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary Server Module This is the module that provides a subset of the system services Service This is a piece of functionality provided by a server module Service State of an object or entity This
243. er applications However there are interdependencies be tween Level 2 applications so that the shut down of one may affect the services of others Root can configure the system at the installation so that Level 1 applica tions only or Level 1 and all Level 2 applications start at boot time The administrator can start Level 1 applications or Level 1 and all Level 2 The administrator can start any desired Level 2 application from the GUI Shutdown 3 4 1 General on Applications Definitions Table 3 7 Definitions for Applications Term Meaning Server application tions Client application Level 1 or core applications Level 2 applications There are three ways to start the server applications m boot time m via command line applications via command line m via GUI once Level 1 is already running AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 17 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown mm 3 4 2 AEM NB Server Applications The AEM NB consists of four server applications The following list gives their names and uses m System core Provides basic functionalities and is needed by all applications If this server application is shut down all other applications are shut down and all client applications are notified of the shutdown m Configuration management needed by the configuration management application cf Chapter 5 If this server application is shut down the configuration management applicat
244. er for the service degrade threshold Possible values 5 95 step 5 Default 50 This option menu can be used to define the HDLC Flag Mon itoring condition Protocol Ver sion Provisioning Variant Service Degrad ing Threshold HDLC Flag Monitoring Possible values Yes or No Default Yes AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 85 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning ee Parameters Buttons Description Create This button is used to confirm the creation of the V5 Interface with the given parameters It is available only if the user has specified a value for the V5 Interface id 2 Enter an appropriate V5 Interface id 3 Use the option menu Protocol Version to select the appropriate version 4 Enter the desired values for Provisioning Variant and Service Degrade Threshold 5 Use the option menu HDLC Flag Monitoring to define the monitoring condition 6 Click on Create to confirm the entries The V5 x Interface window pops up only possible if the maximum of 16 V5 Interfaces is not yet exceeded and in case of V5 2 protocol the V5 Interface id is unique within the whole managed network 7 Go to Chapter 5 4 1 1 page 5 87 for editing V5 1 Interface or go to Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 for editing V5 2 Interface gt NOTE When a V5 1 Interface is created and configured the communication path Control is automatically created When a V5 2 Interface is created and
245. er1 gt DT gt telnet 135 88 20 12 Trying 135 88 20 12 Connected to 135 88 20 12 Escape character is login vi Ei Figure 5 26 Cut Through Window 3 Enter the Login and Password as defined in the NE Name Information window cf Chapter 5 3 1 page 5 17 Now you are able to enter the appropriate TL1 commands The TL1 descriptions syntax formats parameters are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System 5 3 8 Delete Network Element If the NE should not be managed by the AEM NB any longer it shall be deleted from the AEM NB database Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete an NE Step Procedure 1 Select the gt NE in the Network Browser and Delete via the cursor menu or select File gt Delete or Equipment Provisioning Delete via the menu bar A Warning window pops up You are about to delete NE Name Do you want to continue If you select No the deletion of the NE is rejected Otherwise the NE will be deleted AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 75 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the AEM NB database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the AEM NB and the NE will be closed and the management access via the AEM NB is finished until the NE is cre ated and connected again AEM NB R1 3 5 76 Ve
246. ernal OS WAN AEM NB server and one or more clients connected to the NEs using a WAN link and connected to one ore more external OSs using a LAN connection Client J odem Sa ISDN Network Adapter REN NE Server ED 1 Bridge Router N TCP IP PPP 2 WAN LINK ISDN PSTN X 25 SONET SDH ATM Modem ISDN Network Adapter TCP IP PPP Sr Bridge Router TCP IP LAN NE fe fe fs NE NE Figure 1 2 Server with Clients and external OS WAN AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 31 Functional Description Network Configuration p 1 O AEM NB R1 3 1 32 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Contents 21 General 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 Installation Procedure 2 2 1 Full Installation 2 2 1 1 Server Side Installation 2 2 1 2 Client Side Installation 2 2 1 3 Post Install Actions 2 2 1 3 1 AEM NB Server 2 2 1 3 2 AEM NB Client 2 2 2 Installing Individual Packages 2 2 3 Cancel Installation 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia Package Installations 2 2 4 1 Remove AnyMedia Servers Package 2 2 4 2 Remove AnyMedia Client Package 2 2 4 8 Remove Third Party Packages AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 D PO 5
247. es should be routed to the related PVC AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 11 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations mm A 6 2 2 Configuration of AnyMedia Network Element A 6 2 2 1 Configuration of COMDAC On the AnyMedia Narrowband part of NE we must configure the Local LAN port The initial provisioning has to be done via pre provisioning factory settings or a local GSI NB RS 232C To do so we must configure the Narrowband LAN port IP address the default router address address of AFM LAN port and the subnet mask of the NE local LAN port We use TL1 commands to configure the NE as itis shown in the next example set ip shelf 135 88 4 2 defrouter 135 88 17 1 submask 255 255 240 0 A 6 2 2 2 Configuration of AFM On the AFM we must configure the in band ATM Permanent Virtual Circuit PVC which is carrying NB and BB management information This ATM PVC will be ter minated at AFM and IP packets contained in it will be extracted For this PVC VPI should be 0 and VCI greater than 31 ATM PVCs may be provisioned in AFM by means of GSI BB via local CIT altogether with AFM IP addresses one for E3 in terface and another one for LAN port IP Met Mask and Gateway addresses for AFM must be provisioned On the AFM we must configure a routing table i e so that IP packets related to COMDAC are forwarded to the AFM LAN port and IP packets related to AFM are terminated at AFM
248. esses Do you like install the SystemAdmin process on the system boot y n q 37 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n to do nothing on the sys tem gt NOTE If you select y the following request is displayed Start up MODE 1 ALL to start up all AnyMedia applications 2 CORE to start up only core AnyMedia appli cations Enter selection q 38 Type the desired Start up more 1 or 2 cron processes RemoveAlm cron process will be executed every day at 3 00 Do you like change it y n q 39 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y the following requests are displayed Enter minute 0 59 q 40 Type a valid entry Enter hour 0 23 q 41 Type a valid entry Enter day of the month 1 31 q AEM NB 1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 2 23 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p ee AO 2 24 Version 1 00 42 Type a valid entry Enter month of the year 1 12 q 43 Type a valid entry Enter day of the week 0 6 with OzSunday q 44 Type a valid entry Do you like install the Backup process as a cron y n q 45 Type y to confirm and press Return or type n and press Return to do nothing on the system gt NOTE If you select y refer to steps 40 44 Do you like install the Archive process as a
249. evious package LuANY15S have been found Select an installation path for AnyMediaEM R1 5 server applications Enter install directory for the AnyMediaEM R1 5 opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 q 35 Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default The installation path selected for AnyMedia EM R1 5 is Server path gt Package LuOX23RT OrbixMT Version 2 3c02MT Run Time have been found in lt OrbixMT path gt Package lt LUOXTKRT gt OrbixTalk 1 2c02 have been found in OrbixTalk path gt Package lt LUOXTKRT gt OTGateway 2 0c02 01 have been found in lt OrbixTalk path gt Package LuOXNS OrbixNames Version 1 1 Run Time have been found in OrbixNames path gt Package LuOSRT ObjectStore 5 0 SP3 Run Time have been found in ObjectStore path gt Package lt LuLUMRT gt Lumos Build 5 run time have been found in Lumos path gt Package lt LuRWRT gt RogueWave Tools and Threads 7 0 7 amp 1 1 2 have been found in RogueWave path gt Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP AEM NB R1 3 2 22 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 363 211 412 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q 36 Type a user group number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Boot proc
250. ew 3 2 System Access 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 Login to Operation System Logout from Operation System AEM NB Access Bar 3 2 3 1 Alarm Notification Icon 3 2 3 2 Help Icon 3 2 4 Capacity 3 3 General Information on Keyboard and Windows 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 3 2 Mouse 3 3 3 Different Aspects of the Cursor 3 3 4 Basics on Windows 3 3 5 Window Menu 3 3 6 Menu Bar 3 3 7 Cursor Menu 3 3 8 Workspace Manager 3 3 9 Workspace Menu 3 3 10 Controls in AEM NB Windows 3 4 Application Start Up and Shutdown 3 4 1 General on Applications 3 4 2 AEM NB Server Applications 3 4 3 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via GUI 3 4 4 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applications via Command Line 3 4 5 Deinstall AEM NB from Your System 3 5 Print out Reports 363 211 412 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 3 I Contents 3 6 Backup and Restore 3 23 3 6 1 Basics on Backups and AEM NB Databases 3 23 3 6 2 Commands for Backup Archive and Restore 3 24 3 6 3 Backup Archive and Restore Procedures 3 26 3 6 3 1 Backup Procedure 3 27 3 6 3 2 Archive Procedure 3 27 3 6 3 3 Restore Procedure 3 27 3 6 3 3 1 General 3 27 3 6 3 3 2 Full Restoration Procedure 3 27 3 6 3 3 3 Incremental Restoration Procedure 3 28 3 6 4 Examples for Backup Schedules 3 28 3 6 4 1 Daily Cumulative Weekly Cumulative Backups 3 28 3 6 4 2 Daily Cumulative Weekly Incremental Backups 3 29 3 6 4 3 Daily Incremental Weekly Cumulative Backups 3 30
251. ew window The Application Pack window pops up gt NOTE The window shown here as an example belongs to a provisioned applica tion pack The window for a not provisioned application pack would not dis play the Drop Information region 1 If the selected slot is not yet provisioned the slot id will be shown instead of the apparatus code AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 39 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration _Drop__ _V5 Interface id User Port Address User Port Type 1 8 17 22 1 8 e 1 8 ef 1 4 1 5 1 86 4 87 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 0 0 e roph t 8 8 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 12 Application Pack Window This window contains all information related to the AP It can be displayed even when the plug in is not inserted The following table shows the view edit options of this window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE Name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the AP is plugged in Format ap 1 16 AEM NB R1 3 5 40 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor mation The following fields will be empty if no plug in is provisioned Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formati
252. f LuANY15en y n 70 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Help as lt LuANY15en gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class common 1 Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install LuANY15en log Installation of LuANY15en was successful AnyMedia Client Processing package instance LuANY15C from Installation lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Cli ent sparc LuANY15C X Yc kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Noe AnyMedia Element Manager 1999 Lucent Technologies kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkx OK No previous package LuANY15C have been found Where should AnyMediaNBEM GUI be installed opt lucent AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 GUI q 71 Type valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 35 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee Package LuOXWRT OrbixWeb Version 3 0 Run Time have been found in lt OrbixWeb path gt Package LuJRERT jre 1 1 7 have been found in lt jre path gt Package LuANY15en Help have been found in lt Help path gt Package LuNETSCP have been found in lt Netscape
253. failure exceeds failure count UNXPRS Unexpected reset only available via AEM NB SRVEFF Service Effect This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes This indicates the reported alarm condition is service effecting or non service ef fecting Expert English Comment NSA Non Service Affecting SA Service Affecting OCRDAT Occurrence Date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes This indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respectively 00 lt yy lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 13 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 E SeSe OCRTM Occurrence Time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes This indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format hours minutes seconds CONDDESCR Condition Description Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 68 This is the text description for the reported alarm condition This information can be found in the Correlations Tables The 68 characters included a pair of escaped quotes V C 3 2 6 Generic Error Responses Code Definition Reason For Code CLOS Connection Not Available Connection with the NE TID is not available IITA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not ma
254. g class names files list gt verifying class bin files list gt verifying class lib Executing postinstall script Okay OrbixNames is now installed You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOXNS 1log Installation of LuOXNS was successful OrbixTalk 1 2 c Processing package instance LuOXTKRT from patch02 Installation lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 15 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 4 6 OrbixTalk 1 2 02 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris 1 2c02 OrbixTalk Installation details Version 1 2c02 Platform Solaris 2 x Compiler WorkShop Compilers 4 2 30 Oct 1996 C 4 2 To install OrbixTalk1 2c you must already have Orbix2 3c installed If this is not the case please exit now If you already have OrbixTalk on your system this installation may overwrite some of the files Make sure you have a backup of your old OrbixTalk or install this new version in a new set of directories If you want to make a backup copy of the old version you should exit now It is recommended that you read the installa tion guide before you continue Do you want to continue y 20 Type y and press Return OK No previous package LuOXTKRT have been found Package
255. g in in Shelf View window The C U window pops up Mew Tria NE Name TCL NE12 Slot ciu 1 Inventory Information Card Type CIU Serial Number 980 06110591 Apparatus Code DTP500 ICC 1 2 727 Close x Figure 5 10 CIU Window This window contains all information related to the CIU It can be displayed even when the plug in is not inserted The following table shows the view edit options of the CIU window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot number where the CIU is plugged in AEM NB R1 3 5 34 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 3 O M 3 Parameters Buttons Description Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no plug in is inserted mation Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value CIU Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value DTP500 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among plug ins to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the serie
256. g to the column en tries alphabetically or by date and time Click again to reverse the sort order A new Log Viewer window displays the selected log type and date The selected log type is displayed by default whenever a new Log Viewer win dow is opened The Log Viewer table or a screenshot of the window is printed out Newly logged entries are displayed The Log Viewer table is displayed sorted alphabetically or by date and time close one Log Viewer window select File gt Close press Close The selected Log Viewer window is closed close all Log Viewer windows select File gt Exit All Log Viewer windows are closed 363 211 412 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 3 35 System Management Log Management Select Default View following window pops up if you have chosen to set a new default log type via Options gt Default Type to be displayed at every start up of the Log Viewer You can select a log type and press Ok or close the window without any actions with Cancel Default Type Selection Log Types Actions System Internal Events Autonomous Reports Selected type Actions Ok _Cancel Figure 3 13 Set Default Type AEM NB R1 3 3 36 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management 3 8 363 211 412 Disaster Recovery Disaster Recovery The AEM NB software has built in auto recovery features that will allow it to con
257. g up this service Locale This is a geographic or political region that shares the same language and customs In this document a locale is also used to refer to the definition of the subset of a user s information technology environment that depends on language and cultural conventions Localization This is the process of adapting a program for use in a specific locale LOG File This is the file used for listing all actions that have occurred in a system This information is generated and re corded concurrently and sequentially as transactions and events are processed in the system Logical line identity For logical addressing of an end customer termination either associated to a V5 1 or a V5 2 interface Logical link A logical entity providing 31 64 kbps timeslots which is associated to a 2 048 Mbps interface One V5 1 or more links only V5 2 may be related to a V5 x interface M MAC Address This is a 6 byte hardware address which identifies a unique participant worldwide in an Ethernet LAN A ad dress is used in OSI layer 2 Manual normal Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to perform a switch only if the protection unit COMDAC and HDLC circuit packs only is in service and not faulty Migration This refers to converting an NE from one software release to another by installing a different software release Mixed ISDN POTS mode An operation mode of the An
258. gt Domains The Domains Table appears Year2000 Year 2000 test Figure 4 11 Domains Table 4 Click New The Domain Profile window pops up AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 9 User Management Domains oman profite Domain Name Description Controlled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned Type Value Type Value EM Anymedia Add gt gt NE 1 lt lt Bee res NE 6 NE User Groups User Groups Not Assigned Assigned User Groups User Groups Administrator Monitoring Figure 4 12 Window Domain Profile 5 Enter a new domain name in the Domain Name field this is mandatory 3 to 30 characters and extra information in the Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 6 Select one or more controlled objects that shall belong to the new domain in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value 7 Select one or more user groups that shall have access to the new domain in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 16 AEM NB R1 3 4 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Domains 8 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new domain does not yet exist in the system After cli
259. h 1999 respec tively 00 lt lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 17 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 ee OCRTM Occurrence Time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes This indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds ALMMSG Alarm Message This parameter appears in the Common Block Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 40 Alarm Message Use alarm message instead of condition description Refer to the Correlation Tables for the default environmental alarm conditions C 3 3 6 Generic Error Responses IITA Input Invalid Target Identifier TID does not match with SID has unallowed characters or string is too long Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incorrect CTAG IBNC Input Block Not Consistent Parameter entered in the wrong block Code Definition Reason For Code 1 NE Connection Not Available Connection with the NE TID is not available a only available via AEM NB AEM NB R1 3 C 18 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Abbreviations ADSL Asymmetrical Digital Subscriber Line AEM NB AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AFM Access Feeder Multiplexer AID Access Identifier AMAS AnyMedia Access System ANSI American National Standards Institute AO Autonomous Outpu
260. h uses TL1 com mands for the management of AnyMedia Network Elements AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 GL 5 Glossary o V m PH GUI The Graphical User Interface of the AEM NB H Host A machine where one or more modules are installed Hub or Multiport Repeaters This have 8 12 16 or more ports With their help multiple devices with 10BASE T interface can be connected to a single LAN They have at least one additional port for connecting an additional segment of a LAN Incremental Backup This copies new files and files that have changed since a previous backup The incremental backups are usually given a dump level which determines which files are backed up A certain level incremental backup will save all the new or changed files since the last backup with a lower level Inhibit Switch This refers to an Element Manager initiated switch command that instructs the NE to inhibit a side switch irrespec tive of the conditions of the active unit COMDAC and IO DS1 circuit packs only Internationalization This is the process of isolating the language and customs dependent code in a computer program from the lan guage independent code The term internationalization is often abbreviated as 78 IP Addresses These are distributed according to the worldwide or local configuration The IP address is used in ISO layer 3 A LAN contains tables for making an assignment between MAC address and IP address INIT SYS comm
261. he cursor to the desired option in the menu or m opening the menu via the keyboard by entering A1t plus the underlined letter of the relevant menu to open the menu option and then entering the letter underlined in the desired menu option Table 6 4 File Menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in New Launch a new instance of the Alarm Viewer Chapter 6 3 4 1 Print gt Print Ta Print all alarm items displayed in the cur page 6 18 ble rently displayed table or save the items into an ASCII file The Print Dialog window cf Chapter 3 5 is opened Print gt Preview Shows the Print Preview window cf Chapter 3 5 Print gt Print Prints a screenshot of the whole window Window The Print Dialog is opened cf Chapter 3 5 Close Dismiss this window but without closing other instances of the Alarm Viewer Exit Close all Alarm Viewers opened by the user AEM NB R1 3 6 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring Table 6 5 Views Menu Menu display Menu option Meaning Information in View1 Select a view from the predefined views Chapter 6 3 4 2 View2 View2 page 6 18 View3 View 4 View3 View4 Table 6 6 Filters Menu Menu display Menu option Information in Meaning Alarms for the last 24 hours Critical Raised Alarms Raised Alarms Alarms from a Host s Critical Alarms not cleared Owne
262. he permissible conditions only See accompanying documentation and information on the unit system m Calibrations special tests after repairs and regular safety checks must be carried out documented and archived m Only use tested and virus free diskettes AEM NB R1 3 XVI Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 About this Document m Do not place the shelves on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the equipment m Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product 6 2 1 Safety Symbols and Labels All safety instructions have a uniform appearance They include a signal word that classifies the danger and a text block that contains descriptions of the type and cause of the danger the consequences of ignoring the safety instruction and the measures that can be taken to minimize the danger In some safety instructions a warning symbol is placed underneath the signal word Classification There are five classes of safety instructions Danger Warning Caution portant and Notice The classification is shown in the following table DANGER Serious injury is definite or likely WARNING Serious injury is possible CAUTION Minor injury is definite likely or possible or material damage to th
263. he window AEM NB R1 3 3 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management General Information on Keyboard mm 3 3 6 Menu Bar Menu Options The menu bar of a window contains the menu names Once you click on a menu it opens and series of related menu options will be displayed under the menu name Conventions Each option represents a function which can be used to control the application running in the window To call this function click on the required option A menu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option e g in the menu below Network View gt Maps A grayed menu name or option cannot be selected Submenu Conven Submenus are menus opening under a certain menu option and containing a tions number of related menu options Some menu options are provided with a small ar row pointing to the right gt These menu options have a submenu that will open as soon as you click on the menu option A submenu option is referred to in the text as Menu name gt Menu option gt Submenu option e g Network View gt Submaps gt Open List A submenu option again may offer a submenu then an appropriate number of gt is added 3 3 7 Cursor Menu Menu at the Cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop Position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a wind
264. he window remains on screen for further use 4 Click on Protection to open the Shelf Protection window COMDAC tab cf Chapter 5 3 3 7 1 page 5 60 or click on Close to exit the win dow 5 3 3 7 Equipment Protection Switching General Equipment protection switching provides an automatic recovery mechanism in the AnyMedia Access System when a fault is detected NE entities that are involved in carrying service to a large number of end users are generally required to be pro tected with a redundant unit However the NE provides customer options to have none or some entities protected with redundant units These entities can be either 1 1 or 1 N protected For 1 1 protected entities one of them serves as the active or primary unit and the other serves as a protection or standby unit For 1 N pro tected entities one entity serves as the protection or standby unit for all N active units If an active unit fails the failure is detected and service is automatically pro tection switched to the protection unit The protection switching can also be re quested on demand AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 59 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Co AMEN 0 Revertive non re Equipment protection switching can be revertive or non revertive Revertive pro vertive tection switching implies that the active and standby units will return to their origi nal configuration once th
265. hives backup medium The files from which a backup or archive is done are shown in the table below The location of the files is relative to the main installation direc tory For changing default locations refer to Appendix B Table 3 14 Default File Names for Backup and Archive File Name Backup Fails if Database File Directory File File doesn t exist Alarm database AM db yes Configuration management database CM db yes NE management database NEM db yes AEM NB R1 3 3 24 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Backup and Restore mm Table 3 14 Default File Names for Backup and Archive File Name Backup Fails if Database File Directory File File doesn t exist Security database Security db yes Non volatile Data Storage NVDS CM nefiles NVDS no Log Files log directory no System Message After each backup archive or restore command a result message is displayed which indicates whether the operation was successful or not This message is dis played only if the command was entered on the command line Command Syntax In the following description of the commands square brackets e g c indicate optional parameters The pipe symbol indicates alternative options from which one has to be chosen e g INC FULL All parameters not enclosed in brackets mandatory Each command is entered without enclosing parameters in brackets Backup Files Use the following command to
266. hreshold that is generally considered to be a transient condition TAP100 Test Application Pack TAP100 is the internal test head executing the measurements required for the drop TELNET This is a remote terminal interface protocol which allows remote login capability into a system on a network from any other node on that network that is also running TELNET TELNET is a TCP IP application Test Access Path TAP There are up to two TAPs one consisting of two pairs TAP B and the other of six pairs TAP A both providing in ternal and external metallic test access to the circuits AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 GL 11 Glossary ee Test Session This is the procedure including all necessary functions to test a subscriber This includes the setup of the test path as well as the release of the test equipment The test session runs in the NE Time This represents a 24 hour clock function TL1 Transaction Language 1 This is bellcore standard message language It is the primary means of operating and maintaining the VS5DLC system A TL1 message session supports bi directional message transmission and when a TL1 link is established the system can initiate autonomous messages to monitor alarms and changes in system status TS Timeslot Any cyclic time interval that can be recognized and defined uniquely For example a 64 kbps channel of a V5 interface that can be used either as a bearer channel carrying subscriber paylo
267. ication of major severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value false AUDI MINOR ALARM SEV enable disable audio notification of minor severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value false AUDI INFO ALARM SEV enable disable audio notification of infor mation severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value false Broad Band Appli BROAD BAND URL the URL where the Broad Band application cation Settings s located Default value defined at installation time AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 System Variables and Configuration Parameters Configuration Parameters mm Name Description Cut Through Set LOGTELNET login to connect to AEM NB server for Cut tings Through purposes Default value defined at installation time PASSTELNET password to connect to AEM NB server for CutThrough purposes Default value defined at installation time SERVER server host where the AEM NB application is running Default value defined at installation time Help Settings HELP_URL the URL where the help files are located Table 24 AnyMedia ini Configuration File Name LV_READLINES Description line number of server log messages read in Log Viewer Range of values 1 to 50 Default value 50 AEM NB R1 3 B 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbo
268. ick on Edit V5 Interface The V5 x Interface window pops up 2 Click on Signalling The V5 Signalling window pops up 3 Select an entry in the list an click on Remove The AEM NB will send a delete message to the NE m delete cross connection between V5 communication channel and V5 timeslot m delete cross connection between V5 communication path and V5 communication channel AEM NB R1 3 5 156 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 13 Remove Communication Path Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a communication path Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 Interface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 x Interface window pops up 2 Click on Signalling The V5 Signalling window pops up 3 Select an entry in the list an click on Remove The AEM NB will send a delete message to the NE m delete cross connection between V5 communication path and V5 communication channel 5 4 14 Remove Primary Link A secondary link has to be removed cf Chapter 5 4 15 page 5 158 before a pri mary link can be removed Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a primary link Step Procedure 1 Sele
269. ies IP packets related to both COMDAC and AFM management infor mation PVCs carrying management information related to one NE origi nated in a LAN environment where AEM NB and AEM BB are located AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations p w4 9eO m A DCN device is needed at the Central Office to make the translation be tween 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP and PVC AAL5 802 2 LLC 802 2 SNAP IP interface to the ATM network The LLC encapsulation method to be supported by that device is that described in RFC 1483 7 i e this method allows multiplexing multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual cir cuit Further this method carries connectionless network traffic over the ATM network Note that this functionality if available can also be per formed by the ATM switch connected by means of a LAN connection with the Central Office e g CBX 500 in these cases there is no need of a sep arate ATM router at the CO m ATM PVC which carries IP management information is carried over an network and finally they are inserted in a related NE by means of E3 data ports IP packets contained in the ATM PVC are extracted in the Broad band AFM card which also support RFC 1483 m Part of these IP packets those with IP address of AFM which carry BB management information are terminated in AFM m Part of these IP packets those with IP address
270. in the Login Name field this is mandatory 3 to 12 characters and extra information like last name first name email etc in the User Name Description field this is optional 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed 5 Select one or more user groups the user shall belong to in the User Groups Not Assigned field and Click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 16 6 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the settings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 2 2 page 4 4 42 2 Modify User Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the information or profile of a user Before modifying the information or profile of a user please pay attention to the following remarks m modify the information or profile of a user the AEM NB administrator must have a NIS based login m The AEM NB administrator is not able to change the system login informa tion of a user i e system login and password Procedure Complete the following procedure to modify the information or profile of a user Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show Figure 4 4 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration
271. indow mm MO 3 3 5 2 2 Menu Bar The menu bar entries are enabled disabled depending on the object selected in the Network Browser The following table describes the menu bar s main entries and subsequent submenus The right column Available at level identifies the Network Browser item that needs to be selected to have this menu option availa ble to the user Menu entries Available at level File gt New gt All View gt Reload Window gt NOTE This operation is not supported for the Net work Browser The menu appears only when no other Con figuration Manager window is open File gt Open NE Shelf Slot E1 Feeder Drop id V5 Interfaces List V5 Interface id E1 Feeder List V5 User Port List File gt Delete NE File gt Print gt Print window Window File gt Print gt Print table Window File gt Print gt Preview Window File gt Exit Any Edit gt Cut Text editing field Edit gt Copy Text editing field Edit gt Paste Text editing field Edit gt Clear Text editing field View gt Expand Branch sign on the left Any View gt Collapse Branch sign on the left Any Equipment gt Provisioning gt Create gt NE All Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit View NE Shelf Slot E1 Feeder Equipment gt Provisioning gt Delete NE AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 9 Configuration Management Provisioning Configura
272. ing a leased line serv ice or None if there are no free E1s in the NE Format e1 shelf slot feeder Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 If this tab is invoked via Network Browser or from windows which the E1 feeder has been selected this field shows the previously selected feeder If this tab is invoked from the tab 1 Feeder this field shows the previously selected E1 if it is free otherwise it shows the first free E1 feeder if there are no free E1s None value is shown If this tab is invoked from the tab V5 Link this field shows the first free E1 feeder if there are no free E1s None value is shown V5 Link id This field is used to enter the V5 Link id of the V5 Link to be created Possible values 0 255 If only None is available there are no free 15 this field is not editable V5 Interface id This option menu is used to select a V5 In terface to cross connect with the V5 Link when this is cre ated Possible values 0 16777215 If this tab is invoked from V5 2 Add Remove Link or V5 1 Set Feeder the previously selected value is shown If there are no V5 Interfaces created None is shown Command But OK This button is used to create a V5 Link with default val tons ues and cross connected to a V5 interface if applicable and to close the whole window Apply This button is used to create a V5 Link with default values and cross connected to a V5 interface if applicable and to open
273. ings click Close before OK or Apply The other fields are described in Chapter 4 4 2 page 4 21 AEM NB R1 3 4 20 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User Groups 4 4 2 Modify User Groups Introduction This chapter describes the process to modify the properties of a user group Be fore modifying the properties of a user group please pay attention to the following remarks The AEM NB administrator must have a system login m administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and tasks and these access permissions cannot be modified Procedure Complete the following procedure to create a new user group Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show d e Figure 4 24 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up User administration O File view Help Figure 4 25 Menu Bar of Window User Administration AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 21 User Management User Groups C ne 3 Select View gt User Groups The User Groups Table appears Administrator Administrator Group Description Maintenance Group Description Monitoring Monitoring Group Description Figure 4 26 User Groups Table AEM NB R1 3 4 22 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management User Groups
274. ink window tab V5 Link pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 2 page 5 104 add a V5 Link select the appropriate row in the E1 In formation list and press Add V5 Link The E1 Feeder V5 Link window tab Cross Connection pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 2 page 5 104 delete a V5 Link select the appropriate row in the E1 In formation list and press Hemove V5 Link A Warning window pops up dis playing the following message Removing V5 Link id may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the remove operation will be started AEM NB R1 3 5 28 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 4ZO 5 3 2 1 2 Edit E1 Feeder Complete the following procedure to edit the E1 feeder data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt FAC500 gt E1 Feeder in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar The E1 Feeder V5 Link window tab E1Feeder pops up This window can also be reached from the E1 window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 26 or E1 Feeder List window cf Chapter 5 4 2 3 page 5 99 by clicking on Edit E1 Figure 5 8 E1 Feeder V5 Link Window Tab Physical Feeder AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 29 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 The following
275. ion C o AEN Cut Through TCL NE12 e Trying to connect telnet 135 88 20 12 Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 5 1 Generic May 1996 SRR HOR SIR IR IR RIOR HOR IHR RAH Warning Message SRR IR RR RH This system is restricted solely to Lucent Technologies authorised users for legitimate business purposes only The actual or attempted unauthorised access use or modification of this system is strictly prohibited by Lucent Technologies Unauthorised users are subject to Company disciplinary proceedings and or criminal and civil penalties under state federal or other applicable domestic and foreign laws The use of this system may be monitored and recorded for administrative and security reasons Anyone accessing this system expressly consents to such monitoring and is advised that if such monitoring reveals possible evidence of criminal activity Lucent Technologies may provide the evidence of such activity to law enforcement officials All users must comply with Lucent Technologies Corporate Instructions regarding the protection of Lucent Technologies information assets otototototototolotolololotolotofoletotototototatototetotolofototototolotototototetotetorototatotatototototototototolotolotototetotetotetotatot fetc shutdown ws can be used to reboot your workstation if necessary fexport tmp can be used for local disk storage but it is NOT backed up You have mail 7mmasc201 m homelocal users v
276. ion Comm Path This option menu contains the possible types of CP type Possible values PSTN ISDN Ds ISDN p ISDN f Default ISDN Ds gt NOTE Control Link control and BCC communication paths are automatically created when a V5 Interface is cre ated cf Chapter 5 4 1 page 5 83 Comm Path This field is used to enter the identification number of the CP that shall be created Possible values 1 9 for V5 1 1 145 for V5 2 This option menu contains the communication channels that are already created and the value None default Possible values 0 65503 This button is used to create a CP of the specified type with the given id This button is enabled only when the identifica tion number is specified Comm Chan nel id optional Apply AEM NB R1 3 5 140 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a communication path Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu Comm Path type to select an appropriate CP type 2 Enter the CP id 3 Use the option menu Comm Channel id to select a CC id 4 Click on Apply to add a CP If this is successful and a CC is specified the new CP is cross connected to that CC if there is not already a CP of that type cross connected 5 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 141 Configuration Management Provisioning Servic
277. ion will no longer run m Alarm management needed by the fault alarm management application cf Chapter 6 If this server application is shut down the fault alarm management application will no longer run m Network element management Needed for operations which affect NEs If this server application is shut down operations with NEs can no longer be carried out All client applica tions continue working except for those parts involving NEs Restart of Server If a server application crashes the AEM NB tries to start up this server application Applications one time automatically If the server application start up mechanism fails and it is a level 2 application it remains stopped If itis a level 1 application the whole sys tem is shutted down and restarted all running applications at that moment are shutted down and restarted 3 4 3 Start Up Shutdown of Server Applica tions via GUI Introduction The System Administration function of the access bar allows to start up or shut down server applications manually and to monitor the state of each application Only the administrator has access to this function The System Administration window is shown below AEM NB R1 3 3 18 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown System Administration Applications Stopped Running System Core Configuration Management Alarm Viewer NE Management
278. ionality as Acknowledge in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 6 3 3 4 2 page 6 17 clear alarms Actions gt Clear All selected alarm items are cleared Their status im mediately changes to cleared Same functionality as Clear in the tool bar For better readability the displayed alarms can be sorted cf Chapter 6 3 3 4 2 page 6 17 AEM NB R1 3 6 22 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management 6 4 Test Management Main Functions Test Options Access to the Testroutines TL1 Commands 363 211 412 The test management provides all the general purpose test functionality The main functions are Providing the user with different test options see below m Starting the test execution by means of the AEM NB m Displaying the test results on the AEM NB user interface and m Setting and clearing of loopbacks The following test options are available m User Line Test cf Chapter 6 4 1 page 6 25 m Port test cf Chapter 6 4 2 page 6 29 m Standby card test scheduling cf Chapter 6 4 3 page 6 31 m Built in self test cf Chapter 6 4 4 page 6 32 m test cf Chapter 6 4 5 page 6 33 m CRC test cf Chapter 6 4 6 page 6 34 m Loopback test at the feeder side cf Chapter 6 4 7 page 6 37 The test routines are available via the Configuration Manager application To start it click Config Ma
279. ired Appiy Protection State Working Protection Ongoing Tasks Copy Mem in Progress Sw Download in Progress Close Figure 5 18 COMDAC Window AEM NB R1 3 5 58 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 2 This window includes hardware and software data inventory as well as the operational and protection state The Inventory Information pane contains read only fields cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 3 page 5 32 For configuring the protection scheme the pane Operation amp Protection is used Parameters Buttons Description Slot Required This check box displays the required state of the shelf slot This state can be changed by the user from REQUIRED to NOT REQUIRED or vice versa as long as the plug in is not inserted However it is not possible to set both COMDACs to not required The Apply button is available if a change in the Slot Required check box has been made Protection State This non editable field shows whether the selected COMDAC is working or not Working providing serv ice or Standby not in service or Not Equipped slot is un equipped Protection This button provides access to the Shelf Protection window COMDAC tab to allow you to modify the current protection scheme or perform protection switching cf Chapter 5 3 3 7 1 page 5 60 2 Deselect the check box Slot Required 3 Click on Apply to confirm t
280. is Version 3 0 Run Time AEM NB R1 3 2 30 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee 59 60 61 62 363 211 412 Installing Version 3 0 Run Time OK No previous package LuOXWRT have been found Enter install directory opt lu cent OrbixWeb3 0 q Type a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Package LuJRERT jre 1 1 7 have been found in lt jre Path gt If the DNS domain is found The DNS domain name found was xxxxxxx What is your DNS domain name default xxxxxxx If the DNS domain name is not found The DNS domain name has NOT been found Maybe this machine does not have DNS or is not configurated If you do not have DNS then press RETURN to the next question In other case write your DNS domain name selection or accept the default What is your DNS domain name default Type your DNS domain name and press Return press Return to se lect default available only if DNS domain was found Enter the NS hostname hostname q Type the AEM NB server hostname and press Return or accept the de fault hostname by pressing Return only Type y Do you agree with NS hostname lt hostname gt lt IP address gt y n q and press Return if the IP adress is correct Select owner and group for package files NBR USER
281. is a copyright of Microsoft Corporation Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Windows 95 and Windows 98 are copyrights of Microsoft Corporation UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X Open Company Limited Quality Management System The Quality Management System QMS for Lucent Technologies Product Realization Center PRC Access has been registered to ISO 9001 under the Norwegian Scheme by Det Norske Veritas DNV since June 1993 ISO 9001 is an international quality standard recognized by more than 90 countries worldwide It is a model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Telefax to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH How Are We Doing Fax no 49 911 526 3545 Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this document Your comments can be of great value in helping us improve our documentation Please use a copy of this page for your comments 1 Please rate the effectiveness of this document in the following areas Excellent Ease of Use Clarity Completeness Accuracy Organization Structure Appearance Examples Illustrations Overall Satisfaction 2 Please check the ways you feel we could improve this document O Improve the overview introduction O Make it more brief concise Improve the tables of contents Add more
282. ised to acknowledged and separately from acknowledged to cleared It is also possible for an alarm to go directly from the raised to the cleared state m Alarm Colors The management system provides a color scheme based on alarm severi ties m Enable Disable of autonomous Alarms on an NE Basis m Fault Localization Provides fault localization across all NEs under the AEM NB control The COMDAC LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the system The indi vidual plug in unit LEDs show the highest severity alarm for the plug in unit Fault localization is performed at AP level m Alarm Log Handling The AEM NB is able to retrieve the NE alarm log via the cut through inter face Performance The Performance Management provides the following functionality features Management Handling of Performance Records Records can be displayed printed and stored in a user defined file Test The Test Management provides the following functionality features Management m Port Test It is possible to request a test for a particular port on a specific application pack m TAP Test It is possible to check the correct cabeling between the communication in terface unit and the test application pack Standby Card Test Scheduling via cut through It is possible to schedule a test to perform a COMDAC side switch or off line diagnostic for the standby COMDAC or the protection m Built in Self Test Each NE performs a built in self test
283. isioned 5 4 15 Remove Secondary Link Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a secondary link Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 Interface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 2 Interface window pops up 2 Click on Remove Secondary in the Secondary Link field to remove the secondary link After removing the secondary link all automatically created entities are automatically removed 5 4 16 Remove V5 Protection Group 2 Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a V5 protection group 2 Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 nterface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 2 Interface window pops up 2 Click on Protection The V5 2 Group 2 Protection window pops up AEM NB R1 3 5 158 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 3 Select an entry in the table an click on Remove The AEM NB will send a delete message to the NE m delete cross connection between V5 protection group 2 and V5 commu
284. ists of a set of functions for controlling the network elements including initialization parameter setting starting and stopping and collecting information about the NE configuration Cross Connection A term for a logical association between two objects e g between a subscriber port and a network interface A physical cross connection may additionnaly be established in the case of a network interface where bandwidth al location is done on a provisioning basis V5 1 In the case of V5 2 the bearer channel allocation is done on a per call basis by the BCC protocol D Date This refers to the day month and year and represents a calendar function that needs to include a calculation for leap years and a capability of determining the day of the week from the date and must be Y2K compliant AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 GL 3 Glossary ee DCN Data Communications Network the communication media and interconnected devices used to exchange manage ment information between the AEM NB the NEs and other OSs Defaults Defaults are the parameter values built into the AnyMedia Access System when it is shipped from the factory The sum of all defaults forms the default configuration Default values are restored upon execution of an Initialize Sys tem command For TL1 commands there are defined defaults for parameter values which are used for parameters not given in the command line Device Driver A program that controls a
285. it when the highest severity alarm is minor Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is near end Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is far end Lit when a fault is detected on the plug in Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm in puts is active Alarm Cut off reminder m Lit when a fault is detected on the AP AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 5 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management Shelf View gt 60 59 Segezezeoge oomzzoo 4 5 AP 6 Ll OOMi DOM CIU AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 Provisioned View ie pus 8 9 AP 10AP 11AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 15 Figure 6 2 Shelf View Audible Indication The user is warned by an audible indication if a new alarm of a defined severity default value critical is reported to the AEM NB Only alarms from NEs within the user domain will be indicated Alarms are audible on the server only The alarm severity which causes audible alarm notification is configurable via the system variables in the ANYMEDIAPATH GUI cfg SystemPreferences ini Table6 3 Configure Audible Notification System Variable Severity Possible States AUDI CRITICAL ALARM SEV Critical On Off default ON AUDI MAJOR ALARM SEV Major On Off defau
286. itch to Protection or Inhibit 3 Press Apply to confirm A Warning window pops up Protection switching may be service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the AEM NB m NE rejects a switch request because the Protetion Mode is Inhibit m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress AEM NB R1 3 5 62 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p o AO 4 Click on tab HDLC to change the window see next section or click on Close to exit the window 5 3 3 7 HDIC Protection Switching Overview For the IO HDLC plug in 1 1 protection applies where IO HDLC plug in serves as the active or primary and the other serves as a protection or standby unit If an active unit fails the failure is detected and service is automatically pro tection switched to the protection unit The protection switching can also be re quested on demand IO HDLC protection switching is only possible in R1 3 Procedure Complete the following procedure to define protection switching for IO HDLC Step Procedure 1
287. ith indentation and quoted are the system responses They are in cluded here to guide the installation procedure 2 2 1 1 Server Side Installation Complete the following procedure to install the AnyMedia server side After you have installed the server side the machine should be to rebooted Step Procedure 1 Go to the directory where the installation script is placed cdrom or disk 2 install_AMEMR15 and press Return AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 installation CopyRight c 1999 Lucent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Pre requisites 1 Before attempting to install the applica tion please read the readme txt file 2 AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 runs on SUN SPARC So laris 2 computers running Solaris 2 5 1 plus se curity and Y2000 patches recommended by SUN and 106255 01 patch 3 TCP ports The following ports MUST be available in order to succesfully run the AnyMedia EM 1570 Orbix daemon uses the TCP port 1570 in order to wait for incoming connections that use the Orbix protocol 1591 to 1641 As Corba servers are activated by the Orbix daemon they are assigned a port so that clients can communicate with it OrbixTalk uses two ports for communications These ports have as default values 5000 and the next one The first can be modified AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 7 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 0 at installation time to
288. ith the in ternal state of the AEM NB database In the event of a AEM NB crash or an inter ruption in communication the AEM NB downloads the current NE configuration from the NE to its database AEM NB R1 3 1 24 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Working with AEM NB p 0 Interactions Faults software or hardware the cause of which the AEM NB cannot eliminate it between Operator self by means of a recovery mechanism must then be handled by the user The and AEM NB AEM NB supports this The AEM NB first displays the fault on the user interface The user then initiates appropriate measures to clear the fault and or to maintain network operation This includes access to faulty network units and the redirection of the network traffic The AEM NB supports both Initiation of Main Sometimes additional maintenance actions are necessary to clear a fault For ex tenance Actions ample some network disturbances can also originate in hardware faults Such hardware faults often require the faulty component to be replaced and this can only be done by maintenance personnel gt NOTE More detailed information about maintenance actions is provided in Chapter 6 Fault Clearance Once the fault has been cleared the alarm is reset automatically 1 4 3 2 Network Modification Types of Network Usually network operation amp surveillance requires structural modifications in the Modification ne
289. k already associated to the physical feeder 5 4 2 41 Create a V5 Link Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit the cross connection data for creating a V5 Link Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt FAC500 gt E1 Feeder in the Network Browser and Create V5 Link via the cursor menu or select Service gt Provisioning gt Create V5 Link via the menu bar The 1 Feeder V5 Link window tab Cross Connection pops up This window can also be reached from the window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 26 or from the E1 Feeder List window cf Chapter 5 4 2 3 page 5 99 by clicking on Add V5 Link from the Add Remove V5 2 Link window Add gt gt cf Chapter 5 4 2 2 page 5 96 or from the V5 1 Set Feeder window OK cf Chapter 5 4 2 1 page 5 94 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 101 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Figure 5 37 E1 Feeder V5 Link Window Tab Cross Connection AEM NB 1 3 5 102 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm The following table shows the options of the cross connection parameters Parameters Buttons Description Cross Connec Physical Feeder This option menu is used to select the tion specific E1 feeder to the V5 Link to be created The list shows all free E1 feeders present in the shelf not yet cross connected to another V5 Link or carry
290. l 2c02 dat Type a valid path for instance OrbixTalk path dat where the package files must be placed and press Return press Return to select default Select owner and group for package files NBR USER GROUP 1 anymedia lucent Enter selection q Type an user group number and press Return User users and Group group have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 2 17 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 4 Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOXTKRT gt y n 26 Type y and press Return Installing OrbixTalk 1 2c02 Runtime for AnyMe dia NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOXTKRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class bin files list gt verifying class lib files list gt verifying class raw 1 Executing postinstall script Making backing copy of the orbix configura tion file OrbixMT path cfg Orbix cfg to Or bixMT path cfg Orbix cfg old Licence
291. l profiles can be used according to the network AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 1 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Terms Used in this Chapter operators needs and scenarios Two sample DCN scenarios are given at the end of this chapter A 3 Terms Used in this Chapter Data Communica tions Network Remote Operations Channel Router Bridge The Data Communications Network DCN consists of the communication media and the interconnected devices which are used to exchange management infor mation between the AEM NB the NEs and other management systems The Remote Operations Channel ROC is a bearer channel that conveys man agement information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is expected to be used when the system is installed at locations where no Ethernet Local Area Network LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists A router is a network layer device that forwards packets from one network to an other based on network layer information OSI layer 3 Data packets are only transferred through the router if the participant is on another port of the router The router can keep data traffic certain parts of a local area network LAN A router is more powerful than a bridge it reduces the traffic on a LAN more than bridge because the IP address is evaluated for traffic control A bridge is a network layer device that passes packets between two or more net work segments that use the same
292. l situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 2 No Continue with step 2 2 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 page 3 31 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Set the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits AEM NB R1 3 6 46 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms mm 6 6 4 2 LOG_DEL_PART Meaning A log type not yet archived has been deleted due to lack of available space Abbreviation LOG_DEL_PART Severity Minor Service affecting No Effects The respective log type can neither be viewed nor archived Possible Cause s There may be a problem or an abnormal situation in the AEM NB or the config urable size limits of the log system have not been chosen correctly Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Archive the remaining logs to prevent them from being deleted 2 Check the AEM NB for problems or abnormal situations Have there any problems or abnormal situations occurred Yes Try to resolve these problems or abnormal situations If this is not possible continue with step 3 No Continue with step 3 3 Check the size limits of the log system Are the size limits set correctly cf Chapter 3 7 2 page 3 31 Yes Call Lucent Technologies Technical Support No Se
293. ll as V5 PSTN User Port service parameters configuration and modification The following table lists all possible entries parameters Whether or not it is possi ble to edit change individual parameters depends on the previous actions If a totally new V5 PSTN User Port is created all parameters can be specified by the user If however this window is invoked from windows in which individual parameters have already been specified such as Physical Drop V5 User Port Address and V5 Interface id it is not possible to change these parameters here at all or only insignificantly AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 119 Configuration Management Provisioning 5 120 Version 1 00 gt NOTE Service Provisioning The parameters in this window can only be modified if the administrative state is Locked Parameters Buttons V5 PSTN User Port Informa tion Description Physical Drop This field displays the physical port id asso ciated to the V5 PSTN User Port shown in this window by means of three option menus m The first one contains drop shelf for this release this field is always drop 1 Thesecond one contains the slot number 1 16 inside NE The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated on the previous list 1 32 Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 When coming from a window where the drop is already de fined the corresponding
294. lt OFF AUDI MINOR ALARM SEV Minor On Off default OFF AUDI INFO ALARM SEV Information On Off default OFF For alarm notification see also Chapter 3 2 3 1 AEM NB R1 3 6 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management p Se 33e A By default the AEM NB causes an audible alarm indication every time new crit ical alarm is reported to the AEM NB Alarm Information For more information on the reported alarm open the Alarm Viewer cf Chapter 6 3 page 6 10 Alarm Acknowledging alarms is described in Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 Acknowledgment Alarm Clearance Clearing alarms is described in Chapter 6 3 5 page 6 21 6 2 4 Provide Access to the Current Alarm Data Alarm Retrieval The user can select lists of alarms filtered by several fields Therefore the user specifies a selection criterion cf Chapter 6 3 4 3 page 6 19 that is taken by the AMS to make the appropriate filters For instance an user can request all the crit ical alarms of an NE or all platform alarms or all alarms which are service affect ing and are raised at the same time The number of alarms stored in the alarm database can be retrieved too The to tal number of alarms can be retrieved as well as the number of alarms per severity number of critical alarms major minor and information User Domains The user domain is the list of NEs and or the AEM NB the user can manage The user d
295. lucent M Enter selection q 57 user group number and press Return AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 29 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 1 2 User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of LuJRERT y n 58 Type y and press Return Installing JRE 1 1 7 for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 as lt LuJRERT gt Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt jre gt 1 lt files list gt verifying class lt symantec gt lt files list gt verifying class report Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install LuJRERT log Installation of LuJRERT was successful OrbixWeb 3 0 In Processing package instance LuOXWRT from stallation lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed OrbixWeb 3 0 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solar
296. m Creation of a DCN plan Communication between the AEM NB and the NEs is carried out via the Data Communication Network DCN A DCN plan should be drawn up be fore provisioning the network to ensure that the AEM NB can reach all NEs and that the administration of the DCN does not lead to an undue increase in performance requirements m NEconnection to the AEM NB server m OS connection to the AEM NB Server optional m Installation of the third party application and AEM NB software on the AEM NB Server Network Status After completion of these steps the network operator has at his disposal a net after Physical work which is connected physically with AEM NB and which is in principle ready Installation for operation AEM NB R1 3 1 20 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Working with AEM NB 1 4 2 Configuration Management Introduction The Configuration Management in accordance with the specific operating condi tions of the network operator is performed by special provisioning actions It is as sumed that the NEs and AEM NB have already been physically connected Provisioning Figure 1 7 provides an overview of the provisioning actions and the text which fol Actions lows gives a detailed description Configuration Management NE and Domain Creation Equipment Configuration Service Provisioning Figure 1 7 Network Provisioning NE and Domain Prior to equipment configuratio
297. m plug in is generally used for circuit pack units CIU IO E1 HDLC and application packs APs which have pre designated slots with the capability to plug in the circuit pack Each fascicle can be identified by its number and contains a chapter which is numbered accordingly e g Chapter 2 is contained in Fascicle 2 The page figure and table numbering begins with 1 in every chapter To be able to identify them easily these numbers are prefixed with the fascicle number For example Figure 2 3 designates the third figure in Fascicle 2 Cross reference conventions are identical with those used for numbering i e the first number in cross references refers to the corresponding fascicle To facilitate the location of specific text passages the guide contains so called keyword blocks These are placed to the left of the main text and contain either a keyword or a word which indicates the contents of a paragraph or group of para graphs Each abbreviation used in this guide is listed in Fascicle AB Abbreviations of the hardcopy version unless it can be assumed that the reader is familiar with this abbreviation Commands and messages are displayed in constant widthfont e g tar xf cdrom cdrom name AnyMediaEMSR10 tar The trademarks used in this document are identified after the title page Trade marks of Lucent Technologies and other companies are in italics and the trade marks modify a noun e g the system name
298. make a backup of a database or directory If you enter none of the optional parameters a backup of all data necessary to restore the AEM NB will be done AEMNB backup h H c p path f file t INC FULL 1 level Parameter description h H Display command syntax h or additional help H Aborts running backup operation p path path is the directory or device to back up Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirectory which is set in the file AnyMediaNBEM cfg f file Location of the backup file file can be a local file or a locally mounted file in case a local tape device is used file specifies a soft label Default file names EM SYSBCK yyyymmad fullbck for full backup EM SYSBCK yyyymmad incbck for incremental backup with yyyy year mm month dd day of the backup t INC FULL Type of backup incremental INC or full FULL Default FULL This parameter is ignored if I 0 is used level Specifies the backup level Files modified since last backup at a lower level are copied level 0 9 This parameter is ig nored if t FULL is used AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 25 System Management Backup and Restore mm ee Restore Files Use the following command to restore a database or directory AEMNB restore h H c p path f file Parameter description h H Display command syntax h or additional help H C Aborts a running restore o
299. me this step is not necessary if the NE Name Information window has been opened via Equipment gt Provisioning gt Date amp Time TCL NE12 Information ele NE Details Synchronization NE Inventory Data Timing Source Control Date amp Tme Current Date 1 1 1970 Time 1 07 AM Get Date Time Close Retrieve Date amp Time Successful x Figure 5 17 Date amp Time Window AEM NB R1 3 5 56 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 3 This tab provides you with the facilities needed to obtain the current date and time used in the NE as well as to change them Two panes are shown Current and New Current The current date and time used in the NE is displayed Use the Get button to retrieve the data from the NE New Enter the Date 1980 January 1 to 2036 December 12 and Time 12 00 am to 11 59 pm in order to change the NE date and time Press Apply to confirm This button is active only if a new date and or new time have been entered 5 3 3 5 Network Element Working Mode Selection of the working mode via GUI is not yet implemented It is only possible via Cut Through interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 page 5 74 using commands Set CFG ISDN SW CFG The system supports an active system configuration which is currently used and a standby system configuration which is set with the comm
300. med Additionally an alarm will be raised in this case 6 4 4 Built in Self Test Test Request Each NE performs a built in self test of plug ins periodically gt NOTE The built in self test is not requested from the AEM NB it will be always started from the NE Procedure If a failure occurs the NE will raise an alarm REPT ALM which contains the AID of the failed plug in The alarm is then visible in the Alarm Viewer of the AEM NB For more information about possible alarms see Chapter 6 6 4 page 6 46 describes AEM NB alarms or refer to the AMAS R1 3 network elements docu mentation describes NE alarms AEM NB R1 3 6 32 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management 6 4 5 TAP Test This command starts a test access point wiring consistency test which checks the correct cabling between the CIU and the test AP This test is only allowed without an active test session The AEM NB automatically creates a line test entity when the TAP100 is equipped and provisioned Procedure Proceed as follows to start a TAP test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Start the TAP test You have the following options to do this Procedure via a Via the Network Browser and the menu bar oe Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt 100 Start the test by selecting Test Manager gt TAP Test from the menu bar
301. med that the NE is configured in duplex con tion figuration Procedure Complete the following procedure to copy the new software from the active COM DAC to the standby COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE Shelf in the Network Browser an Program Copy via cursor menu or select Equipment Program Copy via the menu bar The Program Copy window pops up Program TCL NE13 Copy Non Volatile Program Store From Working COMDAC Standby COMDAC Slot 1 Slot 2 Sw Version 01 03 04 Sw version 01 03 04 OK Close Figure 5 23 Program Copy Window This is a dialogue window requesting information from the user to con tinue There are two panes titled Working COMDAC and Standby COM DAC showing the corresponding slot number and SW versions used in each of the COMDACs Slot Identifies which COMDAC is where e g Working COMDAC in slot 1 and Standby in slot 2 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 69 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p SW Version Obtained from the NE The SW version of the working COMDAC will be taken as the NE SW version 2 Press OK to start the software copy An In Progress window pops Program Copy from COMDAC 1 to COMDAC 2 in Progress 3 Wait until this process is finished 5 3 5 Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS Overview This section describes the backup and restore procedures
302. menus V5 Interface id and V5 Timeslot id only for V5 1 to change the V5 PSTN cross connec tion and click on Apply to confirm remove a cross connection between set the V5 Interface id to None and V5 PSTN User Port and the V5 Inter click on Apply to confirm face remove cross connection between a set the V5 Timeslot id to None V5 timeslot and the user port bearer click on Apply to confirm channel remove a V5 User Port select the corresponding V5 User Port Address and click on Remove A Warning window pops up Removing V5 User Port may be service affecting Do you want to continue exit the window click on the Close button AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 123 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning E SeSe 5 4 5 2 Configure V5 ISDN BRA User Port Overview The ISDN BRA entity represents an ISDN BRA User Port which can be associ ated to a V5 Interface It contains up to two user port bearer channels 64 kbit s for communication signal and a 16 kbit s D channel for protocol information The ISDN BRA User Port can have up to three different types of data data signal ling packet and frame to be carried over any of the communication channels within the V5 Interface On the other hand an ISDN communication path CP represents an information type Ds p and f for one or more ISDN BRA User Ports associated to a V5 Interface V5 User Port V5 Interfac
303. ministrator User Administration Access Policy Administrator and Profiling Management Domain Management Administrator Log Viewer Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Report Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Alarm Viewer Acknowledge Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Clear Administrator Maintenance Configuration NE Creation Administrator Maintenance Manager Equipment and Service Provisioning Administrator Maintenance View Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Test Administrator Maintenance Monitoring Scripts Administrator Cut through Administrator BroadBand EM BroadBand EM Administrator Maintenance Monitoring AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 1 27 Functional Description Network Configuration 1 5 Network Configuration The network configuration depends on the user applications The most probable configurations are described below and illustrated in Figure 1 9 to Figure 1 12 gt NOTE If there are various configuration options of the DCN these are shown in the figures by means of dashed lines The hubs are optional depending on the number of client platforms and NEs 1 5 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN AEM NB server connected to the NEs using a Local Area Network LAN AEM NB Server TC
304. modify or de lete The action to be taken is selected from the menu bar or the object s pop up menu cursor menu By default the first time this window is opened level two is displayed i e all NEs By selecting an NE it is possible to gradually explode this level to display the shelf s slots and ports if any as well as network interfaces and user ports NE Connection The Network Browser displays at the NE level an icon that identifies the connec State tion state of each NE not connected not connected trying not connected can celling connected synchronizing and connected Expand Display Any level of the Network Browser e g NE shelf level can be expanded into its components e g cards clicking on the symbol related to the object to be ex panded Any expanded object can be collapsed clicking on the symbol related to it If the data needed to expand a level are not available e g the connection state of the NE is synchronizing the message data not available will appear in stead of the components The user can collapse this message clicking on the symbol of the object related to the message gt NOTE The display is not automatically refreshed The changes are only visible af ter re expand of the branch clicking on the sign or via menu bar View gt Expand Branch AEM NB R1 3 5 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager W
305. n Keyboard mm 3 3 5 Window Menu A window can be provided with a window menu The window menu allows to alter the appearance of the window or to exit the application represented by the win dow Restore Alt F5 Move Alt F7 Size Alt F8 Minimize Alt F9 Maximize Alt F10 Lower Alt F3 Close Alt F4 Figure 3 5 Window Menu To open the window menu shown in Figure 3 5 click on the window menu button or click with the right mouse button on the window frame The menu options in the window menu are listed in the following table Table 3 3 Window Menu Items and their Function Menu Item Function Restore A window currently being represented as an icon or in its maxi mum size is restored to its original size Move Allows you to move the window interactively on the screen The window frame will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Size Allows interactive resizing of the window Move the cursor appear ing in the window to the window edge you wish to move The edge will follow the mouse movements until you press the left mouse button Minimize The window is shown as an icon Maximize The window is shown its maximum possible screen size Lower If there are several overlapping windows the currently active win dow is shifted to the bottom of the pile Close This function will close the window and remove it from the user in terface exiting the application linked to t
306. n and service provisioning the NEs must be known Creation in the AEM NB To achieve this the following 4 steps are necessary 1 Creation of domains 2 Creation of NEs 3 Assignment of NEs to any domain s 4 Logical connection of NEs All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Equipment NEs can be configured if they are known in the AEM NB The following measures Configuration should be performed m Selection of the timing synchronization source m Selection of the COMDAC simplex duplex and IO HDLC protection scheme m Selection of those slots for which an absence of the plug in will be alarmed only applicable for COMDAC AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 21 Functional Description Working with AEM NB p ll m Provisioning of card types which are inserted in a slot m Configure ISDN in POTS mode via cut through m Provisioning of the protection switching All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Service If the NEs are configured and integrated in the network cross connections can be Provisioning defined The following actions are necessary m Creation of V5 Network Interfaces m Adding of V5 Links to the V5 interfaces m Adding of Primary Secondary Links m Adding of V5 User Ports All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 Network Status After the provisioning phase the NEs can now be controlled and monitored by the after Provisioning AEM NB and start operation amp surveillance
307. n asynchronous state for those inputs that generated the overload Re synchronization of this input retrieves synchronization AEM NB R1 3 GL 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary OS This is any operations system or Element Manager connected to the AnyMedia Access System by some means of communication For the AEM NB the communication method is TCP IP P Password PID Character string used to authenticate the identity of a user The password should consist of 6 to 10 case sensitive alphanumeric characters it should be changed frequently it is stored and transmitted in an encrypted form PCM Highway The COMDAC pack is connected to each AP by the PCM highway which consists of two 4 096 Mbps serial links a 4 096 2 clock and 8 kHz sync signal The AnyMedia Access System uses two PCM highways between the the IO HDLC and each of the 16 AP slots Performance Management For receiving detecting time stamping analyzing displaying and storing performance data Plain Old Telephone Service POTS The conversional 2 wire analog subscriber service Platform The hardware on which any AnyMedia EM module server or client is running Platform Alarm This is an alarm related to the AnyMedia Element Manager application or its hardware software platform It usually refers to an Element Manager function or hardware software platform object PLL Permanent Leased Line These lines may be analog ALL or digital
308. n of which is followed by three dots e g Help a window will open where you may set further parameters Push buttons which alter their designation depending on context are also called Label buttons m Check Box Check boxes have the same function as an on off switch Each time you click on a check box you will change its toggle status A pressed check box containing a check mark means that the option at this position is se lected AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 System Management General Information on Keyboard mm Radio Button Radio buttons have the same function as check boxes with the difference that of various radio buttons of the same group only one can be pressed at a time As with a radio set a set button will pop out when you press the next one in m Text Box Text boxes are used to input text via the keyboard m List Box A list box contains read only data in list form To scroll through a list you have to use the scroll bar at the right of the list box If the list box allows the seletion of entries more than one entry can be selected by clicking on all desired entries once while the Ct r1 key is pressed If more entries are se lected you can deselect a certain one by clicking on it again while the Ctrl key is pressed A range of consecutive entries can be selected simul taneously by clicking on the first entry of the range and then on the last while the Shift key is pressed m Drop Down Li
309. nabled DB changes switch reports and some events of type protection switches lockout and loop back m ASYNC The AEM NB database and the NE configuration data are out of synchronization and or configuration reports are inhibited and or AEM NB configuration message buffer is overflowing For more information refer to the NE documentation for R1 3 5 3 3 1 2 Alarm Information Synchronization Overview In general alarms can be considered independently of each other any alarm re port can be processed by the AEM NB independent of other alarm reports The AEM NB distinguishes two possible states for alarm handling alarms from NEs are enabled or they are inhibited Two NE alarm processing states can be considered m PROC The AEM NB alarm database is consistent with the current NE alarms and alarm and environment alarm reports are enabled m BLOCK The AEM NB alarm database and the current NE alarms are out of synchronization due to alarm buffer overflow The AEM NB alarm data base is only a snapshot of NE alarm information at a certain moment in time For more information refer to the NE documentation for R1 3 AEM NB R1 3 5 46 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p Se A 9 P3 3 Parameter Setting Complete the following procedure to modify the synchronization states for configu ration and alarms and to define the autonomous output states Step Procedure
310. nager in the Access Bar The Configuration Manager win dow and the Network Browser pop up cf Figure 6 8 page 6 24 Some of the test routines can be executed via TL1 commands by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 Please refer to the AMAS R1 3 network elements documentation for a detailed description of TL1 commands including an explanation of the input format re strictions error conditions etc AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 6 23 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management eee eae Figure 6 8 Window Configuration Manager AEM NB 1 3 6 24 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management 6 4 1 User Line Test Precondition Before a line test can be started the following must be done the TAP100 must be equipped and provisioned m the connection between the TAP100 and the CIU must be established with the correct cable from the front of the TAP100 to the backplane The AEM NB automatically creates a line test entity when the TAP100 is equipped and provisioned Procedure Proceed as follows to start a line test and view the test result Step Procedure 1 Start the user line test You have the following options to do this a Via the Network Browser and the menu bar Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 Drop id St
311. nd AEM NB gathers information about faults occurring in the network and forwards this information to the network operator This procedure includes two tasks on the one hand the fault must be identified and on the other hand the fault information must be processed as alarm notifications to be displayed on the user interface Detection of Faults If an NE fault is detected the NE notifies the AEM NB The notification comprises the type of fault and the address of the originating NE The AEM NB detects and processes such a notification automatically AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 23 Functional Description Working with AEM NB p 0 A 9A 9 If the unit of a NE fails that is responsible for the communication with the AEM NB the fault is identified differently No alarm notification will be sent to the AEM NB The AEM NB detects the fault by testing at regular intervals whether the associa tion to the particular NE is dropped In this case the AEM NB itself raises an alarm Alarm Display on A complete alarm overview and a detailed alarm description is provided by the the User Interface alarm viewer All relevant alarm data e g alarm severity are shown Alarm Logs The AEM NB keeps alarm logs to store the alarm notifications Alarm logs are used among other things for long term observations e g of the fault behaviour in the network Alarm logs exist for pending alarms for the alarm history and for clock events in the netwo
312. ndary AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 111 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Secondary Link NE Name Tc1 ne14 V5 Interface id 224 Available Links Selection Physical Feeder V5 Link id e1 1 1 1 Secondary Link id 19 OK Close Figure 5 40 Secondary Link Window The following table shows the view edit options of the Secondary Link window Parameters Buttons Description Secondary Link This list contains all the links that are cross connected to this Selection V5 Interface except the one that is configured as primary link E1 Feeder Displays physical address of the E1 feeders Format e1 shelf slot feeder Possible values e1 1 1 4 1 4 V5 Link id This list contains all the links that are cross con nected to this V5 Interface Possible values 1 255 Secondary Link id This value corresponds either to the current secondary feeder link id or to the selected item in the available link list or is empty in case there is no valid secondary feeder configured and no selection was made Possible values 1 255 OK This button is available only if a change was made i e a feeder has been selected It will use the current data to mod ify the configuration such that the selected feeder will identify the secondary feeder AEM NB R1 3 5 112 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Ser
313. ndations G 703 G 704 EAS Element Access Server This is a CORBA server developed by Lumos Technologies which provides an interface between TL1 messages and CORBA methods EM Domain An assigned collection of Controlled Objects EM Task This represents a subset of the management functions supported by EM applications EM User An entity defined via login name that can be assigned at least to an AEM NB user group EM User Group A logical group of EM users enabled to access one or more domains Permissions to access domains applica tions and tasks are administered on an EM user group basis AEM NB R1 3 GL 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary Embedded Operations Channel EOC A duplicated DSO data link dedicated for exchange operations messages between the LDS and RDT Entity The term entity or object represents an entry in TL1 administrative view i e an entity or object may be entered changed deleted or retrieved by a TL1 command F Far end Any other network element residing in the network complex away from the AEM NB that is the location of the ser vice node is at the opposite end of the feeder E1 for the reported failure Fault Case For some faults e g DCN failure normal working conditions need to be re established within certain time limits These are fault cases that are taken into account Fault Management For detecting displaying storing filtering and routing fault alarm data Flag
314. ndix provides you with information about m introduction m General definitions of terms m Network Element management communications m AnyMedia Element Manager management communications m Recommended DCN configurations A 2 DCN Introduction AEM NB Features Communication of AEM NB and NE DCN 363 211 412 The AnyMedia Access System is designed to provide a full range of narrowband access services like POTS ISDN and Leased Lines The AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB will provide the standard management configuration equipment configura tion fault and testing performance and security functions capabilities to do ser vice management monitoring generate reports and printouts do backup and re store functions for example to improve the customer s day to day business The AEM NB will communicate with the network elements by using TL1 com mands over TCP IP The AEM NB is also prepared in the first release to communi cate with other legacy OSs by means of TL1 northbound interfaces TL1 will be used for request response and autonomous reports commands and FTP will be used for software and database upload download operations The DCN is the communications infrastructure routers WAN links etc needed for communication of the AEM NB with the NEs it manages This manual refers to AEM NB Release 1 3 and AnyMedia NE Release 1 3 For this releases many DCN configurations and protoco
315. nel This check box indicates whether the V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel 2 shall be used for ISDN data V5 Timeslot id B2 This field displays the V5 timeslot id cross connected to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel 2 shown in this window Possible values None 1 31 This option menu None value is allowed is available for selection only when the selected V5 Interface id identifies a V5 1 Interface which has a V5 Link already cross connected and the V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel 2 is ena bled This option menu is used to create change remove set None value the cross connection between the bearer channel 2 and the timeslot AEM NB R1 3 5 128 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Description V5 Signalling gt gt This button provides access to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port Signalling Configuration window where the user is able to create change or remove cross connection s between V5 ISDN BRA User Port and V5 ISDN communication path s packet frame and signalling This button is available only if the V5 ISDN BRA User Port is created and cross connected to a V5 Interface identified in this window by its V5 Interface id Operational Service State Shows the V5 ISDN BRA User Port opera State tional state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get button Possible values Enabled Disabled Command But
316. ng Standby and Not applicable if there is either no IO HDLC inserted in the corresponding slot no IO HDLC provisioned for this slot or the NE is oper ating in POTS only mode or a combination of the previous conditions The Switch button is enabled if the protection schema is en abled In that case pressing the button causes the working standby states to be switched in the NE 3 Press Switch to switch the protection state The Warning window pops Protection switching may service affecting Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the switch operation will be started The infor mation displayed will be updated once the switch is finished to show the current state The following events set off error messages m The NE detects an error in the switch request i e the request cannot be executed due to another activity in the AEM NB m The NE cannot execute the request as the NE software installation is in progress m The forced switch is denied as the protecting slot is locked out AEM NB R1 3 5 64 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration m The manual switch is denied either because there is a higher protection switch active Inhibit Forced or because an automatic switch is already protecting that protected slot 4 Click on Close to exit the window 5 3 3 8 Alarm Configuration Configuring of the alarm severities is only possible via
317. ng Equipment Configuration E 0 7 Parameters Buttons Description Drop Informa This pane contains a table displaying drop information tion It exist only if the Provisioned Apparatus Code is one of the following LPZ100 LPP100 LPU112 TAP100 This information is presented in a 4 column table The table is sorted by Drop A scroll bar allows navigation through the table Rows in the table can be selected to add or edit single row selection or remove single or multiple row selection the corresponding user port s through the use of the Add V5 User Port Edit V5 User Port Remove V5 User Port buttons see below Physical Drop Identifies the drop within the AP Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 The following entries are available only if a port is already cross connected V5 Interface id Shows the V5 Interface id on which the service is provided Possible values 0 16777215 If the drop is used for leased lines Leased is dis played m V5 User Port Address Indicates the id within the layer 3 PSTN port or Envelope Function Address ISDN BRA port of the subscriber only available if the sub scriber is cross connected to a V5 Interface Possible values 1 32767 for PSTN 0 8175 for ISDN BRA If the drop is used for leased lines Leased is dis played m V5 User Port Type Shows the type of service pro vided Possible values PSTN ISDN B
318. ng Service Provisioning mm Subscriber side Network side us 64 kbit s e POTS DENS V5 1 2 Mbits i5 Ei 5 24 lines Application 2 Mbit s NC 8 Pack Interface Cc 3 poo uns g 5 logical 4x E1 Feeder 5 5 V5 link 2 8 72 S 64 kbit s 6 5 es baal d 2 5 12 lines lt Interface moc Soc 8 1 0112 one logical 5 6 V5 link EIS EB a 64 kbit s 2 Mbit s 2 Pots V5 2 L te 3 32 lines ee Interface 4 x E1 Feeder g ac c amp j up to 16 logical E e g LPZ100 58 5 5 V5 links 2 Io Et a oc E o 2419 V5 2 m ISDN 2 e D Interf 5 wo 5 nterface Application AXxETF E 12 lines uk Ko A up to 16 logical x E1 Feeder 8 1 0112 V5 links 5 bas lines Application ae IU E 9 Interface 5 eg LPP100 E 5 2 one logical pu LL link 5 4x E1 Feeder 8 AE 5 1 ISDN 9 12 lines Application aO LE TS 8 1 1 0112 l i DE one logical LL link Figure 5 27 Functional Diagram of Cross Connects Within the AEM NB Ports Lines Each interface contains the provisioning data for its E1 ports 64 kbit
319. nication channel on the primary link and the protecting standby channel on the secondary link of a V5 2 interface each lo cated in timeslot 16 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 GL 9 Glossary ee Protection group 2 This is an optional protection group of a V5 2 interface consisting of up to 3 standby communication channels serving as protecting channels for all logical communication channels not included in protection group 1 Protection switch A switch of the service from the service plug in to the protection plug in A protection switch can be requested man ually or driven by plug in fault PSTN user port Public Switched Telephone Network Delivers analog telephony and data services to a POTS subscriber It is ad dressed by a logical layer 3 address used in the relevant protocols on the V5 x interface With respect to the V5 x interface the layer 3 address uniquely identifies one PSTN user port R Response Time The real elapsed time between detectable start of an action and its completion Restore The process of copying backup files from removable media to a working directory replacing the original files which could have been damaged ROC Remote Operations Channel The bearer channel that conveys management information for a remote system AnyMedia NE The ROC is in tended to be used when the system is installed at locations where no local Ethernet LAN and no separate network e g X 25 exists Rout
320. nication channel m delete cross connection between V5 protection group 2 and V5 timeslot m delete cross connection between V5 protection group 2 and V5 communication channel or V5 timeslot gt NOTE If all protecting and protected units are deleted the protection group is also deleted 5 4 17 Delete V5 Interface To be able to delete a V5 Interface it is necessary previously to delete the follow ing m remove V5 protection group 2 if it is configured cf Chapter 5 4 16 page 5 158 m remove secondary link if it is configured cf Chapter 5 4 15 page 5 158 m remove primary link if it is configured cf Chapter 5 4 14 page 5 157 m delete all V5 communication paths contained in the V5 Interface cf Chapter 5 4 13 page 5 157 m delete all V5 communication channel contained in the V5 Interface cf Chapter 5 4 12 page 5 156 m Gelete all cross connection between V5 User Ports an V5 Interface cf Chapter 5 4 10 page 5 155 m Gelete all cross connections between V5 Links and V5 Interface cf Chapter 5 4 11 page 5 155 Procedure Complete the following procedure to delete a V5 Interface Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning Edit or Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar The V5 Interfaces List window pops up 2 Select a V5 Interface id an cli
321. not This reference can only be changed via the Edit button on the right hand side see below Possible values Yes No Edit This button provides access to the NE Information window Timing Source Control tab cf Chapter 5 3 3 3 page 5 52 to modify the current NE timing source reference AEM NB R1 3 5 30 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 3 O m Parameters Buttons Description Operational Service State Shows the current service state of the NE State Possible values Enabled Disabled Get This button can be used to get the current service state from the NE 2 Use the option menu Physical Feeder to select an appropriate E1 feeder 3 Press the Label button to define the loopback state 4 Click on Apply to confirm the changes If the loopback state has been changed to Set a Warning window pops up Setting Loopback for a feeder can be service affecting Do you want to continue 5 Enter Yes to confirm or No to reject Select tab V5 Link cf next section or click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 31 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p ll 5 3 2 1 3 Configure a COMDAC The COMDAC Common Data and Control plug in performs the main bandwidth management and control functions for the system Procedure Complete the following pro
322. ns When using the mouse you will frequently find the following terms m Click or Select Position the cursor an object and press the left mouse button m Double click Click the left mouse button twice in rapid succession m Drag Move the mouse keeping the left mouse button pressed AEM NB R1 3 3 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management General Information on Keyboard 3 3 3 Different Aspects of the Cursor The aspect of the cursor will vary to indicate the actions you may currently under take using the mouse The following symbols show examples for possible cursor aspects arrow up pointing to the left is used to select objects and to press buttons The I beam is used within a text field to indicate the position where text is to be inserted The clock cursor indicates that in the window where the cursor is positioned a D process requiring a lot of processing time is running and no mouse or keyboard inputs are possible 3 3 4 Basics on Windows The window which contains the input focus evaluates all keyboard and mouse in puts The window containing the input focus is easy to distinguish from other win dows opened on the screen by the different colour of its window frame Use the mouse to direct the input focus to a defined window Click on a position within the window or place the cursor on the window The window shown in Figure 3 3 labels the different window controls which allow the
323. ntil the VIEW task is assigned again AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 4 19 User Management User Groups E SeSe eee The most of the task names are self described but other tasks needs a deeper description Access Policy Management provides the functionality to m create modify delete AEM NB users m create modify delete AEM NB user groups m create modify delete AEM NB domains m create modify delete assignments between AEM NB users and AEM NB user groups m create modify delete access assignments between AEM NB user groups and applications tasks m create modify delete access assignments between AEM NB user groups and domains m modify assignments between domains and controlled objects Domain Management provides the functionality to m modify assignments between domains and controlled objects NE Creation provides the functionality to m create modify delete controlled objects with Type NE 10 Click Applications amp Tasks 11 Select one or more applications the user group shall has access to in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add The corresponding tasks are displayed for selection 12 Select one or more tasks the user group shall has access to in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add 13 Click OK or Apply to save the settings the system ensures that the new user does not yet exist in the system After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the sett
324. o 512 sub scriber lines 64 kbit s Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit a V5 1 Interface Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt V5 Interface List gt V5 Interface id in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service gt V5 Interface List via the menu bar select the de sired V5 Interface id in the V5 Interface List window and click on Edit V5 Interface The V5 2 Interface window pops up This window can also be reached from the V5 Interface Create window by clicking on Create cf Chapter 5 4 1 page 5 83 Figure 5 33 V5 2 Interface Window AEM NB 1 3 5 90 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning gt NOTE The parameters in this window can only be modified if the administrative state is Locked The following table shows the view edit options of the V5 2 Interface window Parameters Buttons Description V5 2 Interface V5 Interface Id Provisioning Variant and Service De Data grade Threshold shows the values as described in Chapter 5 4 1 page 5 83 The option menu HDLC Flag Monitoring can be used to de fine the HDLC Flag Monitoring condition Possible values Yes or No The option menu Administrative State can be used to se lect the administrative state for the V5 2 Interface Possible values Locked Unlocked After creation the interface is always Locked Changing this and confirming is
325. occurred due to a failure condition the AEM NB will not automatically return to the primary reference even if the failure condition has cleared b V5 2 protection switching of communication channels Non Volatile Program Storage NVPS This keeps software program data It resides in the COMDAC Normal Hour Load The average load expected during the lifetime of the system NVDS Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS refers to that part of the database which can be retained even after a power fail ure for example provision parameters NVPS Nonvolatile Program Storage NVPS refers to nonvolatile memory on the COMDAC used to store the load image O Off line Backups These are backups performed automatically via any scheduling mechanisms e g cron file On line Backups These are backups performed on user demand Operator This refers to the AnyMedia Element Manager users Operator Mode Testing initiated by staff from the EM using the NE integrated capabilities These tests can last some time e g some measurements can be executed several times during a test session The results in this mode usually are val ues e g resistance voltage and pass fail decisions Overload The load that causes the system to take drastic measures to ensure its integrity During overload normal system function is disrupted and certain inputs the ones causing the overload are ignored After clearing the overload sit uation the system is left i
326. ocedure 1 Select a row in the Available Time Slots list 2 Use the option menu Comm Channel id to select an appropriate CC id 3 Click on Apply to create a group 2 protection 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 151 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning p SeSe 5 4 6 7 2 Switch V5 2 Group 2 Protection This modal window is used to switch timeslot CC selection within the protection group 2 It can be reached only from V5 2 Group 2 Protection window cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 via Switch Protection NE Name TCL NE40 V5 Interface Id 0 Protected Comm Channel id 80 Protection timeslots E1 Feeder V5 Link Id Timeslot 81 1 4 1 44 31 e1 1 4 2 15 15 1 1 4 2 15 16 Close xl O g Figure 5 56 Switch V5 2 Group 2 Protection Window Parameters Buttons Description Protected This option menu contains the list of all CCs that are in the Comm Channel V5 2 group 2 protection mode Id Protection This option menu contains the timeslots that have no current timeslots CC and are in the protection group 2 of this V5 2 Interface E1 Feeder Displays the physical feeder a timeslot belongs to V5 Link id Displays the V5 Link id associated to the feeder shown in the previous field Timeslot Displays the CC timeslots that are in the protec tion mode and
327. of plug ins periodically m Loopback Test at the feeder side It is possible to set or clear a loopback on particular feeders AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 11 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p 0 1 m Support of the ISDN Line testing Requests a subscriber line testing on a specific list of services e g POTS ISDN etc The subscriber line tests may consist of the following tests foreign voltage measurement insulation measurement capacity measurement dialtone short circuit m Support of CRC test for ISDN drops m Support of Loopback test at the drop side 1 3 1 2 General Components The components of this group do not have or require any knowledge of the NEs the AEM NB is managing They provide a platform on which the other AEM NB components can operate and isolate them from the underlying customer platform OAM Components The OAM components provide operation administration maintenance and secu rity functionality This is based on third party tools i e orbix and a set of specific applications The OAM components provide the following functionality features 1 Operation Administration Maintenance m Standard Reports The system allows the user to generate a set of predefined reports from the information kept by the AEM NB The reports cover the following areas Alarms Equipment configuration Service provisioning NE inventory Perf
328. ofile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 1 This alternative can be used if no local Ethernet LAN is available or the outside plant OSP environment is too severe for a router It does not need a separate DON then it can bea cheaper solution The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure File Transfer Protocol TL1 over TCP TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 HDLC HDLC EO EO Figure A 3 AnyMedia Remote Operations Channel ROC Protocol Profiles For establishing communication between the AEM NB and the NE the NE must be minimally configured with its LAN ROC or CIT parameters as applicable This option is the only available as the AnyMedia Access System does not support re mote boot and remote TCP IP configuration The GSI NB can be used to provide this initial configuration of the NE using the CIT port AEM NB R1 3 A 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration AEM NB Communication Capabilities 5 AEM NB Communication Ca pabilities The AEM NB uses for communicating management data an external system LAN interface The protocol profile in the AEM NB for this scenario is shown in Figure A 4 File Transfer Protocol TL1 over TCP TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 at layer 2 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1
329. og Distribution Media AEM NB R 1 3 distribution media is on CD ROM and the default installation directories are opt lucent Application name refer to Table 2 1 page 2 4 for more information about application names The AEM NB R1 3 distribution is divided into twelve packages as follows m AnyMedia Servers m XAnyMedia Client GUI m AnyMedia Help m Netscape Navigator 4 51 m OrbixMT2 3c patch 02 m OrbixTalk 1 2c patch 02 m OrbixNames1 1c m OrbixWeb 3 0 m ObjectStore5 0 jre1 1 7 symantec ReportPro m LUMOS build 6 m RogueWave 1 0 7 amp 1 1 2 These were built using the application packaging tools offered by Solaris refer to your SUN documentation for more information AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 3 Software Installation and Commissioning General mm ee A package contains a collection of files and directories required for the application and scripts to control how where and if the package is installed Table 2 1 Package Name Application Name AEM NB R1 3 Distribution Description Description LuANY15S AnyMedia Servers The set of CORBA Com mon Object Request Broker Architecture servers con taining the business logic el ement management func tionality LuANY15C AnyMedia Clients An easy to use window based user interface to the element management func tionality LuANY15en LuLUMRT LuNETSCP LuOXNSRT AnyMedia Help Lumos build 6
330. og out A logout from the system can be initiated 3 3 10 Controls in AEM NB Windows Introduction The windows of the AEM NB display certain controls buttons text fields etc These controls are the same in all AEM NB windows and explained in this chap ter Grayed Controls All controls within a window can be activated by clicking on them only if they are not grayed AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 13 System Management General Information on Keyboard V5 ISDN BA User Port NE Name TCL NE13 V5 Isdn User Port Information Physical Drop drop 1 1 1 V5 User Port Address I V5 ISDN User Port Service Configuration Access Digital Section Grading Enabled Administrative State locked Loopback State cer Loopback Selection Set Local Request V5 Isdn User Port Cross Connection V5 Interface id None Check Box 4 B1 channel V5 Timeslot id B2 channel V5 Timeslot id Operational State Service State Figure 3 8 Example of an AEM NB Window Convention 3 14 Version 1 00 The following font is used when a button is mentioned e g Close The following elements are used within windows m Push Button Text Box Option Menu Push Button Each push button is provided with a designation describing its function If you click on the push button the function will be executed If you click on a push button the designatio
331. olumn contains the cursor menus It also shows in parenthesis the name of the window launched if the name of the cursor menu en try and the name of the window are not the same Cursor menu entries and asso Browser entries ciated windows All Create NE NE Information SW Download All gt NE NE Information Cut Thru Cut Through Delete SW Download All gt NE gt Shelf Shelf View Protection Shelf Protection Program Copy All gt NE gt Shelf gt FAC500 Edit O E1 All gt NE Shelf gt FAC500 gt E1 Feeder Edit E1 Feeder V5 Link Create V5 Link E1 Feeder V5 Link only if the E1 Feeder is free AEM NB R1 3 5 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window mm Cursor menu entries and asso Browser entries ciated windows All gt NE gt Shelf gt IDC500 Edit O HDLC All gt NE Shelf gt COM500 Edit COMDAC All gt NE gt Shelf gt DTP500 Edit C U All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100B LPP100B Edit AP LPU112 TAP100 slot id TAP Test only if selected ob ject is TAP card All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ100B LPP100B Edit V5 PSTN ISDN User Port LPU112 TAP100 gt Drop id User Port Test Line Test except for TAP 100 ports CRC Test for ISDN drops from LPU112 Loopback for ISDN drops from LPU112 All gt NE gt V5 Interfaces List Create V5 V5 Interface
332. omains are applicable in the AMS to the alarm retrieval operations and to the alarm notification Each user can only request alarms and the number of alarms that are in the user s domain The client and server security filters fill in this information When the alarm retrieval operation arrives at the alarm server in addition to the normal input data it also contains the user domain information added by the user interface 6 2 5 Managing the Raising of Alarms General An alarm is raised by the NE or by any object of the AEM NB When an alarm is raised its state and the relevant transmitted data cf Chapter 6 6 2 page 6 44 are updated Special care has to be taken if the alarm is raised repeatedly see Repetitive and Fluctuating Alarms In this case the already existing alarm is put into the raised state The user acknowledge identification if available is removed from the alarm This way a raised condition of an existing alarm is considered as a new raising not a new alarm The number of occurrences is increased every time the same alarm is raised Repetitive and A repetitive alarm is an alarm that is raised several times before it is cleared A Fluctuating Alarms fluctuating alarm is an alarm that is raised and cleared alternatively several times in a short period at least less than the AEM NB constant for the cleared alarms see Chapter 6 2 10 page 6 9 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 7 Fault Management and M
333. on Card Type Not applicable Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Possible values LPZ100B LPP100B LPU112 TAP100 LPA910 LPA400 LPA900 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among plug ins to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore that provides information about the functionality of the plug in ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the face plate of the plug in There is a one to one correspond ence between CLEI and ECI codes Provisioning This option menu Provisioned Apparatus Code shows the Info APs available for the NE release If no AP is yet provisioned None is displayed Possible values None or LPZ100 LPP100 LPZ120 LPU112 and TAP100 gt NOTE The Provisioned Apparatus Code may be different form the Apparatus Code shown in the Inventory In formation field The Apparatus Code is related to a certain card e g LPZ100B whereas the Provisioned Apparatus Code is related to a family of cards e g LPZ100 gt NOTE Broadband packs LPA910 LPA400 LPA900 cannot be provisioned via this interface broadband packs are not included in this list AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 41 Configuration Management Provisioni
334. on 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary Z Z port A Z port is circuitry built on a POTS AP to provide a Z interface for analog subscribers Note that more than one Z port is housed on an AnyMedia Access System POTS AP for example the LPZ100 provides 32 Z ports Z port for transmission only This is a Z interface normally used for services other than telephony e g data transmission This type of Z inter face does not support DC feeding and does not support out band signaling This interface can support Analog Leased Line ALL service AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 GL 13 Glossary ee AEM NB R1 3 GL 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Index A Access bar 3 4 Access protection 1 27 Access to the testroutines 6 23 Actions 1 13 3 31 AEM external system LAN interface A 5 AEM NB protocol profiles A 5 Alarm log 1 24 monitoring 1 22 Classification 6 44 Alarm counter 3 4 Alarm cut off function ACO 5 4 Alarm data synchronization 6 42 Alarm interfaces Miscellaneous alarm closure inputs 5 4 Office alarm interfaces 5 4 Alarm management 3 18 Alarm Notification icon 3 4 Alarm Reporting 6 3 Alarm Severities 6 45 Alarm Viewer Alarm Table 6 15 General Information 6 14 Menu Bar 6 12 System management functions 6 18 Toolbar 6 14 Alarm viewer Starting 6 10 Alarms Alarm classification 6 44 Reporting via EM 6 3 Alternate key 3 6 AnyMedia Access Syst
335. on Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p See This window provides the user with the facilities needed to configure the NE timing source The following table shows the view edit options of the Timing Source Con trol window Parameters Buttons Description Provisioned Timing Sync Mode Free Running or Loop Timed Only in Timing Refer case of Loop Timed the next two fields Primary Source ence and Secondary Source are available Primary Source If Timing Sync Mode is Loop Timed the primary source working and optionally the secondary source standby can be selected Possible values any of the available feeders e1 1 1 4 1 4 or station clock Once the source s of synchronization has been selected click on the Apply button Secondary Source If Timing Sync Mode is Loop Timed and Primary Source has been selected the secondary source can be selected as a protection timing synchroniza tion source if the primary source fails Possible values any of the available feeders e1 1 1 4 1 4 or station clock Once the protection source of synchronization has been se lected click on the Apply button gt NOTE The secondary source must be different from the pri mary source Otherwise there is no protection availa ble The Apply button is available only if Timing Sync Mode has been changed Synchronization Mode is Loop Timed and at least one source has been modified gt
336. on the tape at the be ginning of the desired backup as follows Rewind the tape e g with mt f dev rmt 0m rewind and issue tar command see example above until the backup which comes before the one which shall be restored is displayed If you do not know the order of the backups on the tape it can be deter mined as follows Rewind the tape and then repeatedly issue a tar command see example above until the backup to be restored is displayed while you note the order of the backups on tape Then you can position the tape as shown above 3 6 3 3 2 Full Restoration Procedure When the restore command is executed the user must decide which image type should be restored The restore script displays the following message Please enter the type of the image to be restored backup archive Type backup archive and press Enter Copy of Originals Copies of the original databases are saved to allow for a cancellation of the oper ation If such a copy could not be made the appropriate image can nevertheless be restored but a warning is issued For each database for which no copy could be made the following message is displayed Actual DATABASE TYPE is not present or ObjectStore copy operation failed The AnyMedia NB EM system state cannot be recovered if a cancellation is requested Do you want to continue y n Type y and press Enter to continue with the restore procedure If you type n the restore command stops with an error message
337. only successful if the rest of the configuration is complete Operational State Shows the current operational state of this V5 Interface Get This button can be used to get the current operational state from the NE The Apply button is used to confirm the changes in the V5 2 Interface Data field Command but The V5 User Ports button provides access to the V5 User tons Port List window limited to the user ports that are linked to this V5 Interface The Add PSTN button provides access to the V5 User Port PSTN window where the V5 2 Interface is populated and cannot be modified The Add ISDN button provides access to the V5 User Port ISDN BRA window where the V5 2 Interface is populated and cannot be modified The V5 Links button provides access to the V5 2 Add Remove Links window The Signalling button provides access to the V5 Signal ling window for this V5 2 Interface The Protection button provides access to the V5 2 Group 2 Protection window for this V5 2 Interface AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 91 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Description Primary Link If a primary feeder is not yet configured all fields remain empty except the field Configuration State The Physical Feeder shows the id that is configured as pri mary feeder if there is one The V5 Link id shows the link id that is configured as pri
338. onnected to the V5 2 Interface if the Link id is already in use in this V5 2 Interface the command will be rejected In case the V5 Link is not yet defined the E1 Feeder V5 Link window Cross Connection tab pops up cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 1 page 5 101 for that link permitting the modification of the link in a way that cross connecting is pos sible The V5 2 Add Remove Links window is locked until the E1 Feeder V5 Link window will be closed After that the value of the V5 Link id is checked If this is a valid value and the number of V5 links cross con nected to the V5 2 interface is less or equal than 16 the feeder will be cross connected If not it remains in the available list and the cross connec tion operation is cancelled Modification s in the E1 Feeder V5 Link window can not be cancelled Remove This button is active only if a feeder in the Selected Links list has been selected It is used to remove a cross connec tion between a V5 Link and the V5 2 Interface If the V5 Interface is unlocked and the selected feeder is the primary or secondary feeder protection group 1 cf Chapter 5 4 3 page 5 109 the remove function is not avail able AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 97 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 2 Select an appropriate feeder in the Available Links list and click on Add gt gt or double click on the feeder The 1 Feeder V5 Link window
339. ons Applications System Administration Ad Addl gt Log Viewer User Administration amp Profiling Alarm Viewer Configuration Management Broadband EM Tasks Not Assigned Tasks Tasks Assigned Tasks Figure 4 29 Window User Group Profile Applications amp Tasks Select one or more applications in the Applications Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 19 Removing To disable the access to one or more applications click Applications amp Tasks Applications select or more applications in the Applications Assigned field and click move For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 19 gt NOTE The administrator user group has access permissions to all applications and this access permissions cannot be modified gt NOTE If the user select an application in the Applications Assigned field all tasks that are under it will be expanded in the Tasks Assigned and Tasks Not As signed fields AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 25 User Management User Groups Adding To give the selected user group access to further tasks select one or more tasks Tasks in the Tasks Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE For this action please pay attention to Table 4 1 page 4 19 Removing To disable the access to one or more tasks select one or more tasks in th
340. option menu Comm Channel id to select an appropriate CC id 2 Select a row in the Available Time Slots list 3 Click on Apply to cross connect the selected CC with the selected time slot 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 143 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 6 6 Cross Connect Communication Path with Communication Channel This modal window is used to create a CP to CC cross connection It can be reached only via Add CP CC from the V5 Signalling window cf Chapter 5 4 6 page 5 132 Crossconnect with V5 Interface Id 1777 Comm Path None Comm Channelld 1 Figure 5 53 Crossconnect CP with CC Window Parameters Buttons Description Comm Path This option menu contains the list of all CPs that are not yet cross connected to the CC Possible values 1 9 for V5 1 1 146 for V5 2 This option menu contains all the CCs Possible values 0 65503 This button is used to cross connect the CP to the CC if there is no other CP of the same type linked to that CC Comm Chan nel Id Apply This button is enabled only when both previous data have been specified AEM NB R1 3 5 144 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a cross connection be
341. ormance The reports are available for displaying printing and saving in a postscript file m Backup and Restore of system relevant data Relevant data includes all information necessary to restore the situation in case of an AEM NB crash m AEM NB Software Upgrades Provides an established release cycle for AEM NB software upgrades a way that minimizes incompatibility with NE software releases and allows for upgrades to provide for OS compatibility This upgrade does not affect the services provided by NEs AEM NB R1 3 1 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p See 4 m Log Administration The logs are capable of being printed and visualized The system limits the size of the system logs It is possible to make backups of the logs and to re move them from the system There are logs for Actions Contains all the information on actions performed by users or the AEM NB and which imply changes in the AEM NB configuration equipment NE configuration service and subscriber configuration access to the AEM NB print reports and backup amp restore i e all operations triggered by the user or the AEM NB and all subsequent actions The results of operations are also logged in the actions log System Internal Events Contains all internal events or actions which report unusual changes in the configuration and state of the AEM NB or indicate err
342. ors that occurred in the AEM NB Autonomous Reports Contains all information useful for the equipment supplier about alarms NE and platform the performance and all TL1 messages sent from all managed NEs and which imply changes in the data base m Possibility to sort logs It is possible to show items in the logs while visualizing saving or printing 2 Security m Possibility of creating deleting modifying AEM NB Users The AEM NB uses the security mechanisms provided by the SOLARIS Op erating System m AEM NB Security Privilege Levels Allows at least three privilege levels within the managed domain This is mapped to the NE privilege levels accordingly Administrator has all the permissions Maintenance has configuration and monitoring permissions Monitoring has alarm monitoring and testing permissions m NE User Security Privilege Levels It is possible to administer the NE users and the privilege levels via the cut through interface m User Access is authenticated through User Name and Password m Single Login to Access the Domain Enables an authorized user to access multiple NEs simultaneously e g multiple windows using a single login and password AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 13 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p 0 Domain Partitioning Enables the NEs managed by the AEM NB to be partitioned into separate security domains and permits users
343. ort bearer channel shown in this window This option menu is available for selection only when the se lected V5 Interface id identifies a V5 1 protocol interface which has a V5 Link already cross connected Only available timeslots of type B are shown and only for V5 1 Possible values None 1 31 This option menu is used to create change remove set None value the timeslot cross connected with the user port bearer channel Service State Shows the V5 PSTN User Port operational state obtained from the NE through the use of the Get but ton Operational State Possible values Enabled Disabled Command But tons The Apply button is used to accept the different changes and keeps the window in view for further use The Remove button can be used to remove a V5 User Port AEM NB R1 3 5 122 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm If you want to then add a new V5 PSTN User Port enter the values for Physical Drop and V5 User Port Address define the parameters in the V5 PSTN User Port Service Configuration field use the option menus V5 Interface id and V5 Timeslot id only for V5 1 to define the desired V5 PSTN cross con nection and click on Apply to confirm edit an already existing V5 PSTN User define the parameters in the V5 PSTN Port and the related options User Port Service Configuration field use the option
344. ort bearer informa tion Communication channels C are used to transport all other information All V5 timeslots are initially provisioned for bearer service B CC ID Displays the identifier of the cross connected com munication channel There is no value if the type of channel is B type nor if there is no communication channel cross connected Possible values 0 65503 gt NOTE Although 65503 is the maximum value only 3 commu nication channels can exist for a V5 1 Interface and 47 for a V5 2 Interface Operational Service State Displays the operational state of the V5 Link State Possible values are Enabled Disabled Get This button can be used to obtain the operational state from the NE Apply This button applies the changes made 3 Define the parameters in the V5 Link Data field 4 Define the parameters in the Service Degradation field 5 Click on Apply to confirm AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 107 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm ee If the V5 Interface id was entered the link will be cross connected if the link id is unique within the V5 Interface V5 2 only Cross connect a V5 link If the V5 Interface id was modified to None the link is removed from that interface This is legal in certain cases only that will be checked by the NE In this case a warning message is displayed before executing the op eration delete cross connection bet
345. ossible values are Locked and Unlocked After creation the default value is unlocked Protection State shows whether the selected HDLC is working or not Possible values Working Standby and Not Applicable pro tection mode is disabled The HDLC Protection button provides access to the Shelf Protection window tab IO HDLCO to allow you to modify the protection scheme or to perform protection switching Apply This button is used to confirm the changes It is available only when some changes have been made on the window i e change in Provisioned Apparatus Code or Adminis trative State AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 37 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p If you want to then change the provisioned card type use the option menu Provisioned Card Type and click on Apply modify the protection scheme press HDLC Protection The Shelf Protection window pops up cf Chapter 5 3 3 7 2 page 5 63 change the administrative state use the option menu Administration State and click on Apply When chang ing from Unlocked to Locked a Warning window pops up displaying the follow ing message Changing the IO HDLC administrative state to Locked may be service affecting in mixed POTS ISDN system configurations if no protection switch is possible Do you want to continue If you decide to continue the change operation will be st
346. otCleared OwnedAck Clear AllAck or All Default value Last24h gt NOTE The following parameters are used for alarms notification purposes The notification can be either a visual effect in the AnyMedia GUI main win dow the flag icon changes to up state and the count of notificated alarms is increased or and audio effect a beep sound is generated only on the server VISUAL CRITICAL ALARM SEV enable disable visual notification of critical severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AEM NB R1 3 B 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Variables and Configuration Parameters Configuration Parameters mm Name Description VISUAL_MAJOR_ALARM_SEV enable disable visual notification of major severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value false VISUAL_MINOR_ALARM_SEV enable disable visual notification of minor severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value false VISUAL_INFO_ALARM_SEV enable disable visual notification of infor mation severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value false AUDI CRITICAL ALARM SEV enable disable audio notification of critical severity alarms Range of values true to enable or false to disable Default value true AUDI MAJOR ALARM SEV enable disable audio notif
347. oup number and press Return User lt users gt and Group lt group gt have been se lected Using lt gt as the package base directory Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOX23RT gt y n 15 Type y and press Return Installing Orbix 2 3c02 Runtime for AnyMedia R1 5 as lt LuOX23RT gt AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 13 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 3 MHPI Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class bin files list gt verifying class cfg files list gt verifying class lib Executing postinstall script You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install LuOX23RT 1log Installation of LuOX23RT was successful OrbixNames 1 1c Processing package instance LuOXNS from Installation lt gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed OrbixNames 1 1 Runtime for AnyMedia R1 5 sparc solaris Version 1 1c Run Time OK No previous
348. ources of synchronization In other words the standby source becomes the working source and the working source becomes the standby source gt NOTE During the switch operation the Apply and Get but tons are disabled All fields will be updated as result of this operation 3 Use the option menus to select appropriate values for Timing Sync Mode Primary Source and Secondary Source 4 Press Apply to confirm the changes 5 Press Get to retrieve the active timing references AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 55 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p ll 1 6 Press Switch to switch between the working and standby sources of syn chronization 7 Click on another tab to change the window or click on Close button to exit the window 5 3 3 4 Set Date and Time Overview A function required by the AEM NB is provisioning the date and time of the man aged NEs i e the user is able to set the NE Date amp Time Also it is possible for the AEM NB to retrieve the date and time of any NE Procedure Complete the following procedure to set the date and time Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE in the Network Browser and NE Information via the cur sor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit or Equip ment gt Provisioning gt Date amp Time via the menu bar The NE Name Information window pops up 2 Click on tab Date amp Ti
349. overwritten 3 7 3 Log Viewer Window The logs can be viewed by means of the Log Viewer application The logged en tries in the Log Viewer cannot be edited Start Log Viewer The Log Viewer is started up by clicking on the log viewer icon in the access bar After start up the default log type is displayed this value can be configured de fault Actions Access Permission The log types which are visible to you depend on your user group The following table shows the log types which the different user groups are allowed to see Table3 22 Visibility of a Log Type for a Certain User Group Log type Visible for user group Actions Administrator Maintenance System Internal Events Administrator Maintenance Autonomous Reports Administrator Maintenance Monitoring AEM NB R1 3 3 32 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Log Management zi Log Viewer EE File Options Help Log Selection Type Actions Apply Date 21 7 1999 Displayed Log Type Actions Displayed Date 21 7 1999 Date amp Time Login Conditions Object Method 1999 07 21 10 30 58 EM START 1 Activate connection Name TCL NE12 1999 07 21 10 30 59 EM END_SUCCESS 1 Activate connection NE Name TCL NE12 1999 07 21 10 31 10 START 1 Alarms synchronization process NE name 12 1999 07 21 10 31 10 START 1 Incremental synchronization process NE name 12 1888 07 21
350. ow frame The cursor menu is not available in all windows The functions which can be executed using this cur sor menu depend on the application of the respective window Select Menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu Option Step Procedure 1 Press the right mouse button 2 Move the cursor onto the desired menu option 3 Click the left or right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and click somewhere outside the menu AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 11 System Management General Information on Keyboard p ll 9 A9 3 3 8 Workspace Manager General After logging in to the operation system SUN Solaris the workspace manager window is situated at the bottom of the screen offering a range of functions and in formation A function is initiated by clicking the respective area of the workspace manager In Figure 3 6 only an example of the workspace manager is given as the entries are configurable Personal Applications Lock Screen Log Out e g Terminal Eu ELI e E RM 1M o gt Pe fal Calendar Editor Other Workspaces Printer Tools Trash Can Clock File Manager Mailtool Workspace Solaris Help Configuration Figure 3 6 Workspace Manager Functions For a detailed description of the offered functions please refer to your Sola
351. p Surveillance 1 22 1 4 4 System Security and User Groups 1 27 1 5 Network Configuration 1 28 1 5 1 AEM NB Server without Clients and external OS LAN 1 28 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 Contents 1 5 2 AEM NB Server with Clients and without external OS LAN 1 29 1 5 3 AEM NB Server without Clients and with external OS WAN 1 30 1 5 4 AEM NB Server with Clients and external OS WAN 1 31 2 Software Installation and Commissioning 2 1 2 1 General 2 1 2 1 1 Introduction 2 2 2 2 Installation Procedure 2 6 2 2 1 Full Installation 2 6 2 2 2 Installing Individual Packages 2 40 2 2 8 Cancel Installation 2 43 2 2 4 Remove AnyMedia Package Installations 2 43 3 System Management 3 1 3 1 Overview 3 1 3 2 System Access 32 3 2 1 Login to Operation System 3 2 3 2 2 Logout from Operation System 3 3 3 2 3 AEM NB Access Bar 3 4 3 2 4 Capacity 35 3 3 General Information on Keyboard and Windows 3 6 3 3 1 Keyboard 3 6 3 3 2 Mouse 3 6 3 3 3 Different Aspects of the Cursor d 3 3 4 Basics Windows 3 7 3 3 5 Window Menu 3 10 3 3 6 3 11 3 3 7 Cursor Menu 3 11 3 3 8 Workspace Manager 3 12 3 3 9 Workspace Menu 3 12 3 3 10 Controls AEM NB Windows 3 13 3 4 Application Start Up and Shutdown 2217 AEM NB R1 3 IV Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Contents 3 4 1 General on Applications 3 17 3 4 2 AEM NB Server Applications 3 18 3 4
352. page 3 21 Opens the Print Dialog window to set parameters for the print out File gt Print gt Print Window Prints a screenshot of the whole window cf Chapter 3 5 page 3 21 Opens the Print Dia log window to set parameters for the print out Shows how it will be printed if the Print Table option is used Opens directly the Print Preview window File gt Print gt Preview File gt Exit Closes all windows of this application Help gt On Window Displays online help for this window Help gt Index Displays online help index AEM NB R1 3 3 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Application Start Up and Shutdown 3 4 Application Start Up and The following tables gives definitions of terms used in this chapter Set of server processes that perform a certain functional ity Server applications provide services for client applica Set of processes that use the services provided by the server applications e g GUI and Northbound users The minimum set of server applications that have to run together to provide the minimum functionality of the AEM NB These applications must run to allow the Level 2 Ap plication to be started up These applications are shown as only one running application If this group is shut down the AEM NB is shut down The server applications that can be started up and shut down individually without affecting the functioning of oth
353. peration p path path is the directory or device to which the restored data should be written Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirectory which is set in the file Any MediaNBEM cfg f file Location of the backup file file can be a local file a locally mounted file or a local tape device Archive Files Use the following command to archive log files This function is primarily intended to archive the AEM NB log files If you enter none of the optional parameters the AEM NB log files will be archived AEMNB archive h H c p path f file Parameter description h H Display command syntax h or additional help H Aborts a running archive operation p path path is the directory or device to archive Default value of the variable OAM backup backupDirectory which is set in the file AnyMediaNBEM cfg f file Location of the backup file file can be a local file or a locally mounted file in case of a local tape device is used file speci fies a soft label Default file name EM SYSARCH yyyymmdadd arc with yyyy year mm month dd day of the archive 3 6 3 Backup Archive and Restore Proce dures This section gives an overview of the steps necessary for a backup archive or re store operation Prerequisite for The backup archive or restore commands require that some path system vari Backup Restore ables are properly set This is done by the command AnyMediaNBEM sh during
354. pment Configuration cf Chapter 5 Log Management cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 31 m Users amp Groups cf Chapter 4 m System Administration cf Chapter 3 4 page 3 17 m Alarm Monitoring cf Chapter 6 m Alarm Notification cf Chapter 3 2 3 1 page 3 4 m Broad Band Element Management m Help Start applications To start an application click on the respective icon Access Control If an icon of the access bar is grayed you are not allowed to access this applica tion or the application is not running Whether access is granted or denied de pends on your user group membership The Alarm Notification and Help icons are always accessible 3 2 3 1 Alarm Notification Icon Description The Alarm Notification icon displays a flag and a counter The flag is raised if new alarms are received The counter is increased every time an alarm is received By default only critical alarms affect the Alarm Notification icon The counting starts with 0 every time the access bar is started The behavior of the Alarm Notifica tion icon can be changed so that it displays alarms with other severities AEM NB R1 3 3 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management System Access mm Reset Counter If you click on the Alarm Notification icon the flag is lowered and the counter re set Customize Alarm The behavior of the Alarm Notification Icon can be customized It reports only Notification alarms for which the corresponding variable se
355. pply Close Figure 5 49 Add Communication Channel Windows Parameters Buttons Description Comm Chan This field is used to enter the CC id that shall be created nel id This value is only taken into account for V5 2 Possible values 0 65503 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 137 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Description Available Time This scrolling list contains the C channel time slots that Slots not in the protection mode and have no CC linked yet E1 Feeder Displays the physical feeder a time slot belongs to V5 Link id Displays the V5 Link id associated to the feeder shown in the previous field Timeslot Displays the CC time slots that are not in the pro tection mode and have no CC linked yet Possible values None 15 16 31 Apply This button is used to create a CC with the given id It is only enabled when a CC id is specified Procedure Complete the following procedure to add a communication channel Step Procedure 1 Enter an appropriate CC id only for V5 2 2 Select a row in the Available Time Slots list 3 Click on Apply to add a CC If this is successful and a time slot is speci fied the new CC will be cross connected to that time slot 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 5 138 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning
356. protection Switch Protection This button provides access to the Switch V5 2 Group 2 Protection window modal cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 2 This button is only available when the V5 Interface is Un locked AEM NB R1 3 5 148 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning p 4 4 363 211 412 If you want to Service Provisioning then add a group 2 protection to make a protection switch for a com munication channel remove delete a already defined pro tection structure exit the window click on Add Protection The Add V5 2 Group 2 Protection window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 1 click on Switch Protection The Switch V5 2 Group 2 Protection for CC window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 2 select the desired row in the V5 2 Group 2 Protection Table and click on Remove click on the Close button AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 5 149 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning p SeSe e 5 4 6 7 1 Add V5 2 Group 2 Protection This modal window is used to add either a timeslot protecting or communication channel protected to the protection group 2 i e to create a protection unit It can be reached only from V5 2 Group 2 Protection window cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 via Add Protection Add V5 2 Group 2 Protection NE Name 5950525 V5 Interface Id 224 Comm Channel ld None Available Time
357. protocol OSI layer 2 The network segments appear as one segment to protocol levels higher than the data link layer The bridge recognizes with the help of the MAC address which LAN component is con nected at which port of the bridge Data packets are only transferred over the bridge if the participant is at another port of the bridge With a bridge data traffic can be kept from a certain part of a LAN Built in Self Test BIST This is a procedure executed by each plug in circuit pack either after power up or on demand The task is to check the functions of the hardware Burst Load Load that can occur in certain well known circumstances where response times are no longer guaranteed but queues handle excess traffic After removing the causes of the burst load and a certain settling time normal oper ation is resumed During burst load there is a graceful degradation no loss of information only a queueing occurs to defer the load to a later moment Busy Hour Load Maximum load that is expected to occur in real life that must be handled with normal response times AEM NB R1 3 GL 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Glossary Circuit This refers to the devices and functions built on or provided by an AP for one port In some documents this is also called facility The subscriber line is not included CIT Craft Interface Terminal A local RS232 connection on the AnyMedia access system to which a PC GUI can be connected Client
358. r selection the other boxes show the possible menus that can be reached by using the menu bar or the cursor menu The arrows represent the order in which the windows can be opened AEM NB R1 3 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p To open the COMDAC Shelf Protection window proceed as follows m Select ALL gt NE gt Shelf via the Network Browser and select Equipment gt Protection via the menu bar or m Select ALL gt NE gt Shelf via the Network Browser and select Protection via the cursor menu Examples AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 15 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration SW Download Cut Through NE NVDS Backup NE NVDS Restore v NE Name Information Shelf View Protection Slot Details COMDAC COMDAC NE Details Synchronization Date amp Time NE Inventory Data Timing Source Control to E1 Feeder V5 Link window Service Provisioning cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 page 5 101 to V5 PSTN User Port window or V5 ISDN BRA User Port window Service Provisioning cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 or Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 Object Windows with C Network Browser several tabs Window Set of windows Figure 5 3 Screen Navigation for Equipment Configuration AEM NB R1 3 5 16 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412
359. r the router bridge for supporting this scenario are m Minimal WAN interface requirements The router bridge must have one or more channelized 2 Mbit s E1 inter faces ITU G 703 G 704 Both the symmetrical 120 ohms resistive bal anced or the coaxial 75 ohms unbalanced resistive versions of the E1 in terface should be supported depending on the customer needs An IP ad dress may be assigned to each time slot or channel group HDLC framing needs to be supported at the layer 2 of every slot inside the channelized E1 interface AEM NB R1 3 A 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations mm m Minimal LAN interface requirements The router must have one or two for cascading purpose Ethernet IEEE 802 3 10Base T ports In case of two LAN ports LAN to LAN routing should be supported Provisioning needs for the router bridge are the following m E1 interface functionality line code framing type etc m Time slot mapping each needed serial interface related to one ROC will be a channel group mapped on a time slot of the channelized E1 m Protocols and encapsulations m 1 for IP routing routing tables m Ethernet media The initial provisioning of a router bridge is typically performed by a VT100 ANSI terminal connected to a RS 232C port When the IP address of the router is pro visioned the router may be configured via LAN TE
360. r will be show Figure 4 33 Access Bar 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up User administration O File View Help Figure 4 34 Menu Bar of Window User Administration AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 29 User Management Controlled Objects C ne 3 Select View gt Controlled Objects The Controlled Objects Table appears 5 Figure 4 35 Controlled Objects Table AEM NB 1 3 4 30 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Controlled Objects 4 Select one controlled object type in the Controlled Object Type field and click Open The Controlled Object Profile window pops up with the current information about the selected controlled object Controlled Object Profile Window Controlled Object Type NE value EI Domains Not assigned Domains Assigned Domains Domains Year2000 Figure 4 36 Window Controlled Object Profile Adding to To assign the selected controlled object to further domains select one or more Domains domains in the Domains Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create domains see Chapter 4 3 1 page 4 8 Removing from To remove the selected controlled object from domains select one or more do Domains mains in the Domains Assigned field and click Remove gt NOTE The EM object generated by default is protected against deletion Click OK or Apply to save the changes
361. raising m Manage cleared alarms m Manage acknowledgment of alarms m Synchronization of the alarm data per NE m Alarm log handling m Periodical deletion of cleared alarms 6 2 2 Maintain Up To Date Alarm Information During the alarm life time the AEM NB updates the following information The date and time of the last status change The last alarm status change The last user id which acknowledged an alarm The number of times the alarm has occurred between the first occurrence and now If an acknowledged alarm is raised again the status for this alarm is changed from acknowledged to raised Additionally the acknowledge data user Id if available is removed from the alarm information 6 2 Version 1 00 08 99 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Management Raise Acknowledge ACKNOWLEDGED Veet Acknowledge Clear Figure 6 1 Life Cycle of an Alarm 6 2 3 Alarm Notification to the User Overview Any time incorrect data out of range values inappropriate value types etc is entered at the Graphical User Interface GUI a new alarm occurs or the status of any alarm changes to raised again an alarm message is reported to the AEM NB The alarms are indicated if defined visually and acoustically Visual Alarm Indi The occurrence of a new alarm of a defined severity default value critical is vis cation ually indicated in different ways m Notification icon
362. rame contains two option menus which show the filter cf Chapter 6 3 4 3 page 6 19 and view cf Chapter 6 3 4 2 page 6 18 currently being used In this two option menus the user can select filters and views General Information Critical 11 Major 23 Minor 16 Information Jo Total 50 View View 1 Filter Alarms for the last 24 hours Figure 6 5 Frame General Information 6 3 3 4 Alarm Table The last section in the Alarm Viewer window is a table that contains zero or more alarms belonging to a domain This table allows the user to sort the alarms cf Chapter 6 3 3 4 2 page 6 17 by clicking on a specific table header The user also can select them for acknowledgment or clearance The mechanism to acknowl edge or clear is the same the user has to select one or more alarms After select ing the alarms click on Acknowledge or Clear in the tool bar or select Actions Acknowledge or Actions Clear via the menu bar Alarm Object Id Severity Date amp Time Last 14 NE ASSOC LO ASSOC Cleared 26 1 1999 10 47 28 LOG DEL FULL AnyMedia Ao TASK Raised 26 1 1999 10 56 AM 32 LOG DEL FULL AnyMedia Act TASK Raised 26 1 1999 9 20 AM 33 LOG DEL FULL AnyMedia lee_TASK Raised 26 1 1999 8 56 35 Sw_VR_ILLEGAL ASSOC Cleared 25 1 1989 10 47 36 TL1_COMM_D NE3 ASSOC Cleared 26 1 1999 10 47 37 LOG_DEL_PART AnyMedia lee_TASK
363. ready created and cross connected to a V5 Interface the corresponding value is displayed and can not be changed If the user port is created and not cross connected the dis played value is editable In all the other cases this field is empty and editable 08 99 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons Description V5 ISDN User Access Digital Section This parameter indicates whether Port Service Configuration or not there is an access digital section at the ISDN BRA port present Grading This option menu can be used to define whether performance measurement grading messages should be sent to the connected LE Possible values Enabled Disabled Administrative State The option menu can be used to de fine the administrative state of the User Port Possible values Locked Unlocked Shutdown default value is Locked at creation time Loopback State This filed displays the current loopback state Clear or Set This state can be changed via the Re quest button on the right hand side see below Loopback Selection This option menu is used to define the ISDN BRA port loopback It is only enabled if a drop is se lected Possible values Set Local Loopback switched locally on AP Set Reg Loopback switched at regenerator Set NT Loopback switched at network termination Clear Clear the loopback Request This button is used to perform the
364. ree of operational safety resulting from many years of development expe rience and continuous stringent quality checks in our company The system is safe in normal operation There are however some potential sources of danger that cannot be completely eliminated In particular these arise during the m Opening of housings or equipment covers m Manipulation of any kind within the equipment even if it has been discon nected from the power supply m Disconnection of optical or electrical connections through possible contact with m Live parts m Laser light m Hotsurfaces m Sharp edges or m Devices sensitive to electrostatic discharge AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 XV About this Document OO 77 6 2 General Safety Requirements In order to keep the technically unavoidable residual risk to a minimum it is imper ative to observe the following rules m Installation configuration and disassembly must be carried out only by expert personnel and with reference to the respective documenta tion Due to the complexity of the unit system the personnel requires special training m Theunit system must be operated by expert and authorized users only The user must operate the unit system only after having read and under stood the chapter on safety and the parts of the documentation relevant to operation For complex systems additional training is recommended Any obligatory training for operating an
365. registration was accepted for otd Licence registration was accepted for otmsd Licence registration was accepted for otdsm 555555555555 555225225255 555555555355 INSTALLATION WARNINGS For Orbix OrbixTalk to be able to find Or bix cfg you must set the environment variable IT_CONFIG PATH to its location ie lt OrbixMT path gt cfg Orbix cfg If the OrbixTalk binaries fail with the mes sage password invalid The licence install utility will need to be run manually Enter the following command OrbixMT path bin install licence OrbixTalk path bin otd code AEM NB R1 3 2 18 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation Commissioning Installation Procedure p OrbixTalk 1 2c02 is now successfully in stalled You have the installation logfile in tmp EM Install LuOXTKRT log Installation of LuOXTKRT was successful ObjectStore 5 0 In Processing package instance LuOSRT from stallation lt XXXXXXX gt gt NOTE Shows the path where the package is installed ObjectStore 5 0 SP3 Runtime for AnyMedia NB EM R1 5 sparc solaris 5 0 SP3 Run Time Enter install directory opt lucent OS50 5 3 q 27 a valid path where the package files must be placed and press Re turn press Return to select default Using lt gt as the package base directo
366. remove assigned user groups from the selected domain select one or more User Groups user groups in the User Groups Assigned field and click Remove Click OK or Apply to save the changes After clicking OK the window will be closed If you want to reject the changes click Close before OK or Apply 4 3 3 Delete Domains Introduction This chapter describes the process to remove a domain from the AEM NB Before removing a domain please pay attention to the following remarks m The AEM NB administrator must have a system login m Before deleting a domain the AEM NB ensures that there are no controlled objects assigned to this domain If this is the case the deletion request will be rejected m After adomain deletion all related information will be removed from the AEM NB This does not include the devices NEs or any other type which are grouped in that domain or their information Furthermore the access permission will be automatically unassigned from the user groups that had access to this domain Procedure Complete the following procedure to remove a domain Step Procedure 1 Login as AEM NB administrator and start the AEM NB access bar as de scribed in Chapter 3 2 1 The access bar will be show Figure 4 17 Access Bar AEM NB R1 3 4 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 User Management Domains 2 Select the third icon The User Administration window pops up Oe Figure 4 18 Menu Bar of Window
367. represents the current availability status of an associated resource or service in the NE from the management point of view e g memory administration maintenance Side Switching This refers to the operation of deactivating the active core entity and activating the standby core entity COMDAC and IO HDLC circuit packs Simplex mode One COMDAC is equipped in the AnyMedia Access System and controls the whole system If this COMDAC fails the system also fails Software Download The transport of the information required to upgrade update a given NE s generic program Software package At the architectural level software packages are the primary vehicle for functional partitioning of the system Soft ware packages are configuration units of the system SPLL Semi Permanent Leased Lines A service in which resources are used permanently for the transmission of data between two points The switch is responsible for setting up this service System AEM NB software It provides a set of services allowing an operator to manage the AnyMedia NE System Failure Any problem that prevents the AEM NB from continuing to work T TAS Terminal Access Server This adapts local area networks LAN to wide area networks WAN TASs have the ability to integrate remote net work elements in a local network TASs support different LAN protocols e g Ethernet and WAN protocols e g PPP TCA Threshold Crossing Alert A crossing of a parameter t
368. requested oper ation option menu Loopback Selection AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 127 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons Description V5 ISDN User V5 Interface id This field displays the V5 Interface id this Port Cross Con user port is cross connected nection Possible values None 0 16777215 When coming from V5 Interface window via Add ISDN this field is non editable If the V5 ISDN BRA User Port is cross connected to a V5 In terface this field is editable allowing to change it only to None value for deleting the cross connection In all the other cases an option menu with all V5 Interface ids is offered for selection B1 Channel This check box indicates whether the V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel 1 shall be used for ISDN data V5 Timeslot id B1 This field displays the V5 timeslot id cross connected to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel 1 shown in this window this field is only available for V5 1 Possible values None 1 31 This option menu None value is allowed is available for selection only when the selected V5 Interface id identifies a V5 1 Interface which has a V5 Link already cross connected and the V5 ISDN BRA User Port bearer channel 1 is ena bled This option menu is used to create change remove set None value the cross connection between the bearer channel 1 and the timeslot B2 Chan
369. rface 5 94 5 4 2 1 Add a V5 1 Feeder 5 94 5 4 2 2 Add a V5 2 Link 5 96 5 4 2 3 Configure E1 Feeder List 599 5 4 2 4 Configure E1 Feeder V5 Link 5 101 5 4 2 4 1 Create a V5 Link 5 101 5 4 2 4 2 Edit V5 Link 5 104 5 4 3 Add Primary V5 2 Links 5 109 5 4 4 Add Secondary V5 2 Link 5 111 5 4 5 Add V5 User Port 5 114 5 4 5 1 Configure V5 PSTN User Port 5 118 5 4 5 2 Configure V5 ISDN BRA User Port 5 124 5 4 5 2 1 V5 ISDN User Port Signalling Configuration 5 181 AEM NB R1 3 5 II Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Contents 5 4 6 V5 Signalling 5 132 5 4 6 1 Add Time Slot 5 136 5 4 6 2 Add Communication Channel 5 137 5 4 6 3 Edit Communication Channel 5 139 5 4 6 4 Add Communication Path 5 140 5 4 6 5 Cross Connect Communication Channel with Time Slot 5 142 5 4 6 6 Cross Connect Communication Path with Communication Channel 5 144 5 4 6 7 V5 2 Group 2 Protection 5 146 5 4 6 7 1 Add V5 2 Group 2 Protection 5 150 5 4 6 7 2 Switch V5 2 Group 2 Protection 5 152 5 4 7 Move a V5 Interface in Service 5 153 5 4 8 Move a V5 Link in Service 5 154 5 4 9 Move a V5 User Port in Service 5 154 5 4 10 Delete V5 User Port 5 155 5 4 11 Delete V5 Link 5 155 5 4 12 Remove Communication Channel 5 156 5 4 13 Remove Communication Path 5 157 5 4 14 Remove Primary Link 5 157 5 4 15 Remove Secondary Link 5 158 5 4 16 Remove V5 Protection Group 2 5 158 5 4 17 Delete V5 Interface 5 159 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5
370. ris User s Guide and Solaris Common Desktop Environment User s Guide 3 3 9 Workspace Menu General The workspace menu opens when you click with the right mouse button on the background of the workspace Workspace Menu Shuffle Up Shuffle Down Refresh Minimize Restore Front Panel Restart Workspace Manager Log out Figure 3 7 Workspace Menu AEM NB R1 3 3 12 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management General Information on Keyboard Workspace Menu The workspace menu provides the functions listed in the following table Functions Table 3 4 Menu Items of the Workspace Menu Menu Item Function Programs A submenu offering several programs Shuffle Up If several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Up brings the window from the very bot tom to the top of the pile Shuffle Down If several windows on the screen are layered on top of one another Shuffle Down moves the window from the top of the pile to the very bottom Refresh The contents of the windows on the screen and the screen backdrop are refreshed Minimize Re The workspace manager window is reduced to an icon or if store Front Panel already iconized restored to a window Restart Work The workspace manager is restarted Some of the changes space Manager to the user interface become valid only after the restart of the workspace manager The restart must be acknowledged in a window L
371. rk 1 4 3 1 2 Fault Localisation and Diagnosis Reaction to Fault When a fault has been detected it is necessary to localise its source and diag Identification nose its cause in order to initiate appropriate repair procedures To locate the cause of fault the AEM NB provides information gathered from alarm notifications and general network data Fault Source Each alarm notification contains the name of the network component from which it originates This network component however need not always be the real fault Source 1 4 313 Fault Clearance Background The detects faults automatically and clears various software errors by it self fault recovery The transmission characteristics of the network will not be im paired by this Recovery System Recovery protects the AEM NB and associated users from unnecessary Mechanisms problems and avoids or reduces manual work Recovery processes vary depending on the type of failure that occurred the struc tures affected and the type of recovery If no files are lost or damaged recovery may amount to no more than restarting an instance If data has been lost recov ery requires additional steps such as database restore using a previous backup AEM NB recovery mechanisms are initiated mainly by the following situations m NE software crash m AEM NB crash m Communication between AEM NB and a NE is interrupted In the case of a NE crash the AEM NB configures NEs in accordance w
372. rm Object ld EM Object Identifier Access Identifier Access Identifier Alarm Type Alarm Type Identifier Condition Type Alarm Type Severity Severity Notification Code Notification Code Serv Affec Service Affecting Service Effect Date First Time Date Last Time Occurrence Time Occurrence Time Occurrence Time and Date Occurrence Date Occurrence Date a Time and date YYYY MM DD HH MM SS b Onlytime HH MM SS c Only date MM DD Alarm Severities For each alarm one of the following alarm severities is defined m Critical CR m Major MJ m Minor MN m Information IN only applicable for platform alarms Alarm Identifica The multiple key that uniquely identifies an alarm is uon m Host Identifier Identifies where the alarm comes from If it comes from an NE then this identifier is the NE name If the alarm is reported by the AEM NB the host identifier is EM For association alarms the host identifier is NE_name System Object Identifier Identifies the alarm affected object within the host which is identified by the host identifier For association alarms the system object identifier is ASSOC m General Alarm Identifier Unique identifier within each type of alarm In order to ease possible communication between different users an index number is provided as a temporal alarm identification It is temporal because the index number will be used as a circular sequence the maximum
373. rolled Objects Controlled Objects Not Assigned Assigned Ty pe Value Type Value Add 272 EM Anymedia NE 1 NE 3 NE User Groups User Groups Not Assigned Assigned User Groups Administrator Maintenance Monitoring User Groups Figure 4 16 Window Domain Profile Change To change the domain name enter the new name in the Domain Name field 3 to Domain Name 30 characters Any characters are allowed Change Domain To change the domain description enter the new information in the Description Description field 0 to 60 characters Any characters are allowed Adding To assign further controlled objects to the selected domain select one or more Controlled Objects controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Removing To remove assigned controlled objects from the selected domain select one or Controlled Objects more controlled objects in the Controlled Objects Assigned field and click Remove AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 4 13 User Management Domains gt NOTE Each controlled object consists of two fields Type and Value Adding To give further user groups access to the selected domain select one or more User Groups user groups in the User Groups Not Assigned field and click Add gt NOTE To create user groups see Chapter 4 4 1 page 4 16 Removing To
374. rsion 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm M Mfb b AZ 3 amp A m 5 4 Service Provisioning Provisioning Prior to service activation on the AEM NB several data items need to be provi Summary sioned It is necessary to configure cross connections between ports and logical and physical entities and vice versa In addition it is necessary to specify the serv ice type V5 1 V5 2 POTS ISDN or permanent leased lines PLL Supported Inter Figure 5 27 page 5 78 is a functional diagram of the cross connections between faces the physical E1 and subscriber ports of the system and the logical entities The AEM NB supports m upto 16 V5 1 m upto 16 V5 2 m upto 16 PLL interfaces in any combination not exceeding the maximum of 16 E1 feeders in the system 2 Mbit s Cross E1 logical cross connections provide 2 Mbit s bandwidth to the interfaces A max Connections imum of 16 E1 cross connections can be created they are limited by the maxi mum number of E1 feeder ports in the system 64 kbit s Cross 64 kbit s cross connections bind a Z port to a V5 1 or PLL timeslot to a V5 2 Inter Connections face A maximum of 513 64 kbit s cross connections can be created they are lim ited by the maximum number of Z ports in the system 512 plus the one remote operations channel ROC AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 77 Configuration Management Provisioni
375. ry Processing package information Processing system information Verifying disk space requirements Checking for conflicts with packages already installed Checking for setuid setgid programs The following files are being installed with setuid and or setgid permissions lt ObjectStore path gt sunpro lib oscminit lt setuid root gt Do you want to install these as setuid setgid files y n q 28 Type y and press Return This package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of lt LuOSRT gt y n 29 Type y and press Return AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 19 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p o Installing ObjectStore 5 0 SP3 Runtime for Any Media NB EM R1 5 as lt LuOSRT gt Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class none Executing postinstall script We ke ee e eee eee eee ee ee eee ce e e ce ee ce e e ce e e ek v x kv x x Remember execute osconfig to set the envi ronment Nkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk You have the installation logfile in tmp EM_Install_LuOSRT 1log Installation of LuOSRT was successful ObjectStore Config Object Store configuration uration The default copy of ObjectStore to configure i
376. s in lt ObjectStore path gt sunpro Is this the copy that you want to configure yes 30 Press Return ObjectStore includes shared libraries For Ob jectStore applications and utilities to work the dynamic linker must be able to find them The recommended arrangement is to have symbolic links in usr lib to the shared libraries you choose not to make these links then you will have to instruct all ObjectStore users to add ObjectStore path gt sunpro lib to their LD LIBRARY PATH environment variable Do you want to create links to ObjectStore li braries in usr lib yes 31 Press Return Since you have requested a File database con figuration you must give a pathname for the transaction log file Where do you want to put the transaction log AEM NB R1 3 2 20 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation Commissioning Installation Procedure p See 2 32 lt AnyMedia_Absolute_PATH gt DBTrxLog transaction log and press Return or type path of the separate partition created for the trans action log file cf page 2 gt transaction log and press Re turn You have configured this machine to run an Ob jectStore server The server s transaction log is in Transaction log path gt Do you want to proceed yes 33 Press Return Writing configuration files and initializing the server please wait 990423 111
377. s area Informs the user there are jobs running m Stop Cancel button for commands allows cancellation of commands Note that Cancel does not imply undo If you try to close the window and the last command executed has not finished yet you will be informed Warning window that there are still jobs running AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 11 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window mm You have running jobs Do you want to continue You have to decide whether to continue or wait until the job is finished 5 2 4 Cursor Menu Menu at the cursor Some objects in windows have a menu associated with them This menu will pop position up at the cursor position when the right mouse button is pressed The cursor must not however be positioned on a menu bar or a window frame The cursor menu is not available in all dialogue boxes The functions which can be executed using this cursor menu depend on the application of the respective dialogue box Select menu Proceed as follows to select a menu option from the cursor menu option Step Procedure 1 Press and hold down the right mouse button 2 Drag the cursor onto the desired menu option Release the right mouse button to execute the menu option or if you do not wish to execute a menu option move the cursor away from the menu and release the right mouse button 5 2 4 1 Structure and Cursor Menus In the following table the last c
378. s both duplex and simplex operations i e the COMDAC can be protected or unprotected In duplex operation the COMDAC will run in an active and standby mode The NE automatically sets the COMDAC protection mode when both COMDACs are plugged in Then the alarming state of both COMDACs slots is set to Re quired and the AEM NB is not able to change it until one of the COMDACs is re moved When a COMDAC is removed the AEM NB is then able to set that slot to Not Required so the COMDAC protection mode will be disabled simplex AEM NB R1 3 5 60 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 Procedure Complete the following procedure to define protection switching for the COMDAC Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf in the Network Browser and Protection via the cursor menu or select Equipment gt Protection via the menu bar The Shelf Protection window pops up tab COMDAC This window can also be reached from the COMDAC window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 3 page 5 32 via Protection Figure 5 19 Shelf Protection Window Tab COMDAC This window provides COMDAC protection information It also provides the mech anisms needed to perform changes in the protection scheme as well as protection Switches AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 61 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p See 1
379. s direct input of TL1 messages In some markets direct input of TL1 messages may not be allowed and can be suppressed via the appropriate security permissions m Online Help Provides access to online help which contains at least information on the operation of the AEM NB meaning of the buttons etc m Multiple windowing Provides multiple windowing for access to multiple NE information on a sin gle screen m Multiple user access Provides for multiple users access to the AEM NB at the same time Multi ple users may include multiple OSs or NMSs as well as multiple GUI ac cess m Time and Date format Enables the user to use local preferred time and date format For example the local calendar must be supported or optional use of 24 hour clock ver sus a 12 hour clock m User friendly GUIs Provides a user friendly interface and hides the complexities of the infor mation models Manageable Objects organized in a Hierarchy The configuration is implemented within a GUI hierarchy group level containing a number of NEs AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 15 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p See level starting with shelf view m GUI process to be separated The graphical interface driver can be placed on a separate platform from the rest of the EMS application 1 3 1 5 Northbound Interface Tasks The Northbound Interface performs all the tasks nee
380. s displayed if present In case of leased lines this field shows Leased m V5 Link id The id used to identify the V5 Links Format 0 255 In case of leased lines this field shows Leased AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 27 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee Parameters Buttons Description The following buttons are available only if a row in the feeder list has been selected and the feeder is not used for leased lines The Edit E1 button provides access to the Feeder V5 Link window tab E1 Feeder where you will be able to edit the E1 feeder parameters The Label button provides access to the Feeder V5 Link window tab V5 Link Table to add edit V5 Link parame ters m Ifthe selected E1 feeder is associated to a V5 Link the label is Edit V5 Link m lf the selected E1 feeder is not associated to a V5 Link the label is Add V5 Link The Remove V5 Link button can be used to delete E1 feeder to V5 Link association If the feeder is used for leased lines this button is not available If you want to then edit a E1 parameter select the desired row in the E1 Infor mation list and press Edit or dou ble click on the row The 1 Feeder V5 Link window tab E1 Feeder pops up cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 2 page 5 29 edit a V5 Link select the appropriate row in the E1 In formation list and press Edit V5 Link The E1 Feeder V5 L
381. s number CLEI Not applicable ECI Not applicable AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 35 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration ee 5 3 2 1 5 Configure an IO HDLC The IO_HDLC High Level Data Link Control plug in primarily performs a frame relay function of D channel messages between the ISDN subscribers connected to a NE and the V5 communication channels Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the IO HDLC data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt IDC500 in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar or single click on the plug in IO_HDLC in Shelf View window The O HDLC window pops up IO HDLC lal NE Name TCL NE14 Slot iohdlc 1 2 Inventory Information Card Type IOHDLC Serial Number 990 03139384 Apparatus Code 500 1 2 CLEI Provisioning Info Provisioned Apparatus Code IDCS00 Operation amp Protection Administrative State _locked Protection State Not Applicable HDLC Protection Close Figure 5 1 IO HDLC Window This window contains all information related to the IO HDLC It includes hardware and software data inventory as well as operational and protection state It can be displayed even when the plug in is not inserted AEM NB R1 3 5 36 Version 1 00 08 99 363 2
382. s package contains scripts which will be ex ecuted with super user permission during the process of installing this package Do you want to continue with the installation of LuANY15C y n 81 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 Client as LuANY15C AEM NB R1 3 2 38 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p Installing part 1 of 1 lt files list gt verifying class common Executing postinstall script Nkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Execute AnyMediaNBEM_GUI sh to set the environment We e ee e ee e ee e ee e ee e ee ce ee e ce e ee ce e e ke You have the installation logfile in Client path EM Install log Installation of LuANY15C was successful Installation of AnyMedia EM R1 5 was successful Client side installation gt AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 39 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee 2 2 1 3 Post Install Actions 2 2 1 3 1 AEM NB Server To be able to start up the server it is necessary previously to execute the following script lt AnyMedia_path gt cfg AnyMediaNBEM sh This would set all the necessary environment variables It is recommended to in clude this line in the user profile or to create an alias to facilitate the use 2 2 1 3 2 AEM NB Client
383. scribes how to log out from the system You can log out manually or be logged out automatically after a certain time of mouse and keyboard inactiv ity System Logout Complete the following procedure to log out manually Step Procedure 1 Close the AEM NB access bar window 2 Click on the Exit symbol in the workspace manager or select Log out in the workspace menu 3 A message box pops up Press Return or click OK to confirm the logout Press Cancel not to log out After a logout the login screen is displayed again gt NOTE During the client installation cf 2 2 1 2 page 2 27 a cron process is in stalled This cron automatically kills the GUI processes every night due se curity reason The execution time of the cron can be changed by the admin istrator only AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 3 System Management System Access mm 3 2 3 AEM NB Access Bar The AEM NB access bar allows access to all AEM NB applications and offers an alarm indication as well as a help feature u 2 j aj ej Broad Band Element Mgmt Alarm Monitoring Users amp Groups Equipment Configuration Log System Alarm Help Management Administration Notification Figure 3 2 AEM NB Access Start Access Bar To start the access bar see Start AEM NB Access Bar in Chapter 3 2 1 Functions The access bar provides access to the following applications m Equi
384. sequence number is 100 000 It is provided only for user convenience It will not be used to identify an alarm within the AMS For this purpose the multiple key defined above has to be used AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 45 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms p 6 6 3 Network Element Alarms Alarm Descriptions Please refer to the AMAS R1 3 network element documentation for detailed alarm descriptions of network element alarms 6 6 4 Element Manager Platform Alarms This chapter provides alarm descriptions of the AEM NB platform alarms includ ing proposals for corrective maintenance actions Alphabetical Order the following the AEM NB platform alarms are listed alphabetically 6 6 4 1 LOG_DEL_FULL Meaning All old logs have been deleted Because more available space was necessary the log type of the current day has been deleted too The Object Id shows which log type has been deleted Abbreviation LOG DEL FULL Severity Major Service affecting No Effects There are no old logs available and not all logs of the current day are available to be viewed or stored Possible Cause s There may be a problem or abnormal situation in the AEM NB or the selection of the configurable size limits of the log system was too small Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 1 Check the AEM NB for problems or abnormal situations Have there any problems or abnorma
385. ser can clear one more or all platform alarms If not all selected alarms could be cleared you are informed about the alarms for which this action failed m Print alarm lists cf Chapter 6 3 4 1 page 6 18 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 21 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring p See A T Prerequisites Before performing alarm acknowledgment and alarm clearance select the alarms you want to acknowledge or clear Starting Actions Select the desired alarm viewer action If you want to then select Result Notes manually retrieve File gt Reload Reloads alarms in the table Only alarms which alarms match the filter criteria are included The Alarm Viewer is blocked until the reload is finished Same functionality as Reload in the tool bar To customize the displayed alarm list perform the ac tions described in Chapter 6 3 4 3 page 6 19 and Chapter 6 3 4 2 page 6 18 automatically up Options gt Automatic If this menu item is checked alarms are automatically date alarm view Reload reloaded in the alarm viewer every minute If it is not checked alarms are loaded only if Reload is pressed or if File gt Reload is selected The setting affects only the current window The alarm viewer does not remember the setting after a restart acknowledge alarms Actions gt Acknowledge All selected alarm items are acknowledged Their sta tus immediately changes to acknowledge Same funct
386. specific device such as a cartridge tape DAT Distribution Port The circuitry that provides narrowband access i e up to the 1 544 Mbps 051 rate to a single network interface over one 2 or 4 wire metallic facility and converts between the format seen by this network interface e g analog voice frequency ISDN U interface etc and the internal format i e 4 Mbps timeslots Distribution Ports are con tained in Application Packs Channel Units for the AnyMedia Access System A maximum of 32 Distribution Ports are supported on POTS COIN Application Packs APs and a maximum of 16 Distribution Ports are supported on ISDN APs Download The process of moving information from a server to a client at the request of a client according to client server par adigm Expected applications of this capability are database retrievals Drop This comprises the wire to the customer and customer premises equipment CPE In some documents this is also called equipment Duplex mode Two COMDACs are equipped in the AnyMedia Access System One COMDAC is active and controls the whole system the other is in stand by mode During operation the memories NVPS NVDS and RAM of both are mutu ally consistent One reason to perform a side switch is if the active COMDAC fails In this case the COMDAC previ ously in stand by mode is now active mE E 1 E1 is the standard acronym for the 2 048 Mbit s interface defined the ITU T Recomme
387. ssible once the connection is established Only in this case can the NE be displayed on the Network Browser Adding an NE is normally followed by setting timing source cf Chapter 5 3 3 3 page 5 52 and configuring simplex COMDAC protection cf Chapter 5 3 3 6 page 5 58 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 21 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p See 5 3 2 Shelf View The purpose of this tab of the NE Name Information window is to provide a simple graphical representation of the NE shelf Complete the following procedure to display the shelf view Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf in the Network Browser and Shelf View via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Equipment gt Shelf View via the menu bar The Shelf View window pops up NE TCL NE14 Shelf View B LAN H Beo 2 sc ALARM QUT RTU ALARM IN omo 20970 0970 1 1 10 2 FLT 6 Pow MISC LJ senosz gege 8 Gy oont DOMI OOM CIU AP 1 AP 2 AP 3 4 AP 5 6 7 8 9 AP 10AP 11AP 12 AP 13 AP 14 AP 15 AP 16 Provisioned View Figure 5 6 Shelf View Window This window provides general inventory information as well as provisioning and alarm information through the LEDs Each slot will show either the apparatus code of the inserted card default
388. st ACT Lit when the plug in is service active CLF1 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 1 CLF2 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 2 CLF3 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 3 CLF4 Lit when a fault or facility alarm occurs on the in service received E1 port 4 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 5 23 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration Plug in Color Meanings COMDAC FLT red m Lit when a fault is detected on the plug in m Flashes during software download and turnup ACT green Indicates that this COMDAC is active CR red Lit when the highest severity alarm is critical red Lit when the highest severity alarm is major MN yellow Lit when the highest severity alarm is minor NE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is near end FE yellow Lit when the source of the fault or abnormal condi tion is far end CIU FLT red Lit when a fault is detected on the plug in ACT green Lit when a test is in progress Plug in id in opera tion POW1 green Lit when 48V Power supply is in operation POW2 green Lit when 48V Power supply is in operation TC green Lit when test is in progress TAP100 connected MISC yellow Lit when one of the eight miscellaneous alarm in puts is active ACO green Alarm Cut off reminder Application FLT red Lit when a f
389. st Box A drop down list box allows you to enter data by selecting an entry from a list that drops down after clicking on the triangle on the right of the box m Box A spin box only allows a limited set of discrete ordered input values You have to use the up and down arrows to increment or decrement the value m A window can contain a register of several tabs Clicking on a tab displays the corresponding contents in the window m Option Menu The option menu is used to set a certain option Its designation will indicate the option currently set Handling of the option menu is the same as for a menu Frequently Used The table below provides an overview of buttons which have the same function in Buttons every AEM NB window Table3 5 Function of Frequently Used Buttons Button Function OK Applies changes window is closed Apply Applies changes window stays open for further edits Cancel Discards changes running operation is cancelled window is closed Close Discards changes window is closed AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 15 System Management General Information on Keyboard p Frequently Used The table below provides an overview of menus which have the same function in Menus every AEM NB window Table3 6 Function of Frequently Used Menus Menu Function File gt Print gt Print Table Prints the contents of text lists in the window cf Chapter 3 5
390. standing order list for each document provides automatic distribu tion for all reissues of the document 1 Acrobat Reader is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 About this Document 9 How to Comment on This Document Document com The first sheet in this manual after the title page is the feedback form How Are ment procedure We Doing Please use this form to fax your comments and suggestions concerning the USM 363 211 412 to Lucent Technologies Network Systems GmbH Fax no 49 911 526 3545 AEM NB R1 3 XX Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description Contents 11 About this Subject 12 Introduction 1 2 1 Main Functions 1 2 2 ISO Functional Areas 1 2 2 1 Configuration Management 1 2 2 2 Fault Management 1 2 2 3 Performance Management 1 2 2 4 Security Management 1 2 3 Applications 1 2 4 System Working Modes 13 System and Software Architecture 1 3 1 Functional Groups 1 3 1 1 NE Management 1 3 1 2 General Components 1 3 1 3 Software Platform 1 3 1 3 1 Software Bus 1 3 1 3 2 Repository 1 3 1 4 Graphical User Interface GUI 1 3 1 5 Northbound Interface 1 3 1 6 Southbound Interface 1 3 2 Hardware Platform 1 3 2 1 Architecture 1 3 2 2 Requirements 1 4 Working with AEM NB 1 4 1 Network Planning and Physical Installation AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 N ai 4 Co k 4
391. stem Administration application 3 18 System core 3 18 System Internal Events 1 13 3 31 System management functions 6 18 AEM NB R1 3 IN 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 315 TAP test result 6 34 Target ID 5 20 TCP IP CON REFUSED 6 49 Terminating the Alarm Viewer 6 11 Testing interfaces 5 4 Testroutines Access to the 6 23 Built in self test 6 32 Loopback test 6 37 Port test 6 29 Port test result 6 27 6 30 Result of standby card test scheduling 6 32 Standby card test scheduling 6 31 TAP test result 6 34 Text box 3 15 timing source 5 52 timing source control primary source 5 54 secondary source 5 54 timing sync mode 5 54 TL1 messages Path through interface 3 TL1 COMM DENIED 6 50 Trademarks TST ANALG 6 29 Typographical conventions U Unassign controlled objects from domains 4 13 User groups access from applications 4 25 user groups access from domains 4 24 User groups access from tasks 4 26 Users from user groups 4 6 User Create 4 2 Delete 4 6 Modify 4 4 User administration 4 1 User group Create 4 16 Delete 4 26 Modify 4 21 V5 Interfaces 5 83 ee V5 Protocol 5 79 Window controls 3 7 3 8 maximize button 3 9 menu bar 3 9 minimize button 3 8 scroll bar 3 9 title bar 3 8 window frame 3 8 window menu 3 9 Window controls AEM NB windows 3 13 Windo
392. step by step procedures tutorials O Improve the organization structure Add more troubleshooting information Include more figures Make it less technical Add more examples Add more better quick reference aids Add more detail Improve the index g g g g a Please provide details for the suggested improvement Name serere eet E UE AA s Telephone Number __________ ____ ___ _ Company Organization Dales ex 4 os Address When you have completed this form please fax it to the address on top of this page Title AEM NB User Service Manual Release 1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 Contents About this Document 1 Overview XI 2 Intended Audience XII 3 How to use this document XIII 4 Conventions Used XIV 6 General Safety Information XV 6 1 General Notes on Safety XV 6 2 General Safety Requirements XVI 7 Related Documentation XVIII 7 1 Print Copy Hard Copy XVIII 7 2 CD ROM XIX 8 How to Order This Document XIX How to Comment on This Document XX DR RAT 1 Functional Description 1 1 1 1 About this Subject 1 1 1 2 Introduction 1 2 1 2 1 Main Functions T2 1 2 2 ISO Functional Areas 1 2 1 2 3 Applications 1 4 1 2 4 System Working Modes to 1 3 System and Software Architecture 1 7 1 3 1 Functional Groups 1 7 1 3 2 Hardware Platform 1 17 1 4 Working with AEM NB 1 19 1 4 1 Network Planning and Physical Installation 1 20 1 4 2 Configuration Management 1 21 1 4 3 Network Operation am
393. t CRC Test cf Chapter 6 4 6 Drop id only for ISDN drops LPU112 TL1 gt Cut through NE AEM NB R1 3 5 10 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Configuration Manager Window ee ee Menu entries Available at level Window gt Show Action Bar Any Window gt Cascade Any Window gt Window 1 Any Window gt Window 2 Any Help gt Index Any displays the help index for navigation through the EM help information Help gt On Window Any case sensitive online help 5 2 3 Status Bar Feedback from the NE is displayed on screen as is progress information related to the commands issued by the AEM NB This feedback is provided by the status bar incorporated at the bottom of every single screen except Network Browser and menu bar Message area feedback Progress area Progress bar Modify timing source reference Successful Data are being reloaded mi rd Stop Cancel button Figure 5 3 Status Bar Example The status bar is composed of three sub areas m Message area Used to display feedback It indicates what is being done The last feedback message sent by the NE is displayed until a new com mand is sent or the window is closed Example Any time wrong data is entered in the GUI an error message is displayed in the status bar indicating the nature of the error By wrong data itis meant out of range values inappropriate value types etc m Progres
394. t Configuration p 4 The following table shows the view edit options of the O E1 window Parameters Buttons Description NE Name NE name of the selected NE max 30 characters Slot Slot format ioe1 shelf number slot for working IO E1s and ioe1p shelf number for the protection IO E1 protection of IO E1 is not yet implemented for R1 3 Possible values ioe1 1 1 4 for working lO E1 ioe1p 1 for protection IO E1 not yet implemented Inventory Infor The following fields will be empty if no plug in is inserted mation Otherwise the read only text fields provide the following in formation Card Type 11 character mnemonic used to identify the gen eral type of function provided Possible value IO 1 Serial Number 12 character alphanumeric code that in cludes the date and place of manufacture Apparatus Code Specifies the function of the plug in Pos sible value FAC500 ICC InterChangeability Code Indicates the interchangea bility among plug ins to specify forward backward compatibil ity Format of the ICC is m n where m is the issue number and n the series number CLEI Not applicable ECI Not applicable E1 Information The information in this field is displayed in a table 3 rows one per E1 m Feeder Physical address of the E1 feeders Format e1 shelf slot port e g e1 1 1 4 Possible Values e1 1 1 4 1 4 m V5 Interface id The V5 Interface id i
395. t Message AP Application Pack APOG Applications Planning and Ordering Guide ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode AUTO Automatic mE 7 B BAL Balance BB Broadband BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply BRA Basic Rate Access AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 Abbreviations ee Eh nt CD Compact Disk CDE Common Desktop Environment CFL Customer Feature List CIT Craft Interface Terminal CIU Communication Interface Unit CLEI Code assigned by Bellcore Central Office COBRA Common Object Request Broker Architecture CPE Customer Premises Equipment CR Critical alarm severity CRV Call Reference Value CTAG Correlation Tag CTRL Control D DB Database DC Direct Current DCN Data Communication Network DDS Digital Data System DFL Default AEM NB R1 3 AB 2 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Abbreviations DID Direct Inward Dial DPT Dial Pulse Termination E ECI Code that corresponds to the bar coded label on the faceplate of the plug in EIA Electronic Industries Association EM Element Manager ENT Enter EOC Embedded Operations Channel EQPT Equipment ESF Extended Super Frame ETO Equalized Transmission Only EVT Event F FAF Facility Failure FEF Family of Equipment Failure FLT Fault FS SuperFrame with Datalink FTP File
396. t the alarm life the user will have to see the Log System cf Chapter 3 7 page 3 31 in which all alarm changes are stored Three types of logs are used The AMS logs the following situations m Actions log Periodical database deletion of cleared alarm s start and end Alarm s synchronization start and end Periodical deletion of cleared alarms Manual clear manual acknowledge The user identification that performs these actions is also logged m System internal events log Exception conditions of the AMS m Autonomous report log Raise automatic clear update of every alarm 6 2 10 Periodical Deletion of Cleared Alarms By default alarms with cleared status are maintained for at least three days in cluding the current day in the database This value and can be configured by the user via the system variable AM minimumClearPeriod in the file ANYMEDIAPATH cfg AnyMediaNBEM cfg and is an integer multiple in days The default value is 3 days The AEM NB performs a periodical deletion of the alarms with cleared status that exceed the specified time This is done during the night period in low load hours AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 9 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarm Monitoring The AEM NB provides a process to monitor and display all alarms stored in the database Using this system the Alarm Viewer the user is able to see many dif ferent alarm attributes such as Alarm Type Severity Status
397. t the size limits correctly i e increase the size limits 6 6 4 3 NEASSOC_FAILED Meaning The communication association with the NE has failed Abbreviation ASSOC FAILED Severity Minor Service affecting No This alarm covers the the following alarms m CON REFUSED cf Chapter 6 6 4 6 page 6 49 m IL1 COMM DENIED cf Chapter 6 6 4 7 page 6 50 m NEASSOC LOST cf Chapter 6 6 4 4 page 6 48 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 47 Fault Management and Maintenance Alarms gt NOTE This alarm is only used in pass through applications 6 6 4 4 NEASSOC_LOST Meaning The AEM NB lost the management association with the network element NE Abbreviation NEASSOC_LOST Severity Critical Service affecting No The alarm will be cleared when the TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session are available and the software version currently stored in the NE is sup ported by the AEM NB i e when the association process between the AEM NB and the NE is completed NE state is CONNECTED cf Chapter 6 5 1 page 6 40 Effects It is not possible to manage the NE The TL1 communication session and the TCP IP connection are lost Possible Cause s A loss of the TCP IP connection has been detected or the TCP IP connection has been closed as a consequence of a loss of the TL1 communication session Corrective Actions Proceed as follows to clear the alarm Step Procedure 15 Check the st
398. tailed information on the AEM NB features mentioned Contents The following AEM NB subjects are described m Basic functionality m Management features m System and software architecture Hardware and software platform m Interfaces m Applications 363 211 412 AEM NB 1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 1 1 Functional Description Introduction ee 1 2 Introduction General The AEM NB is part of a Telecommunication Management Network TMN It rep resents the element management layer and fulfils the tasks of the ISO nterna tional Standardizations Organisation functional areas see Chapter 1 2 2 page 1 3 Benefits This provides some benefits for the operator m Better control over revenue generating services by local and centralized management m Reduced time and effort for provisioning tasks m Fastand efficient fault detection and isolation m Prevention of unauthorized access by appropriate security mechanisms m Reduction of operator mistakes by easy to use Graphical User Interface GUI m Integration with higher management levels for network service and busi ness purposes 1 2 1 Main Functions The AEM NB provides the following main characteristics functions m Support of all AnyMedia Access Systems features m Equipment Overview m Common alarm handling for all network elements NEs m Report Log Backup amp Restore functions m IL1NE access via TCP IP based DCN m User security handling user profiles
399. tate is Locked Parameters Buttons V5 ISDN User Port Informa tion Description Physical Drop This field identifies the physical port id asso ciated to the V5 ISDN BRA User Port shown in this window by means of three option menus The first one contains drop shelf for this release this field is always drop 1 Thesecond one contains the slot number 1 16 inside NE m The third one contains the drop number inside the slot indicated on the previous list 1 32 Format drop shelf slot port Possible values drop 1 1 16 1 32 When coming from a window where the drop is already de fined the corresponding value is displayed and non editable Otherwise this field is empty and editable The behaviour of this fields when creating a V5 User Port is the following 1 The value in the first option menu is drop 1 2 The second option menu contains all the slots which has free drops Selecting any of them updates the con tent in the third option menu consequently If there are no slots with free drops the value None is displayed 3 The third option menu contains the free drops inside the slot selected in the second option menu The oper ator can select any of the free drops If there are no free drops the value None is displayed V5 User Port Address This V5 Envelope Function Address identifies a V5 ISDN BRA User Port within a V5 Interface Possible values 0 8175 If the user port is al
400. tch with SID has unallowed characters or string is too long IICT Input Invalid Correlation Tag Incorrect CTAG IBNC Input Block Not Consistent Parameter entered in the wrong block a only available via AEM NB AEM NB R1 3 C 14 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 C 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm En vironment C 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment command instructs the sys tem to retrieve all currently active environment alarms Input Format RTRV ALM ENV tid ctag Abortable Yes Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None Input Format Parameters Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed Correlation Tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 15 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 p 7 C 3 3 4 Output Format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date time AC atag REPT AL
401. ter settings for each NE This information can be used for display and report functions in case of loss of communication with the supported NE m Maintain NE Software Copies The system keeps a copy of the versions of the NE software running in the NEs 30 channel managed by the AEM NB Generally only one version of NE software per NE type is used by all the NEs in a network but the AEM NB must have the capacity to manage two software versions during the up grade period AEM NB R1 3 1 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Functional Description System and Software Architecture a 0 NE Reset INIT SYS Allows the user to delete the NE and restore the factory settings for the whole NVDS except for the IP address and the target identifier so that the AEM NB can still communicate with the NE after the command execution has been completed m AEM NB Database Synchronization Automatic update of the AEM NB database records based on NE database changes m Protection Control The management system provides a facility to allow the user to switch op eration of one unit in a NE to a standby unit if that unit exists m Equipment Protection The AEM NB allows the user to provision the equipment information for the protection scheme Also the user can force protection switching NE R1 8 COMDAC simplex duplex NER1 8IO HDLC simplex duplex m NE Timing Synchronization The AEM NB supports the user to configure
402. terfaces which only allow to connect PSTN and ISDN BRA subscribers and V5 2 Interfaces which allow to connect ISDN PRA subscribers as well A single NE can contain a number of V5 User Ports a number of V5 Interfaces and a number of V5 Links which represent 2 048 Mbit s links There is a bi direc tional association cross connection between each V5 Interface and all of its re lated V5 User Ports Likewise there is a bi directional relationship between each V5 Interface and all its related V5 Links 64 kbit s 2 048 Mbit s User Ports Cross Interfaces Cross Connections Connections Figure 5 28 Cross Connections From the management point of view a V5 Interface can be represented by a set of logical manageable entities with their own configuration data and relations cross connections that are established by provisioning The NE may contains up to 16 V5 Interfaces and up to 16 V5 Links 16 E1 physi cal feeders limitation On the other hand for AnyMedia Access System a limita tion of 512 subscribers V5 User Ports arises from the 32 channel POTS APs AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 5 79 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm ee Communication Only one V5 Link can be associated to a V5 1 Interface and up to 16 V5 Links can Channels Paths be associated to a V5 2 Interface For both V5 1 and V5 2 Interfaces the associa tion of user signalling with communication paths CP and the asso
403. that applies to a selected row is the remove operation see below No operations are possible as long as the administrative state of the V5 Interface is Unlocked Once it is Locked the current CC has no value as it is not applicable It only represents relevant data when the interface is running E1 Feeder This column contains the physical feeder that carries the concerned timeslot V5 Link id This column contains the V5 Link id of the link that is concerned TS This column contains the timeslot number that corre sponds to the concerned timeslot Possible values 15 16 31 Current CC This column identifies the communication channel via its CC id carried on this timeslot at this time Only valid when the V5 Interface is Unlocked Configured CC This column defines the CC id of the com munication channel that is carried on this timeslot on startup of the interface Command but Add Protection This button provides access to the Add tons V5 2 Group 2 Protection window modal cf Chapter 5 4 6 7 1 This button is only available when the V5 Interface is Locked Remove This button is only enabled when a row in the table is selected and the V5 Interface is Locked If the selected row contains a timeslot and a configured CC the result is that the CC remains configured over that times lot but is no longer protected If the selected row contains no configured CC the timeslot is no longer available for
404. the NE synchronization clock sources m NE Date and Time The AEM NB allows the user to set and retrieve the date and time of the NE m Disaster Recovery from the AEM NB The AEM NB is able to reconstruct its NE database by polling the NEs for information and from internally maintained backup copies of data m Fiber Reach Support The AEM NB supports the fiber reach by providing alarm information m Support of NE Standby Configuration The AEM NB supports the NE Standby Configuration via the cut through interface AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 9 Functional Description System and Software Architecture p 3 O The Service Management provides the following functionality features Service Management m NE Service Status Provides the aliveness status of the individual NEs providing a customer s service across all NEs under the AEM NB s control 15 1 05 2 Interfaces Primary Secondary Links V5 ISDN User Ports V5 PSTN User Ports ISDN Signalling Configuration V5 2 Protection Group 2 m Network Interfaces and Subscriber Service Provisioning and Activation The AEM NB supports all provisioning functions related to 2 Mbit s net work interfaces and subscriber services Provisioning contains the crea tion deletion and parameter setting modification of the different subscriber services The AEM NB service activation enables and disables the service 2 Mbit s network services
405. the V5 Link tab to be able to change any of its parameters 2 Use the option menu Physical Feeder to select an appropriate E1 feeder 3 Enter a V5 Link id as prerequisite for adding a V5 Link AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 103 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 4 Use the option menu V5 Interface id to select a V5 Interface this step is optional 5 Press OK to confirm an to close the whole window or press Apply to con firm and to open tab V5 Link for modification cf Chapter 5 4 2 4 2 page 5 104 gt NOTE The tab Physical Feeder is described in Chapter 5 3 2 1 2 page 5 29 5 4 2 4 2 Edit V5 Link This window displays the V5 Link information This tab is not accessible if there is no V5 Link associated to the E1 feeder Procedure Complete the following procedure to view edit the V5 Link data Step Procedure 1 Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt FAC500 gt E1 Feeder in the Network Browser and Edit via the cursor menu or select Service gt Provisioning gt Edit via the menu bar The E7 Feeder V5 Link window tab E1 Feeder pops up 2 Select tab V5 Link This window can also be reached from the E7 Feeders List window cf Chapter 5 4 2 3 page 5 99 or from the IO E1 window cf Chapter 5 3 2 1 1 page 5 26 by clicking on Edit V5 Link gt NOTE This tab is only accessible if a V5 Link is already associated to the E1 feeder AEM NB R1 3 5 10
406. the cut through interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 page 5 74 The corresponding TL1 commands are available on line using the GSI help on AnyMedia Access System 5 3 4 Network Element Software Upgrade This function is subdivided into two parts NE software download and program copy 5 3 4 1 Network Element Software Download Overview There are two software versions the one in the active COMDAC and the new one to be downloaded must be placed in ANYMEDIA CM nefiles NVPS It is as sumed that the user has a copy of the software currently running in the active COMDAC The software download procedure is as follows m start download m software into the standby COMDAC Assumptions For the following description it is assumed that the NE is already connected and the NE hardware platform is prepared to receive and work with the new program version Procedure Complete the following procedure to start software download Step Procedure T Select All or All gt NE in the Network Browser 2 Select Equipment gt NE SW Download via the menu bar The NE SW Download window pops up AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 65 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 66 Version 1 00 NESW Download al Target Simulator183 TCL NE12 TCL NE13 14 Tonto mi Standby Comdac Automatic Copy Download Information Filename classix dart 022 bin classix dart 023 bin
407. the number of not inserted plug ins 3 Click on another tab to change the window or click on Close button to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 51 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p See 5 gt 7 5 3 3 3 Configuration of Timing Source Overview The AnyMedia Access System supports two timing modes Free Running and Loop Timed m Free Running Mode For free running operation the NE derives timing from an internal crystal oscillator XO with an accuracy not worse than 32 parts per million ppm over full power supply temperature and life time The free running mode is intended only for turn up and failure condi tions m Loop Timed Mode In this mode the NE recovers the clock from one of the up to 16 feeder E1 interfaces or from a Station Clock Interface SCI Timing Inputs The two timing inputs are identified as Primary Reference Source and Second ary Protection Source The first E1 feeder of the first lO E1 plug in is the default primary input and the first feeder of the second IO E1 plug in is the default sec ondary input The network provider can tailor the set of valid timing inputs and their priorities via provisioning The Primary and Secondary reference signals can be selected from any physical feeder inputs on any two IO E1 plug ins or from two feeder inputs on the same plug in The NE can continue to derive timing from
408. tifier cOtedOs2 is configuration dependent and as such will vary from machine to machine This will mount the CD on cdrom depending on your system configura tion cdrom might have to be replaced with a different mount point For more information about on how to mount a CD ROM drive refer to your SUN documentation 2 2 1 Full Installation This type of installation uses the install AMEMRIS5 script in order to install all packages contained in the distribution For the following description it is assumed that m hardware and software requirements to install the AEM NB R1 3 are prepared m H1 3 software have not been installed previously m Common actions showed above have been made m Anew user shall be created on the target system who will be the owner of the AEM NB 1 3 files The server workstation shall be a NIS server and the client workstations shall be NIS clients All the users shall be included AEM NB R1 3 2 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p SSe NIS exported through the network order to be recognized by the AEM NB software For more information about the NIS tools refer to your SUN documentation m A NIS group is also necessary Typically a new group shall be created to in clude all the AEM NB users Procedure Complete the following procedure to install the AEM NB R1 3 application gt NOTE Lines w
409. ting data communication network leased line network Then a leased line service node is available in the central office it extracts the 64 kbit s ROCs from each 2 Mbit s link and concen trates up to 30x64 kbit s ROCs into a single 2 Mbit s link to the router channelized E1 I F m The PLLs will be originated at the AEM NB side by means of routers and DACS equipment and will be terminated at the COMDAC of the NE which extracts the ROC and its associated management information m router at the AEM NB side will have to make a translation between EO HDLC IP TCP and the AEM NB protocol stack 10BaseT MAC amp LLC1 IP TCP The AEM NB side router configuration will have channelized E1 interfaces The Router Bridge could be delivered by Lucent Technologies m One remote operation channel is used per V5DLC 64 kbit s ROC carried on a 2 Mbit s LL I F m Inthis scenario a feeder is used in every network element to establish PLLs instead of using it for V5 links then if the only information which is carried over the PLL feeder is ROC the bandwidth of the transport network is wasted and a new cable is needed to be inserted in this feeder If one feeder of the NE already supports other customer LLs no waste is made m Forlayer 2 HDLC Protocol is used between V5DLC and the router m For up to 30 V5DLC connected to the LE a single E1 interface for the router bridge is sufficient A 6 1 1 X Router Configuration The minimal requirements fo
410. tion Clear if the loopback is set Set if the loopback is cleared AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 37 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management mm b Viathe TL1 Command Line Interface To set a loopback enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 Staging parameter Command code blocks Common block To clear a loopback enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface Staging parameter Command code blocks 6 4 8 Loopback Test at the ISDN User Port Side It is possible to set or clear a loopback on an ISDN drop gt NOTE DLL loopbacks can not be done by the AEM NB It is only possible via GSI Set Procedure Proceed as follows to set a loopback test at the ISDN User Port side Step Procedure You have the following options to do this Procedure via a Viathe Network Browser and the menu bar Menu Bar 1 Select the port you intend the test to run for in the Network Browser All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPU112 gt Drop id ISDN and Edit via the cursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar The V5 ISDN BHRA User Port window pops up 2 Usethe option menu Loopback Selection to select the set loop back option amd click on Request AEM NB R1 3 6 38 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Fault Management and Maintenance Test Management Procedure
411. tion provisioning operation amp surveillance modification and fi nally decommissioning Modification of a network may take the form of fine adjust ment expansion or restructuring of the network and addition of new functionality Figure 1 6 shows the life cycle of a network Installation Provisioning Modification Operation amp Surveillance Decommissioning Figure 1 6 Life Cycle of a Network Support by The AEM NB is mainly used in three life cycle phases during network provision AEM NB ing network modification and network operation amp surveillance The installation phase is supported by the Graphical System Interface for Narrowband Services GSI NB AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 19 Functional Description Working with AEM NB p ee 3 w O 1 4 1 Network Planning and Physical Installation Network Planning In the network planning phase all specifications and requirements of the future network operation are translated into a concrete network structure That means the network planning phase during which a decision on the network topology equipment and components is made has to take place before the operation with the starts Physical The installation of the network follows the planning phase The installation in Installation cludes the following steps m Physical NE installation This includes the installation of racks plug ins and cabling of the NEs
412. tion Manager Window mm Menu entries Available at level Equipment gt Provisioning gt Timing Source NE Control Equipment gt Provisioning gt Date amp Time NE Equipment gt Provisioning gt Working Mode NE Equipment gt NE Inventory Data NE Equipment gt EM NE Synchronization NE Equipment gt NE Reset INIT SYS NE Equipment gt NE SW Download ALL NE multiple selection available Equipment gt NE NVDS Backup NE Equipment gt NE NVDS Restore NE Equipment gt Shelf View Shelf Equipment gt Protection Shelf Equipment gt Program Copy Shelf Service gt Provisioning gt Create V5 Interface NE Service gt Provisioning gt Create V5 Link E1 Feeder Service gt Provisioning gt Add Remove Link V5 Interface id Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View V5 Interfaces List V5 Inter face id E1 Feeders List V5 Link selecting E1 feeder Drop id V5 User Port List Service gt V5 Interfaces List NE Service gt E1 Feeder List NE Service gt V5 User Ports List NE Alarms gt Alarm Viewer cf Chapter 6 3 NE Test Manager gt User Line Test cf Drop id not if the AP is a Chapter 6 4 1 TAP Test Manager gt User Port Test Drop id cf Chapter 6 4 2 Test Manager gt Standby Card Test Schedul Shelf ing cf Chapter 6 4 3 Test Manager gt TAP Test cf Chapter 6 4 5 AP only for TAP type Test Manager g
413. tion Network Element Communication Capabilities File Transfer Protocol TL1 over TCP TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 RS232 RS232 Figure A 1 AnyMedia Remote Access to CIT Port Protocol Profiles m External system LAN interface LAN interface is available via a backplane connector on the AnyMedia Ac cess System shelf It provides access to an IEEE 802 3 compliant LAN through a 10BaseT connection All communications through this interface occur over the transmission control protocol internet protocol TCP IP to the GSI NB or element manager AEM NB The protocol profile in the NE for this scenario is shown in Figure A 2 For AnyMedia NE release 1 7 it will be an IAO LAN also supporting an OSI protocol stack File Transfer Protocol TL1 over TCP TCP at layer 4 TCP at layer 4 IP at layer 3 IP at layer 3 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 10BaseT at layer 1 10BaseT at layer 1 MAC amp LLC 1 at layer 2 Figure A 2 AnyMedia External LAN Interface Profiles AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 A 3 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Network Element Communication Capabilities p 7 3 A 3 m Remote Operations Channel ROC ROC is a 64 kbps timeslot within the payload of a E1 link bound to a feeder of the AnyMedia NE The AnyMedia Access System provides access for a remotely located OS if it communicates via TCP The protocol pr
414. tion failed to the AEM NB m detects that the side switch to the standby COMDAC is not pos sible e g 2nd COMDAC not present and refuses the SW Down load operation m If the download of the data fails an alarm is issued and manual inter vention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to back out the partial load duplex configuration see Chapter 5 3 4 2 page 5 69 m software program is not installed successfully on the standby COMDAC In duplex configuration an alarm will be sent to the AEM NB and manual intervention will be required to restart the download procedure from the beginning or write from the active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC to remove the downloaded copy see Chapter 5 3 4 2 page 5 69 m Ihe TCP connection between AEM NB and NE is lost AEM NB R1 3 5 68 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration 5 3 4 2 Program Copy Overview This function is used to copy a new loaded software from the currently active COMDAC to the standby COMDAC During normal operation both COMDACS should have the same software version So the software copy should always be the next step after software download except software copy is started automati cally after software download cf previous chapter Duplex Configura For the following description it is assu
415. to 10 Default value 10 default path where the restored AnyMedia logs will be placed from a previous archive Default value log default path where the AnyMedia restored logs will be placed Default value restored maximum size in kilobytes for all AnyMedia log files Default value 15000 OAM log minimumDaysKept log s latency period in days Default value 7 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 B 3 System Variables and Configuration Parameters Configuration Parameters p 1 B 3 2 AnyMedia Client GUI Configuration Variables The following table provides an alphabetical list of the configuration parameters for AnyMedia GUI Table2 3 SystemPreferences ini Configuration File Name Site Settings SITE Description the city or the location where the Element Manager is working This value is used for printing purposes LOC TIME ZONE code for the representation of names of time zones Range of values GMT Greenwich Mean Time ECT European Central Time Default value defined at installation time User View Settings JSERVIEW default view in User Administration window Range of values users usergroups do mains or objects Default value users Alarm Viewer Set ALM VIEW tings default view Range of values view1 view2 view3 or view4 Default value view1 ALM FILTER default alarm filter Range of values Last24h CritRaised Raised Host CritN
416. to 224 0 0 2 universal router s multicast address so that the NE points to the router on the other side of the ROC interface ent roc roc 1 ent 111 111 1 el 1 1 1 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 7 Data Communications Network DCN Configuration Recommended DCN Configurations mm ent crs llts roc 1 11ts 1 16 set ip shelf 135 5 78 2 defrouter 224 0 0 2 submask 255 255 255 0 Once communications with the Element Manager are established via the ROC we can execute remote operations on the NE as if we are connected via the LAN We can also use either the GSI NB or a standard windows FTP TELNET A 6 1 3 Element Manager Server Configura tion Server IP Parame The server on which the AEM NB application resides must have its IP parameters ters configured m address e g 135 88 20 234 m subnet mask e g 255 255 240 0 m default router e g 135 88 17 1 Configuration In the AEM NB the following parameters have to be configured to be able to com municate with the NEs m TCP IP configuration related to NEs every NE the AEM NB wants to communicate with its IP ad dress e g 135 88 4 2 must be introduced in the AEM NB provi sionable via AEM NB GUI The ports to be used in the NE needs to be stored in the AEM NB e g for TL1 over TELNET communication the ports to be used are in the order 11002 11004 11006 and 11008 for FTP communica tion the port number 20 for FTP
417. to NOT CONNECTED TRYING Not Connected When the NE state is NOT CONNECTED TRYING the AEM NB tries to estab Trying lish a TCP IP connection with the NE The AEM NB attempts to connect to one of the TCP ports of the NE After the successful connection to a TCP port the AEM NB checks if it supports the software version of the NE If the software version is supported the state becomes CONNECTED SYNCHRONIZING if not it re mains NOT CONNECTED TRYING and the AEM NB continues its attempts to establish a connection The user can cancel these attempts via the GUI which will change the NE state to NOT CONNECTED CANCELLING Connected The user can request to close a connection with an NE via the GUI When the TL 1 communication session is closed by the AEM NB the NE state is changed to NOT CONNECTED When the NE state is CONNECTED and the TCP IP con nection is lost or closed the NE state becomes NOT CONNECTED TRYING When a TL1 communication session loss is detected and the TCP IP connection is still established the AEM NB closes the TCP IP connection and the NE state also becomes NOT CONNECTED TRYING 6 5 3 Configuration Data Synchronization after Association General If an NE is connected to the AEM NB the databases of NE and AEM NB have to be synchronized To change synchronization settings see Chapter 5 3 3 1 page 5 45 Autonomous Re There are various types of autonomous reports that are used to keep consistency ports
418. to dtterm xterm or vt100 While a northbound interface session is already open another session of a differ ent type must not be opened for the same NE When a northbound interface session is opened it is recommendable to send the message ALW MSG vc all ALL to avoid that changes in the configura tion of the NE introduced by another manager could interfere with our application To start a northbound interface session the OS must open a TCP IP connection with the AnyMedia Element Manager Then a TL1 interface see Command and Message Manual is used Firstly the OS is authenticated and authorized via the ACT USER message The AEM NB opens a dedicated TL1 virtual circuit with every NE included in the do main of the external OS When the connections are open any TL1 command typed by the OS operator will be sent to the proper NE and the responses to these commands as well as all the available autonomous output messages AO will be routed to the proper OS To close the northbound interface session the external OS uses the CANC USER TL1 message When this message reaches the AEM NB it logs out the external OS closes all the TCP IP connections which are involved in this northbound inter face session both sides northbound to the OS and southbound to the NEs man aged by the OS and logs the end of the northbound interface link The OS will be authenticated and authorized by the AEM NB not by the NE Using this mechanism the OS
419. tus Bar 5 11 5 2 4 Cursor Menu 5 12 5 3 Equipment Configuration 5 14 5 3 1 Add a Network Element 5 17 5 3 2 Shelf View 5 22 5 3 3 Edit View of Configuration Data 5 45 5 3 4 Network Element Software Upgrade 5 05 5 3 5 Nonvolatile Data Storage NVDS 5 70 5 3 6 Network Element Reset 5 73 5 3 7 TL1 Cut Through 5 74 5 3 8 Delete Network Element 5 75 5 4 Service Provisioning 5 77 5 4 1 Create a V5 Network Interface 5 83 5 4 2 Add V5 Links to V5 Interface 5 94 5 4 3 Add Primary V5 2 Links 5 109 5 4 4 Add Secondary V5 2 Link 5 111 5 4 5 Add V5 User Port 5 114 5 4 6 V5 Signalling 5 132 5 4 7 Move a V5 Interface in Service 5 153 5 4 8 Move a V5 Link in Service 5 154 5 4 9 Move a V5 User Port in Service 5 154 5 4 10 Delete V5 User Port 5 155 5 4 11 Delete V5 Link 5 155 5 4 12 Remove Communication Channel 5 156 AEM NB R1 3 VI Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Contents 5 4 13 Remove Communication Path 5 157 5 4 14 Remove Primary Link 5 157 5 4 15 Remove Secondary Link 5 158 5 4 16 Remove V5 Protection Group 2 5 158 5 4 17 Delete V5 Interface 5 159 6 Fault Management and Maintenance 6 1 6 1 Overview 6 1 6 2 Alarm Management 8 1 6 2 1 Overview 6 1 6 2 2 Maintain Up To Date Alarm Information 6 2 6 2 3 Alarm Notification to the User 6 3 6 2 4 Provide Access to the Current Alarm Data 6 7 6 2 5 Managing the Raising of Alarms 6 7 6 2 6 Manage Alarm Acknowledgment 6 8 6 2 7 Managing the Clearing of Alarms 6 8 6 2
420. tware Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p 43 Table 2 2 Packages Dependences To install the following package must be installed previously AnyMedia Serv OrbixMT OrbixTalk OrbixNames LUMOS ObjectStore RogueWave AnyMedia Client OrbixWeb jre symantec reportPro Netscape Help none System responses and inputs for this type of installation and for a full installation are similar Only the following differences could be found m When installation starts the package checks if a previous installation of the package already exists in the system If no previous package is found the following message will appear OK No previous package lt Package_Name gt have been found gt NOTE Refer to Type 2 and press Return on page 8 to see this response If one of the following messages appaers the installation will stop without changes on the system m The following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was completely installed and has the same version Previous completely installed package lt Package_Name gt version lt Package_Version gt have been found And it is the same to the new one you want to install lt Package_Version gt m following message appears if there is a previous package in the sys tem that was partially installed and has the same version Previous partially installed package Package
421. tween communi cation path and communication Step Procedure 1 Use the option menu Comm Path to select an appropriate CP 2 Use the option menu Comm Channel to select an appropriate CC 3 Click on Apply to cross connect the selected CP with the selected CC 4 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 145 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 6 7 V5 2 Group 2 Protection Protection Groups A protection group is used for defining a protection switching relationship where one or more standby timeslots provide protection for one ore more working com munication channels The working protected channels and the standby protect ing ones have to be provisioned If a working timeslot carrying a protected com munication channel becomes faulty a protection switch takes place In this case a standby timeslot is selected for replacing the faulty one If the faulty timeslot be comes operational again it will be added to the protection group as an standby timeslot non revertible switch After recovering the V5 2 Interface its initial provi sioned configuration is re established by the NE A V5 2 Interface supports two protection groups m Protection Group 1 which can only have one working communication channel and only one standby timeslot associated Protection Group 1 is automatically created if primary and secondary link are configured m Protection
422. twork The AEM NB supports this There are two types of network modifica tions m installation or removal of NEs m Modification of NEs 1 4 3 2 1 Installation and Removal of an NE Installation of a NE For installing a new NE in an existing network the following steps must be carried out 1 Check whether the new NE can be incorporated in the existing DCN plan drawn up in the network planning phase if not the DCN plan must first be revised Creation of the NE Assignment of the NE to a domain Logical connection of the NE Selection of the timing synchronization source Selection of the COMDAC protection scheme simplex duplex fF ODN Selection of those slots for which an absence of the plug in will be alarmed COMDAC 8 Provisioning of card types which are inserted in a slot All steps are described in detail in Chapter 5 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 1 25 Functional Description Working with AEM NB Removal of an NE If an NE is no longer managed by the AEM NB the administrator deletes it from the AEM NB database gt NOTE When an NE is deleted from the AEM NB database it is still fully functional The TL1 and TCP IP links between the AEM NB and the NE will be closed and the management access via the AEM NB is not possible until the NE is created and connected again 1 4 3 22 Modification of NEs Adding a NEs can be modified by adding or removing plug in units The AEM NB recog
423. ugh information files or installation scripts that something is invalid m external cancellation if the administrator kill the process kill 9 or Ctrl C In both cases the system informs about if files have been installed on the sys tem In this case the administrator must use the pkgrm command to remove the installation 2 24 Remove AnyMedia Package Installa tions In order to remove any AnyMedia package installations the administrator must ex ecute the command pkgrm Package Name gt NOTE Refer to Table 2 1 page 2 4 to obtain the AnyMedia packages names When a package is removed all files installed by it or created during the AnyMe dia operation such as data bases and temporal data files are erased in the target system 2 2 4 1 Remove AnyMedia Servers Package Complete the following procedure to remove the AnyMedia Servers package Step Procedure 1 Log in as root 2 pkgrm LuANY15S and press Return The following package is currently installed LuANY15S AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 server sparc LuANY15S X Xc Do you want to remove this package AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 43 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure ee 3 Type y and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LuANY15S gt This package contains scripts which will be executed with super user permission during the process of removing this pack
424. uipment AEM NB R1 3 C 8 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 3 2 1 Purpose The RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms command instructs the system to retrieve 1 all currently active alarms 2 currently active equipment alarms 3 currently ac tive facility alarms or 4 currently active system level alarms from the system 3 2 2 Input Format RTRV ALM AIDTYPE tid ctag Abortable Yes Privilege Code Reports Only GSI Confirmation Required No File Transfer No Related Autonomous Message None 3 2 3 Input Format Parameters tid Target ID This parameter appears in the TID Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic Target ID is the name of the system to which the command is addressed ctag Correlation Tag This parameter appears in the CTAG Block Type String Required No Default Type Dynamic This field is used to associate the command message to the response message AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 9 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 ee AIDTYPE Access Identifier Type Type List Required No Default Type Fixed Default ALL Access identifier type Expert English Comment ALL All COM Common 1 E1 EQPT Equipment C 3 2 4 Output Format If the command request completes successfully the following normal completion response is returned sid date
425. und Interface Contents Overview C 2 Northbound Interface Basics C 2 1 Northbound Interface Description Northbound Interface Specific TL1 Messages C 3 1 REPT ALM Report Alarm C 3 1 1 Purpose C 3 1 2 Output Format C 3 1 3 Output Format Parameters C 3 2 RTRV ALM Retrieve Alarms C 3 2 1 Purpose C 3 2 2 Input Format C 3 2 3 Input Format Parameters C 3 2 4 Output Format C 3 2 5 Output Format Parameters C 3 2 6 Generic Error Responses C 3 3 RTRV ALM ENV Retrieve Alarm Environment C 3 3 1 Purpose C 3 3 2 Input Format C 3 3 3 Input Format Parameters C 3 3 4 Output Format 3 3 5 Output Format Parameters C 3 3 6 Generic Error Responses AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 D Q p o A OQ A OQ E 5 p ko p p o a o 9 o a a p o p o a gt p o gt 08 99 C I 7 Contents AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Northbound Interface C 1 Overview This appendix provides you with information about the m Northbound interface basics and m Northbound interface specific TL1 messages C 2 Northbound Interface Basics 5 21 Northbound Interface Description General Two Types of Northbound Inter faces 363 211 412 The AnyMedia Access System Element Manager for Narrowband Services AEM NB Release 1 3 offers to any external OS a straight TL
426. urn Verifying package dependencies Processing package information Executing preremove script Removing pathnames in class channels 30 Removing pathnames in class common files list Executing postremove script Updating system information Removal of LuANY15C was successful You have now removed the AnyMedia Client package 363 211 412 AEM NB R1 3 Version 1 00 08 99 2 45 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure 2 2 4 3 Remove Third Party Packages The following procedure is the same for all parts of the Third Party software For example the procedure below describes the removal of the RogueWave package Complete the following procedure to remove the RogueWave package Step Procedure 1 Log in as root 2 Type pkgrm LuRWRT and press Return The following package is currently installed LuRWRT RogueWave Tools amp Threads Runtimes for AnyMediaNBEM R1 5 sparc 7 0 7 amp 1 1 2 Do you want to remove this package 3 Type y and press Return Removing installed package instance lt LuRWRT gt Verifying package dependencies Processing package information Removing pathnames in class lt none gt lt file list gt Updating system information Removal of LuRWRT was successful You have now removed the RogueWave package AEM NB R1 3 2 46 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 System Management Contents 3 1 Overvi
427. urs some of the already logged data has to be deleted The oldest recorded AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 3 31 System Management Log Management p 07 7474 1 4 Am 9 d day of one of the logs holding the largest number of days is always deleted log system determines which log shall be shortened as follows Table 3 21 How the Log be Shortened is Determined If then the log system will only one log type holds more days than delete oldest recorded day of this log the others type the longest log types hold the same delete oldest recorded day of the log number of days and the log for which type for which an event shall be an event shall be logged is among logged these logs the longest logs hold the same number select one of the longest log types in of days and the log for which an event the following order Autonomous Re shall be logged is not among these logs port Actions System Internal Events and delete oldest recorded day of this log type Alarms The log system issues an alarm if m one of the logs is shortened to a number of days below the minimum num ber of days l e also if a log is shortened that already holds fewer than the minimum number of days Alarm name LOG DEL PART m the current day of a log is deleted Alarm name LOG DEL FULL Restore Log Files When log files are restored cf Chapter 3 6 page 3 23 the log of the current day is not
428. ursor menu or select File gt Open or Service gt Provisioning gt Edit View via the menu bar The V5 ISDN BRA User Port window pops up 2 Usethe option menu Loopback Selection to select the clear loop back option amd click on Request Procedure via TL1 b Viathe TL1 Command Line Interface To clear a loopback enter the following TL1 command by using the TL1 command line interface cf Chapter 5 3 7 Staging parameter Command code blocks AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 6 39 Fault Management and Maintenance Information Management and Maintenance 6 5 Information Management and Maintenance 6 5 1 NE AEM NB Connection States Connection States There are five NE AEM NB connection states They depend on the availability of a TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and NE and also on the AEM NB s attempt to open a TL1 communication session with the NE NOT_CONNECTED Initial NE state when there is no connection between AEM NB and NE and the AEM NB is in a passive state avoiding any possibility of connection establishment with the NE NOT_CONNECTED TRYING Initial NE connection establishment state when the TL1 communication session between the AEM NB and NE is not available AEM NB login to NE via ACT USER command but the AEM NB is in an active state trying to open a connection TCP IP connection and TL1 communication session with the NE NOT CONNECTED CANCELLI
429. value is displayed and non editable Otherwise this field is empty and editable The behaviour of this fields when creating a V5 User Port is the following 1 The value in the first option menu is drop 1 2 The second option menu contains all the slots which has free drops Selecting any of them updates the con tent in the third option menu consequently If there are no slots with free drops the value None is displayed 3 The third option menu contains the free drops inside the slot selected in the second option menu The oper ator can select any of the free drops If there are no free drops the value None is displayed V5 User Port Address This V5 Layer 3 Port Address identi fies a V5 PSTN User Port within a V5 Interface Possible values 0 32767 If the user port is already created and cross connected to a V5 Interface the corresponding value is displayed and can not be changed If the user port is created and not cross connected the dis played value is editable In all the other cases this field is empty and editable 08 99 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning Parameters Buttons V5 PSTN User Port Service Configuration Description TX Gain This slider can be used to define the transmit gain in decibel relative to digital reference point Possible values 4 8 Step 0 5 RX Gain This slider can be used to define the receive gain in deci
430. vice Provisioning p Se 4 Procedure Complete the following procedure to edit view a secondary link Step Procedure 1 Select an appropriate feeder in the Secondary Link Selection list 2 Click on OK to confirm or click on Close to exit the window without action gt NOTE When a secondary link is created the following entities are automatically created protection group 1 time slot 16 is set to CC type and cross con nected with that protection group the CC related to primary link in that in terface is cross connected also with that protection group protection proto col communication path is created and cross connected with protection group 1 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 113 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning 5 4 5 Add V5 User Port Overview Each V5 User Port can contain a number of V5 User Port bearer channels 64 kbit s bearer channel CTP Connection Termination Point Each V5 Link con tains 32 V5 timeslots timeslot number 0 is reserved for synchronization pur poses which represent the CTPs corresponding to the physical timeslots which may be configured a V5 timeslot can be used as bearer channel or as communi cation channel Each V5 User Port bearer channel has to be associated cross connected with a unique V5 timeslot within a V5 1 Interface but for V5 2 Inter faces the association between V5 User Port bearer channels
431. w This appendix provides you with information about m System variables and m Configuration parameters B 2 System Variables The values of some system variables are specified in the file AnyMediaNBEM cfg which is located in the directory SANYMEDIAPATH cfg The system variables can be changed by editing their values in this file with a text editor The changes take effect after the system is restarted The following table shows selected variable names their meaning and default val ues The locations of the directories are relative to the main installation directory of the AEM NB Table 2 1 System Variables and their Default Values System Property Variable Name Default Value Location of alarm database AM databaseLocation AM db Location of configuration management data CM databaseLocation CM db base Location of NE management database NEM databaseLocation NEM db Location of security database OAM security databaseLocation Security db Location of Non volatile Data Storage CM directoryNVDS CM nefiles NVDS NVDS AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 B 1 System Variables and Configuration Parameters Configuration Parameters p ee Table 2 1 System Variables and their Default Values System Property Variable Name Default Value Location of log files OAM log directoryCurrentLogs log Minimum number of days incl current day OAM log minimumDaysKept 7 in the log Maximum size of all logged dat
432. w menu 3 10 Close 3 10 Lower 3 10 Maximize 3 10 Minimize 3 10 Move 3 10 Restore 3 10 Size 3 10 Windows basics 3 7 Workspace manager 3 12 Workspace menu 3 12 Logout 3 13 Minimize Restore Front Panel 3 13 Programs 3 13 Refresh 3 13 Restart Workspace Manager 3 13 Shuffle Up Down 3 13 AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 IN 5 Index AEM NB R1 3 IN 6 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412
433. ween interface and link Removing cross connection between V5 Link id and V5 Interface id may be service affecting Do you want to continue 6 Click on Close to exit the window AEM NB R1 3 5 108 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 3 Add Primary V5 2 Links Protection Groups A V5 2 Interface supports two protection groups Protection Group 1 which is handled by setting the primary feeder and secondary feeder cf this section and Chapter 5 4 4 page 5 111 If the primary feeder becomes faulty a protection switch to the secondary feeder takes place m Protection Group 2 which can have up to 43 working communication channels protected and up to three standby timeslots The handling of protection group 2 is de scribed in Chapter 5 4 6 7 page 5 146 gt NOTE Only a primary link can be cross connected to a communication channel gt NOTE Protection switching is possible only for V5 2 protocol Window The Primary Link window displays the V5 primary link information The primary link configuration of a V5 2 Interface identifies the V5 Link and the 5 communica tion channel that are selected to carry the signalling which is not related to on de mand services Control Link Control and BCC protocol This window can only be reached from the V5 2 Interface window cf Chapter 5 4 1 2 page 5 90 by clicking on Set Primary AEM NB R1 3 363
434. will only have to send one ACT USER TL1 message which will be spawned by the AEM NB to all the NEs in the network managed by the OS To do that the AEM NB will have to maintain some information e g the TIDs and IP addresses of all the NEs managed by the OS and a UID PID pair to open a virtual circuit on each NE The AEM NB operator will be provided with the required set of script tools to maintain this information easily In the same way only one CANC USER message sent by the OS to the AEM NB will be enough to close all the virtual circuits with the NEs and the north bound interface session For the routing of the TL1 messages the NEs TID is used and from every NE configuration table the corresponding IP address is determinated Incoming mes sages that have no TID field empty are sent to all connected NEs In case the OS will send a TL1 request message the OS has to support as many completion responses as NEs are connected Messages coming from the NEs responses and autonomous output are queued until they are complete i e re ceived and then sent to the northbound OS There are no guarantees about the order in which responses are sent to the OS AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 TL1 cf Command and Message Manual TCP Authorization Authentication Info TL1 R1 0 R1 1 R1 3 TCP IP i NEs
435. window AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 99 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm Parameters Buttons E1 Feeders List Description This scrolling list contains E1 feeders related to the NE Se lecting a row enables Edit and Label buttons see below E1 Feeder Displays the id of the physical feeders V5 Interface id If the E1 feeder is associated with a V5 Link and the V5 Link is cross connected to a V5 Interface the value if the V5 Interface id is displayed here Possible values 0 16777215 If there is no cross connection or the V5 Link is not available the value is left empty If the feeder is in use by a permanent leased line group Leased is displayed V5 Link id Indicates the value of the V5 Link id if applica ble If this feeder has no associated V5 Link id the field is left empty Possible values 0 255 If the feeder is in use by a permanent leased line group Leased is displayed Command But In case the feeder is used for leased lines only the Edit tons button is available Edit E1 This button is available only if a row in the table is selected It provides access to the E1 Feeder V5 Link win dow Label Once a row in the table is selected this button is available for one of the following cases m The E1 feeder has a V5 Link already associated In this case the button is labelled Edit V5 Link and provides access
436. window with progress indicator and cancel option that will be displayed any time there is a long duration task being performed such as SW Download The following figure shows an ex ample In Progress NE database backup on 12 in progress NE database backup Launched Figure 5 22 Example of an In Progress Window A download progress indicator will be shown in the progress bar The soft ware download operation consists of an FTP operation and an initializa tion of the NE after the FTP operation The status bar shows which of these two operations is currently active The progress bar shows how much of the FTP transfer is complete After the FTP transfer has finished a new progress window pops up In this window the progress bar will reach the 90 mark after 5 minutes this time can be configured in a pref erences file Then the progress bar continually shows 90 until the con nection between the AEM NB and the NE is established again The Cancel button will be disabled if the SW Download command is executed i e an FTP process is still running gt NOTE The SW download process cannot be cancelled 7 Wait until this process is finished The following errors will stop the download process AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 67 Configuration Management Provisioning Equipment Configuration p 0 7 1 m does not match login and password The AEM NB returns oper a
437. with the installation of LuANY15S y n 49 Type y and press Return Installing AnyMedia NB Element Manager Release 1 5 server as LuANY15S Installing part 1 of 1 files list gt verifying class common lt files list gt verifying class channels 30 1 Executing postinstall script Starting orbixd daemon in the system Starting ns daemon in the system s1224 OrbixNames Release 1 1 s1369 OrbixOTM package Release 1 0 Checking AnyMedia EM R1 5 naming contexts Starting CreateNEM db process Getting the AnyMedia installation path AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 2 25 Software Installation and Commissioning Installation Procedure p See 1 3 7 Getting NEM data base path OK Creating NEM Data Base OK exit OK Starting CreateCMR12_db process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting CM R1 2 data base path OK Creating CM R1 2 Data Base OK exit OK Starting AMDbPopulate process Getting the AnyMedia installation path OK Getting Alarm data base path OK Creating Alarm Data Base Creating os_Collection lt HostElement gt Creating ListOfAlarmsPerHost Creating segment and ElementManager Host 0 exit OK Getting the AnyMedia installation path Getting OAM Security data base path OK Creating Database
438. xceeds failure count threshold T FC INT Internal pack failure exceeds failure count UNXPRS Unexpected reset a only available via AEM NB SRVEFF Service Effect This parameter appears in the Common Block Type List Required Yes SRVEFF indicates the effect of the reported alarm on service Expert English Comment NSA Non Service Affecting SA Service Affecting OCRDAT Occurrence Date This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Date Required Yes OCRDAT indicates the date of the condition being reported and has the format YY MM DD year month day 70 lt yy lt 99 maps to 1970 through 1999 respectiv ely 00 lt lt 37 maps to 2000 through 2037 respectively OCRTM Occurrence Time This parameter appears in the Common Block Type Time Required Yes indicates the time of the condition being reported and has the format HH MM SS hours minutes seconds AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 7 Northbound Interface Northbound Interface Specific TL1 E SeSe eee CONDDESCR Condition Description Type String Required Yes Min chars 1 Max chars 68 This is the text description for the reported alarm condition This information can be found in the Correlations Tables The 68 characters included a pair of escaped quotes AIDTYPE Access Identifier Type Type List Required Yes MODIFIER is the message modifier to the REPT ALM message Expert English Comment COM Common E1 EQPT Eq
439. xisting V5 User Port use the radio buttons to choose a de sired user port select an appropriate entry in the list and click on Edit V5 User Port The corresponding window pops up cf Chapter 5 4 5 1 page 5 118 for PSTN cf Chapter 5 4 5 2 page 5 124 for ISDN BRA remove an existing V5 User Port select the desired entry in the list and click on Remove V5 User Port cf Chapter 5 4 10 page 5 155 exit the window click on Close AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 5 117 Configuration Management Provisioning Service Provisioning mm 5 4 5 1 Configure V5 PSTN User Port Overview The PSTN entity represents a PSTN User Port which can be associated to a V5 Interface It contains only one user port bearer channel The PSTN protocol information for all the POTS User Ports associated to a spe cific V5 Interface V5 1 V5 2 is carried by the PSTN V5 Communication Path and no provisioning action is needed for this subscriber information allocation V5 Link V5 User Port V5 Interface Bearer Channel Connection Communication Path Communication Channel Allocation Timeslot Allocation not provisionable Ps Signalling bearer channel relationship Figure 5 42 Functional Model of PSTN User Port Configuration Procedure Complete the following procedure to configure a V5 PSTN User Port Step Procedure jn Select All gt NE gt Shelf gt LPZ120 LPZ100
440. yMedia Access System where ISDN and POTS service is possible Because ISDN subscribers are provisioned the frame relay function has to be performed Therefore at least one IO HDLC plug in is necessary optionally a second one for protection V5 communication channel information is frame relayed on the lO HDLC plug in and routed towards ISDN subscribers for ISDN D channel information and to the COMDAC for V5 layer 3 protocols respectively Module An executable installed on a Host AEM NB R1 3 363 211 412 Version 1 00 08 99 GL 7 Glossary ee N NE AnyMedia Access System Network Element Non Volatile Data Storage NVDS This refers to a capability of the AnyMedia Access System to store information in such a way as to survive indefi nite periods of total power failure The current values for all provisionable parameters are stored in the NVDS and hence are the parameter values that will be used on subsequent NE power up Non revertive mode A certain system resource which has become faulty and thus caused a switch to or a replacement by a certain other standby resource is NOT reused automatically if the temporarily faulty resource returns back to operation Instead of this the standby resource is used furtheron A switch back may take place later on but is independent from the recovery of the temporarily faulty resource Examples a If a reference clock switch between COMDAC phase locked loop PLL reference clock inputs has
441. ys on the CIU are used as alarm outputs to indicate active alarms The assignment to the alarm LEDs is provisionable by TL1 commands Miscellaneous m Miscellaneous alarm closure inputs alarm elaste The CIU supports 8 ground closure alarm inputs to indicate environmental puts fault conditions Alarms detected at the external alarm inputs are treated in the same way as alarms detected in the AEM NB itself An additional LED MISC on the CIU faceplate indicates an active alarm input Alarm cut off The alarm cut off function ACO provides the possibility to immediately cut off the function audible visible alarms active on the alarm interface outputs The ACO function is activated by pressing the ACO button on the CIU faceplate or with a TL1 com mand 5 1 5 Testing Interfaces Two test modes can be used for testing m Manual testing Manual testing means local testing with external equipment without using the system s integrated testing capabilities AEM NB R1 3 5 4 Version 1 00 08 99 363 211 412 Configuration Management Provisioning Overview mm Interfaces for manual testing Faceplate jack DROP on the CIU Faceplate jack CHAN MON on the CIU m Integrated testing Integrated testing means testing using only the system s integrated testing capabilities This can be done even remotely Interfaces for integrated testing connector on the shelf connection panel Connector on the faceplate of the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Polaroid PDV-088PT User's Manual  Samsung GT-E1180 Benutzerhandbuch      MANUALE UTENTE USER MANUAL  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file